Handbooks and companions 2009 (UK): New Titles and Key Backlist

Routledge

New Titles and Key Backlist

Handbooks & Companions

2009

www.routledge.com/reference

www.routledge.com/reference Welcome to the Routledge

Handbooks Catalogue New Titles & Key Backlist 2009

Page 2

Page 6

Page 11

COMPLETE CATALOGUE This catalogue only includes a selection of our Handbooks.

Our online catalogue gives you the power to search for any book currently in print by title, ISBN or full text. All the entries have a description of the book’s content. www.routledge.com/reference

THE EASY WAY TO ORDER Ordering online is fast and efficient, simply follow the on-screen instructions and your order will be sent to our distributors for immediate dispatch.

e-UPDATES Register your email address at www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates to receive information on books, journals and other news within your area of interest.

eBOOKS – MARKED AS ‘eBOOK’ IN THIS CATALOGUE Thousands of our titles are available as eBooks – in Adobe, Microsoft Reader and Mobipocket formats or available to browse online. www.eBookstore.tandf.co.uk

Page 30

Page 31

Page 33

Page 51

Page 52

CONTENTS

CONTACTS

Architecture and Urban Planning . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Asian Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Economics and Business Studies . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Geography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Language and Linguistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Media, Cultural Studies and Literature . . . . . . 25 Music and Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Politics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Religion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Sociology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Sport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Order form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Back of Catalogue Library Recommendation form .Centre of Catalogue

MARKETING ENQUIRIES Laura Shuckburgh Marketing Coordinator Email: laura.shuckburgh@tandf.co.uk

Trade customers’ representatives, agents and distribution For a list of all trade customers’ representatives, agents and distributors for UK, Rest of World, North America and South America visit: http://www.routledge.com/representatives

ARCHITECTURE AND URBAN PLANNING

FORTHCOMING

NEW

FORTHCOMING

Landfill Engineering

4TH EDITION

Housing Design Handbook

Edited by Geoffrey B. Card

Handbook of Road Technology

A Guide to Good Practice

Environmental pressures have forced a major rethink on the management and use of landfill. The engineering questions are considerable, and have not been discussed much in the literature to date. This new work provides an up to date Handbook on the engineering of landfill materials from design and construction of new facilities to the re-use and development on closed landfill sites.

Edited by M. G. Lay, Professional Engineer, Australia

Edited by David Levitt, Levitt Bernstein Associates, UK

Following the EU Landfill Directive and in response to pressure, the UK now needs to comply with the diversion and separation of biodegradable domestic waste from hazardous waste and to give greater emphasis to the re-cycling of waste materials. This will change the character of landfills in the future as the materials changes. The engineering properties of landfill materials are a function not only of their physical characteristics but also of the chemistry of degradation.

This fully revised fourth edition of Max Lay’s well-established reference work covers all aspects of the technology of roads and road transport. It forms a comprehensive but accessible reference for all professionals and students interested in roads, road transport and the wide range of disciplines involved with roads.

This book provides a reference to landfill characteristics, measurement, analysis and modelling landfill behaviour, recycling materials and engineering design. It presents the background science and engineering methods to solve these issues.

International in scope, it embraces all aspects of urban and rural road technology, drawing on the author’s many decades of consulting and operational experience in the financing, planning, design, construction, operation and management of roads in various countries, and is built on a sound theoretical basis. The book begins with coverage of the important procedures involved in the construction of roads, from road planning policies and design considerations to the selection of materials and the building of roads and bridges. It then offers insights into road operating environments that include driver behaviour, traffic flow, lighting and maintenance, and assesses the cost, economics, transport implications and environmental impact of road use.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Landfill Characterisation 3. Chemistry of Waste Materials 4. Engineering Properties of Waste Materials 5. Design of New Landfills 6. Maintenance and Re-use of Existing Landfills 7. Development on Landfills

Presenting the latest actively-used technology, the Handbook of Road Technology continues to be an indispensable international resource for students and professionals in transport planning, engineering, operations and economics.

February 2010: 216x138: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-37006-6: £60.00 eBook: 978-0-203-03003-5

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Definitions 3. History of Roads 4. The Management of Roads 5. Road Needs 6. Road Location 7. Residential Streets 8. Pavement Materials 9. Water in Pavements 10. Stabilisation 11. Pavement Design 12. Bituminous Pavements 13. Drainage 14. Pavement Performance 15. Bridges 16. Driver Behaviour 17. Traffic Flow and Capacity 18. Speeds 19. Road Geometry 20. Intersections 21. Traffic Signs 22. Pavement Markings 23. Traffic Signals 24. Lighting 25. Construction 26. Maintenance 27. Road Vehicles 28. Safety 29. Road User Costs and Charges 30. Road Transport 31. Transport Planning 32. Environmental Factors 33. Peripheral Technologies

Additionally, increasing government pressure to redevelop brownfield land is driving the re-use of landfill. This is making engineers re-think the techniques of disposal of wastes in new landfill to ultimately allow safe redevelopment of these sites. It also prompts the understanding of the characteristics of existing landfills to develop safe engineering solutions.

US $120.00

April 2009: 246x174: 960pp Hb: 978-0-415-47265-4: £150.00

How well have architects succeeded in building housing and what lessons can be learned from their triumphs and failures?

The Housing Design Handbook will give you a complete understanding of what makes successful housing design.

Through the analysis of work by Levitt Bernstein and a wide range of other UK practices, it illustrates good design principles and accumulates a wealth of knowledge in a readily accessible format for the first time.

Written by a recognised authority in the field, the book provides: • a range of cases to illustrate the way that different issues in the design of housing have been approached and with what degree of success • a review of the place of housing as the most significant built form in the urban landscape • an understanding of the importance of achieving a sense of place as the bedrock of social continuity • a discussion of how flexibility might be achieved in order to accommodate future changes in housing need, if wholesale demolition and replacement is to be avoided • more recent examples which explore why certain social groupings are more resistant to design innovation than others and why there has been such an architectural breakthrough in market led, higher density urban living David Levitt examines the ideas behind the schemes and assesses how successful and sustainable those ideas have proved, making this an essential reference for professionals and students practicing and studying the design and commissioning of housing.

September 2009: 276x219: 320pp Pb: 978-0-415-49150-1: £34.99 US $62.95

US $265.00

For Handbooks in Geography, see Page 18

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

1

2

ASIAN STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

NEW

Routledge Handbook of Japanese Culture and Society

Routledge Handbook of South Asian Politics

Edited by Theodore C. Bestor and Victoria Bestor, both at Harvard University, USA

Edited by Paul R. Brass, Professor Emeritus of Political Science and South Asian Studies, University of Washington, USA

The Routledge Handbook of Japanese Culture and Society is an interdisciplinary resource that focuses on contemporary Japan and the social and cultural trends that are important at the beginning of the twenty-first century. This Handbook provides a cutting-edge and comprehensive survey of significant phenomena, institutions, and directions in Japan today, on issues ranging from gender and family, the environment, race and ethnicity, and urban life, to popular culture and electronic media. As such, it is an invaluable reference tool for anyone interested in Japan’s culture and society.

Selected Contents: Japan at Mid-Century: From Radio Tokyo to the Tokyo Olympics Peter Duus. Cultural Approaches to Political Identity and Discourse David Leheny. Politics, Language and Society Nanette Gottlieb.

Religion in Contemporary Japanese Lives Mark Mullins.

War and Memory Alexis Dudden. Identity and Status Social Class and Identity David Slater. The Politics of Gender Robin Le Blanc. The Japanese Family in Flux Merry White. Race, Ethnicity and Minorities in Japan Richard Siddle. Life on the Margins: The Homeless, Migrant Workers, and the Disabled Carolyn Stevens.

Queer Culture Mark McLelland. Mizushobai and Sex Industries Haeng-ja Sachiko Chung. Aging and Social Welfare Leng Leng Thang. Urban Landscapes Paul Waley. Architecture and the Built Environment Bill Coaldrake. Cultural Flows: Japan and East Asia Koichi Iwabuchi. Japanese Education Roger Goodman. Law and Society Lawrence Repeta. The Rise of the Civil Sector Akihiro Ogawa. Popular Japanese Literature and the Culture of Publishing Stephen Snyder. Japanese Manga and Anime Susan Napier. Japanese Film and Television Aaron Gerow. Music Culture Ian Condry.

Sports Culture William Kelly. Japanese Cuisine and Food Culture Theodore Bestor and Victoria Bestor October 2009: 246x174: 624pp Hb: 978-0-415-43649-6: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter US $190.00

India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, and Nepal

The Routledge Handbook of South Asian Politics examines key issues in politics of the five independent states of the South Asian region: India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, and Nepal. Written by experts in their respective areas, this Handbook introduces the reader to the politics of South Asia by presenting the prevailing agreements and disagreements in the literature.

In the first two sections, the Handbook provides a comprehensive introduction to the modern political history of the states of the region and an overview of the independence movements in the former colonial states. The other sections focus on the political changes that have occurred in the postcolonial states since independence, as well as the successive political changes in Nepal during the same period, and the structure and functioning of the main governmental and non-governmental institutions, including the structure of the state itself (unitary or federal), political parties, the judiciary, and the military. Further, the contributors explore several aspects of the political process and political and economic change, especially issues of pluralism and national integration, political economy, corruption and criminalization of politics, radical and violent political movements, and the international politics of the region as a whole.

This unique reference work provides a comprehensive and up-to-date survey of the state of the field and is an invaluable resource for students and academics interested in South Asian Studies, South Asian Politics, Comparative Politics and International Relations.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Paul R. Brass Part 1: Colonialism, Nationalism, and Independence in South Asia: India, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka 1. India and Pakistan Ian Talbot 2. Sri Lanka’s Independence: Shadows Over a Colonial Graft Nira Wickramasinghe Part 2: Political Change, Political Parties, and the Issue of Unitary vs.

Federal Forms of Government 3. Political Change, Political Structure and the Indian State Since Independence John Harriss 4. Parties and Politics in India Virginia Van Dyke 5. Pakistan’s Politics and Its Economy Shahid Javed Burki 6. Party Overinstitutionalization, Contestation and Democratic Degradation in Bangladesh Harry Blair 7. Politics and Governance in Post-Independence Sri Lanka Neil DeVotta 8. Trajectories of Democracy and Restructuring of the State in Nepal Krishna Hachhethu and David N. Gellner Federalism and Centre-State Relations 9. The Old and the New Federalism in Independent India Lloyd I. Rudolph and Susanne Hoeber Rudolph Part 3: The Judiciary 10. India’s Judiciary: Imperium in Imperio? Shylashri Shankar 11. Balancing Act: Prudence, Impunity and Pakistan’s Jurisprudence Paula R. Newberg 12. Confronting Constitutional Curtailments: Attempts to Rebuild Independence of the Judiciary in Bangladesh Sara Hossein and Tanjib-ul Alam 13. Executive Sovereignty: The Judiciary in Sri Lanka Shylashri Shankar Part 4: Pluralism and National Integration: Language Issues 14. Politics of Language in India E. Annamalai 15. Language Problems and Politics in Pakistan Tariq Rahman Part 5: Crises of National Unity 16. Crises of National Unity in India: Punjab, Kashmir and the Northeast Gurharpal Singh 17. Communal and Caste Politics and Conflicts in India Steven I. Wilkinson 18. Ethnic and Islamic Militancy in Pakistan Mohammad Waseem 19. Ethnic Conflict and the Civil War in Sri Lanka Jayadeva Uyangoda Part 6: Political Economy India 20. The Political Economy of Development in India Since Independence Stuart Corbridge 21. The Political Economy of Agrarian Change in India Jan Breman Sri Lanka 22. Economic Development and Socio-Political Change in Sri Lanka Since Independence W. D. Lakshman Part 7: Comparative Chapters 23. The Militaries of South Asia Stephen P. Cohen 24. Corruption and the Criminalization of Politics in South Asia Stanley A. Kochanek 25. Radical and Violent Political Movements Sumanta Banerjee 26. The International Politics of South Asia Vernon Hewitt. Bibliography June 2009: 246x174: 464pp Hb: 978-0-415-43429-4: £110.00 before publication; £125.00 thereafter

US $180.00

eBooks in Asian Studies To find out more about our eBooks in Asian Studies please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk For Handbooks in Media and Cultural Studies, see Page 25

For Handbooks in Politics, see Page 33

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

ASIAN STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

Routledge Handbook of Indian Politics

Routledge Handbook of South Asian Culture and Society

The Routledge Handbook of Japanese Politics

Edited by Atul Kohli and Prerna Singh, both at Princeton University, USA

Edited by Veena Das, John Hopkins University, USA

Edited by Alisa Gaunder, Southwestern University, USA

India’s growing economic and socio-political importance on the global stage has triggered an increased interest in that country. Scholars, policy analysts, students and the curious layperson alike are keen to gain a basic understanding of the ways in which the world’s largest democracy functions. As a result, there is at present an unprecedented need for a ready reference that provides a concise but comprehensive introduction to the central themes of Indian politics and this Handbook fills this niche. Chapters are structured along the themes of state, society, and the politics that links the two in the context of post-Independence India. In the section entitled ‘The State’ a spectrum of India’s leaders; institutions, such as political parties and federalism; economic growth and social development; and politics in different states are examined. The section on ‘Society’ analyzes identity politics; the relationship between religion and society; and various aspects of civil society.

The final section – ‘International Perspectives’ – analyzes India’s foreign relations as well as a selection of national security issues. The contributions are written by experts in their respective field, and consequently, the Handbook offers an invigorating initiation into the seemingly daunting and complex terrain of Indian politics. It is targeted primarily towards academics, policy analysts, researchers and graduates as well as undergraduate students.

June 2010: 246x174: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-77685-1: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter US $190.00

The Routledge Handbook of South Asian Culture and Society presents key issues on culture and society in the South Asian context. Written by experts in their respective areas, the Handbook introduces the reader to the field.

The Routledge Handbook of Japanese Politics is an advanced level reference guide which surveys the current state of Japanese Politics, featuring both traditional topics and cutting edge research.

Emphasizing the significant changes that have been taking place in South Asian societies in light of globalization and the critical responses this has generated, the chapters capture the new kinds of themes across the domains of religion, politics, economics, and kinship. Taking into account economic and political changes in the different South Asian societies, the contibutors provide invaluable insight into the cultural life of the region. Thereby, a ‘history of the moment’ of South Asian culture and society is presented.

The volume is divided into five sections covering domestic politics, civil society, social policy, political economy and international relations/security. The first four sections begin with an overview chapter that provides historical background information on the section’s overarching topic. The chapters that follow explore more specific topics in the sub-area. In the final section, historical background information is contained in the individual chapters which cover the diverse areas of international political economy, security and foreign policy.

This comprehensive reference work will be an invaluable source of information to students and academics interested in cultural studies, anthropology and sociology and South Asian studies.

Offering a complete overview of the full spectrum of Japanese politics, the Handbook is an invaluable resource for academics, researchers, policy analysts, graduate and undergraduate students studying this ever-evolving field.

Selected Contents: 1. Institutional and Cultural Framework 2. Modernity: Its Promises and its Threats 3. Gender 4. Geography, Environment, Population and Urban Studies 5. Religion 6. Literature, theatre, music and the Arts 7. Popular Culture March 2010: 246x189: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-77557-1: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter US $190.00

Selected Contents: Part 1: Domestic Politics 1. The ’1955 System’, Reform in the 1990s and the Current Institutional Landscape of National Politics 2. The Liberal Democratic Party: An Explanation of its Continued Dominance 3. The Democratic Party of Japan: Party Leadership, Organization and Ideology 4. The Dynamics of Coalition Government in Japan 5. Prime Ministerial Leadership: Did Koizumi Institutionalize a Strong Prime Ministership and Cabinet or Does Strong Prime Ministerial Leadership Remain Idiosyncratic? 6. The Effects of the Lower House Electoral System (post-1994) on Political Party Organization, Voting and Electioneering 7. Electioneering in Japan: the Role of Personal Support Organizations and Local Branch Offices and/or the Strategies of Individual Politicians 8. Money and Politics: The Effects of the New Political Funding Regulations Over the Last 15 Years 9. Law and Politics: The Role of Courts in Policy Making 10. Local Politics Part 2: Civil Society 11. An Overview of the Landscape of Civil Society in Japan 12. NPOs and Judicial Reform 13. Civil Society and the Internet 14. The Labor Movement 15. The Rightist Movement 16. The Women’s Movement Part 3: Social Policy 17. Overview of the Japanese Welfare State 18. Policies for an Aging Society (Pension and Healthcare) 19. Policies Addressing the Emerging Income Gap 20. Gender Related Policies 21. Immigration Policy 22. Environmental Policy Part 4: Political Economy 23. Institutional Changes in the Japanese Model of Capitalism 24. The Dynamics of the PostBubble Economy 25. The Debate over Economic Reform 26. The Politics and Implications of Postal System Reform Part 5: International Relations and Security 27. Japan and East Asian Economic Regionalism 28. Japan’s Security Policy in East Asia 29. The Politics of Constitutional Revision 30. Japan-U.S. Relations 31. Japan-China Relations 32. Japan-EU Relations 33. Japan as a ’Soft Power’ Superpower and/or Japan’s Response to International Norms October 2010: 246x174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-55137-3: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter US $170.00

For Handbooks in Politics, see Page 33

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

3

4

ASIAN STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

Routledge Handbook of Indian and South Asian History

Routledge Handbook of the South Asian Diaspora

Edited by Crispin Bates, University of Edinburgh, UK

South Asia’s diaspora is among the world’s largest and most widespread, and it is growing exponentially. In 2001, the government of India estimated that 20 million persons of Indian descent live abroad; and many more millions have roots to other countries of the subcontinent, in Pakistan, Bangladesh and Sri Lanka. There are three million South Asians in the UK and approximately the same number resides in North America. South Asians are an extremely significant presence in Southeast Asia and Africa, and increasingly visible in the Middle East.

This Handbook presents key issues in Indian and South Asian history from earliest time to 1947, with an emphasis on the modern period since 1600. Written by experts in their respective areas, the Handbook introduces the reader to the field. The book is structured chronologically and highlights issues that have most intensely concerned historians as well as innovative departures and areas of investigation in recent scholarship. Topics discussed include subjects that are still of relevance in contemporary India, such as Islamic, Hindu and Sikh Revivalism, Hindu nationalism, gender and the Indian family, and low-caste politics.

Chapters included also deal with the histories of Nepal, Bhutan, Afghanistan, Sri Lanka, and Bangladesh. The last section of the book covers the partition of India and Pakistan and the modern history of South Asia after independence. It concludes with a summary chapter on South Asia and the modern world. Time lines, maps and complete bibliographies for further reading complement this comprehensive reference work. It will be an invaluable source of information to students and academics interested in South Asian studies, colonial history and modern Asian history.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Early Indian and South Asian History 3. Medieval Indian and South Asian History 4. South Asia and the Indian Ocean World 5. The Ascendance and Decline of Mughal Power 6. The Marathas 7. European Trade and Socio-Economic Change in the Eighteenth Century 8. Colonial Transformations – The East India Company and India in the Early 19th Century 9. The Uprising of 1857 and the British Empire in India 10. The Indian Princely States 11. Industrialisation 12. Information and Communications 13. Science, Medicine and Technology 14. Agricultural Change from 1500 to 1947 15. Islamic Revivalism 16. Hindu Revivalism and the Hindi Language Movement 17. Sikh Revivalism 18. Gender and the South Asian Family 19. The Growth of Civil Society and Emergence of Indian Nationalism 20. The Swadeshi Movement 21. Hindu Nationalism 22. Gandhi and the Independence Movement 23. Left Politics 24. The Working Class and Working Class Movements 25. Low-caste, Adivasi and Dalit Politics 26. The Depression and Inter-War Economy 27. The Indian Middle Classes 28. The Pakistan Movement 29. The Partition of India 30. Colonial and Post-colonial Sri Lanka 31. Afghanistan: Tribalism and the Struggle for Unity 32. Nepal: From Dependency to Revolution 33. Bhutan: Isolation and Change 34. The Making of Modern Bangladesh 35. Indian History since Independence 36. South Asia and the World

Edited by Joya Chatterji and David Washbrook, both at University of Cambridge, UK

This inter-disciplinary Handbook on the South Asian diaspora brings together contributions by leading scholars and rising stars on different aspects of its history, anthropology and geography, as well as its contemporary political and socio-cultural implications. The Handbook situates the contemporary diaspora firmly within an historical context.

South Asians have travelled abroad for many reasons, in many guises, to many destinations for many centuries. The first section of the Handbook provides a historically grounded analysis of these movements of people. It includes chapters on the following themes: mobile South Asians in the early-modern world, diaspora and Empire, and the diaspora in the age of nation states. The second part of the Handbook centres on politics, culture and identity in the South Asian diaspora, thus offering the reader an overview on transnational politics and economics, culture in the diaspora and the socio-cultural impact of the South Asian diaspora on the countries where they have settled.

This much needed and pioneering venture provides an invaluable reference work for students, scholars and policy makers world wide interested in South Asian Studies.

Selected Contents: Part 1: The History of the South Asian Diaspora the Early-Modern to the Contemporary World A) Mobile South Asians in the Early-Modern World 1. Military Labour Migration 2. Mobile Artisans 3. Religion, Pilgrimage and Mobility 4. Indian Muslim Travellers in Arabia and Persia B) Diaspora and Empire C) Soldiers of the Raj: the Sikh Diaspora 1. South Asian Seafarers in War and Peace: Indian Lascars on British Ships 2. The Context for Colonial Migration from South India Indian Indentured Labour in South East Asia, the Caribbean and Africa 3. Women, Work and Marriage in the Diaspora 4. The Colonial State and Imperial Migration: the Indian Emigration Acts, 18391922 5. ‘Counterflows’ to Colonialism: Indians in Britain in the 18th and 19th Centuries 6. Barriers to South Asian Migration: the ‘Whites Only’ Commonwealth and the Komagata Maru Affair D) Diaspora in the Age of Nation States 1. South Asian Migration to the UK and US and the New Immigration Policies 2. UK and US 3. Sri Lanka’s Diaspora 4. Twice-Migrants from East Africa 5. Bengalis in Britain 6. Pakistan Abroad Part 2: Politics, Culture and Identity in the South Asian Diaspora A) Transnational politics and economics 1. Gandhi and Indianness in South Africa 2. Radicalism Overseas: the Ghadar Movement 3. Long Distance Nationalism: the Vishwa Hindu Parishad 4. Transnationalism and the Transformation of ‘Home’ by ‘Abroad’: ‘Londonis’ and Sylhet 5. Kerala’s Gulf Connection: Emigration, Remittances and their Macroeconomic Impact 6. Stateless in South Asia: the MQM and Tamil Tigers 7. Terror and the Diaspora 8. India and its Diaspora: PIOs, NRI’s and ‘Pravesi Divas’ B) Culture in the Diaspora 1. Hinduism in the Carribean 2. Faith and Observance Among British Pakistanis 3. Deobandi Islam in Pakistan 4. South Asian Diasporic Muslims, Islam and the Post 9/11 World 5. Constructing Hyderbadi Community Abroad 5. Socio-linguistics in the Indian Diaspora 6. Marriage and Marital Violence Among South Asians in the USA C) The Diaspora Strikes Back 1. Diasporic Cities in Britain: Bradford, Manchester, Leicester, London 2. ‘Indian’ Food in the USA 3. Asian Gangs in London 4. ‘Legals’ and ‘Illegals’ in North America 5. South Asian Writers and the Conceptualization of ‘Diaspora’ June 2010: 246x174: 464pp Hb: 978-0-415-48010-9: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter

US $190.00

July 2011: 246x174: 416pp Hb: 978-0-415-48978-2: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter US $190.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS STUDIES

The Routledge Companion to Accounting History

The Routledge Companion to Fair Value and Financial Reporting

The Routledge Companion to International Business Coaching

Edited by John Richard Edwards and Stephen P. Walker, both at Cardiff University, UK

Edited by Peter Walton, ESSEC-KPMG Financial Reporting Chair, ESSEC Business School, Paris, France

Edited by Michel Moral, University of Paris VIII, France and Geoffrey Abbott, Institute of Executive Coaching, Australia

The Routledge Companion to Accounting History shows how the seemingly innocuous practice of accounting has pervaded human existence in fascinating ways at numerous times and places; from ancient civilisations to the modern day, and from the personal to the political.

Placing the history of accounting in context with other fields of study, the collection gives invaluable insights to subjects such as the rise of capitalism, the control of labour, gender and family relationships, racial exploitation, the functioning of the state, and the pursuit of military conflict. An engaging and comprehensive overview also examining geographical differences, this Companion is split into key sections, which explore: • changing technologies used to represent financial and other data • historical development of accounting theory and practice • accounting institutions and those who perform accounting • accountancy and the economy • accounting, society and culture • the role of accounting in the government, protection and financing of states Including chapters on the important role played by accountancy in religious organizations, a review of how the discipline is portrayed in fine art and popular culture, and analysis of sharp practice and corporate scandals, The Routledge Companion to Accounting History has a breadth of coverage that is unmatched in this growing area of study.

Bringing together leading writers in the field, this is an essential reference work for any student of accounting, business and management, and history.

Selected Contents: Introduction: Synthesis and Engagement Part 1: The Discipline 1. Structures, Territories and Tribes 2. Historiography 3. Subjects, Sources and Dissemination Part 2: Technologies 4. Ancient Accounting 5. Bookkeeping 6. Mechanisation and Computerisation Part 3: Theory and Practice 7. Financial Accounting Theory 8. Financial Accounting Practice 9. Management Accounting: Theory and Practice 10. Auditing Part 4: Institutions 11. Professionalisation 12. Practitioners, Work and Firms 13. Education 14. Regulation Part 5: Economy 15. Capitalism 16. National Accounting 17. Finance and Financial Institutions 18. Railroads 19. Scandals Part 6: Society and Culture 20. Gender 21. Race and Ethnicity 22. Indigenous Peoples and Colonialism 23. Emancipation 24. Religion 25. Creative Arts Part 7: Polity 26. The State 27. Military 28. Taxation 2008: 246x174: 640pp Hb: 978-0-415-41094-6: £125.00

US $255.00

Comprising contributions from a unique mixture of academics, standard setters and practitioners, and edited by an internationally recognized expert, this book, on a controversial and intensely debated topic, is the only definitive reference source available on the topics of fair value and financial reporting.

Drawing chapters from a diverse range of contributors on different aspects of the subject together into one volume, it: • examines the use of fair value in international financial reporting standards and the US standard SFAS 157 Fair Value Measurement, setting out the case for and against • looks at fair value from a number of different theoretical perspectives, including possible future uses, alternative measurement paradigms and how it compares with other valuation models • explores fair value accounting in practice, including audit, financial instruments, impairments, an investment banking perspective, approaches to fair value in Japan and the USA, and Enron’s use of fair value An outstanding resource, this volume is an indispensable reference that is deserving of a place on the bookshelves of both libraries and all those working in, studying, or researching the areas of international accounting, financial accounting and reporting.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. Introduction: The Nature of Fair Value 2. The Use of Fair Value in IFRS 3. What SFAS 157 Does and Does Not Accomplish 4. The Case for Fair Value 5. Fair Values: Imaginary Prices and Mystical Markets Part 2: Theoretical Analysis 6. Recent History of Fair Value 7. Fair Value and Valuation Models 8. Whither Fair Value?: The Future of Fair Value 9. Between a Rock and a Hard Place 10. Fair Value and Capital Markets 11. Fair Value: The Right Measurement Basis? 12. Measurement in Accounting and Fair Value 13. CCA: An Unsuccessful Attempt to Change the Measurement Basis 14. Alternatives to Fair Value 15. The Relevance and Reliability of Fair Value Measurement 16. The Fair Value Principle and its Impact on Debt and Equity Part 3: Fair Value in Practice 17. Fair Value: A Cautionary Tale from Enron 18. The Insurance Industry and Fair Value 19. Fair Value Measurement for Corporate Entities, Insurance Companies and Retail Banks from an Investment Banker’s Perspective 20. Fair Value and the Auditor 21. Fair Value Accounting in the USA 22. A Japanese Perspective on Fair Value 23. Pension Accounting and Fair Value 24. Fair Value in IFRS: Issues for Developing Countries and SMEs 25. Fair Value and Financial Instruments 26. Fair Value and IAS 36 2007: 246x174: 424pp Hb: 978-0-415-42356-4: £125.00

An effective coach can help the business leader make sense of the challenges and complexities of modern international business, unlocking the potential of both leader and organization. This important new Handbook offers the first comprehensive and detailed introduction to the theory and practice of international business coaching, drawing on the very latest academic research, as well as real-world examples of international best practice.

This book provides practitioners and students with an innovative theoretical framework, which extends existing coaching models to place coaching within cultural, organizational and group-team contexts.

Contributors from around the world explore different perspectives and practices and offer practical tools to apply the theories and models to the real-life business context.

The Routledge Companion to International Business Coaching is essential reading for all trainee business coaches, all students of coaching theory and method, and for all business leaders looking to understand better the role of the modern business coach.

Selected Contents: Introduction Section 1: International Coaching Frameworks and Tools Section 2.1: Organizational Challenges and Opportunities: Individual Section 2.2: Organizational Challenges and Opportunities: Collective Conclusion 2008: 246x174: 392pp Hb: 978-0-415-45875-7: £100.00

US $205.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

US $200.00

5

6

ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS STUDIES

The Routledge Companion to Creativity

The Routledge Companion to Nonprofit Marketing

Edited by Tudor Rickards, University of Manchester, UK, Mark A. Runco, University of Georgia at Athens, USA and Susan Moger, University of Manchester, UK

Edited by Adrian Sargeant, Indiana University, USA and Walter Wymer Jr, The Joseph W. Lutter III School of Business, USA

Creativity can be as difficult to define as it is to achieve. This is a complex and compelling area of study and this volume is perfectly poised to explore how creativity can be better understood, and used, in a range of contexts. The book not only centres on creativity in wider organizational theory, but also defines the conditions in which creativity can flourish, and assesses how the contemporary business environment has an impact on creative solutions.

The volume grounds the concept of creativity in a sound theoretical framework and explores issues of practical and theoretical consequence covering a range of themes, including: • innovation and entrepreneurship • creativity and design

An introductory section reviews the history of ideas in nonprofit marketing and examines those fundamental marketing principles of special relevance to nonprofit organizations. The book then explores in-depth the latest thinking in each of the most important nonprofit arenas, including: • voluntary sector marketing • fundraising • arts marketing • education marketing

• environmental influences

• political marketing

• knowledge management

• social marketing

• meta-theories of creativity

• volunteer recruitment, management and retention

• personal creativity

• public sector marketing and e-government.

• structured interventions.

Comprising contributions written by an unusually wide array of leading creativity scholars, The Routledge Companion to Creativity is an insightful and cutting edge resource. It is an essential purchase for anyone with an interest in creativity from a business, psychology or design perspective.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Introduction Section 2: Design and Creativity Section 3: Managing Turbulence Section 4: Innovation and Entrepreneurship Section 5: Environmental Influences Section 6: Structural Interventions Section 7: Personal Characteristics Section 8: Knowledge Generation and Management Section 9: Meta-Concepts (Ideas on Ideas) Section 10: ’Square Pegs/Round Holes’ 2008: 246x174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-77317-1: £75.00

This timely collection of cutting-edge articles offers a complete overview of marketing in the nonprofit sector. Written by a leading team of international experts, it examines the issues faced by public and nonprofit organizations in marketing and raising funds, and provides a comprehensive review of the latest research.

Containing real-world examples and case study material throughout, The Routledge Companion to Nonprofit Marketing makes an important contribution to our understanding of marketing theory and practice in the nonprofit sector. It is an essential reference for all students, researchers and practitioners working in nonprofit marketing, fundraising or philanthropy.

2007: 246x174: 448pp Hb: 978-0-415-41727-3: £100.00

US $195.00

US $150.00

eBooks in Economics and Business

The Routledge Companion to Strategic Human Resource Management Edited by John Storey, The Open University, UK, Patrick M. Wright, Cornell University, USA and David Ulrich, University of Michigan, USA Combining up-to-date research, innovative content and practical perspectives, this book is the benchmark by which all other strategic HRM reference works should be measured. Leading figures from around the globe survey the current state of the discipline, while also introducing and exploring new, cutting edge themes in order to offer a comprehensive and authoritative overview of the field.

Section introductions and integrative critiques pull together the separate themes to provide cross-comparisons between chapters to create a cohesive and well-structured volume. Unlike other texts in this area, The Routledge Companion to Strategic Human Resource Management incorporates contributions from leading management and business writers in areas adjacent to human resource management, including strategy, innovation and organizational learning. These add fresh and challenging insights into HRM themes from key mainstream business and management thinking. The field of strategic HRM is thus enriched and extended by this volume.

Focusing on the interplay between theory and practice, this book is an essential resource for researchers and students studying human resource management and strategy.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. Introduction Part 2: Analytical Frameworks 2. The Disciplinary Origins 3. Post-Modern Perspectives 4. Globalisation 5. Legal Aspects and Regulation 6. Critical Theory 7. Human Capital, Intellectual Capital and Knowledge Part 3: Overarching Themes 8. Strategy and HRM 9. The HR Profession: Roles, Competencies 10. HR Function 11. E-HR and Shared Services 12. Executive Teams, Leadership and HRM 13. New Organizational Forms, Networks, Supply Chains and HR 14. IJVs 15. Changing Labour Markets: Gangmasters and the Hourglass Economy 16. Managing Change Part 4: Areas of Practice 17. Recruitment 18. Attracting and Selection 19. Redundancy/Rightsizing 20. Reward 21. Performance Management 22. 360 Degree and Coaching 23. Employee Engagement/Commitment/Participation 24. Capability Development and Careers 25. Discipline and Dismissal 26. Work Design 27. Diversity and Equal Opportunities Part 5: The Capability-Building Perspective 28. Leadership Development/Talent Management 29. Capabilities and Resources 30. Organization Learning 31. Knowledge Management Part 6: Contexts 32. Public Sector 33. Small Business 34. Service Sectors 35. Transnational Firms Part 7: Regions 36. International HRM 37. HR in South East Asia 38. HR in India 39. HR in China Part 8: Performance Outcomes 40. HR and Financial Outcomes 41. Employee Outcomes 42. Customer Outcomes 43. Societal Outcomes 2008: 246x174: 552pp Hb: 978-0-415-77204-4: £130.00

US $190.00

To find out more about our eBooks in Economics and Business please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS STUDIES

Handbook of Risk and Crisis Communication Edited by Robert L. Heath, University of Houston, USA and H. Dan O’Hair, University of Oklahoma, USA The Handbook of Risk and Crisis Communication explores the scope and purpose of risk, and its counterpart, crisis, to facilitate the understanding of these issues from conceptual and strategic perspectives.

Recognizing that risk is a central feature of our daily lives, found in relationships, organizations, governments, the environment, and a wide variety of interactions, contributors to this volume explore such questions as ’What is likely to happen, to whom, and with what consequences?’ ’To what extent can science and vigilance prevent or mitigate negative outcomes?’ and ’What obligation do some segments of local, national, and global populations have to help other segments manage risks?’, shedding light on the issues in the quest for definitive answers.

The Handbook offers a broad approach to the study of risk and crisis as joint concerns. Chapters explore the reach of crisis and risk communication, define and examine key constructs, and parse the contexts of these vital areas. As a whole, the volume presents a comprehensive array of studies that highlight the standard principles and theories on both topics, serving as the largest effort to date focused on engaging risk communication discussions in a comprehensive manner.

With perspectives from psychology, sociology, anthropology, political science, economics, and communication, the Handbook of Risk and Crisis Communication enlarges the approach to defining and recognizing risk and how should it best be managed. It provides vital insights for all disciplines studying risk, including communication, public relations, business, and psychology, and will be required reading for scholars and researchers investigating risk and crisis in various contexts.

2008: 254x178: 696pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5777-1: £125.00 eBook: 978-0-203-89162-9

EDUCATION

NEW

Curriculum Studies Handbook – The Next Moment Exploring Post-Reconceptualization Edited by Erik Malewski, Purdue University, USA Series: Studies in Curriculum Theory Series ’Through an incredibly eclectic mix of junior and established scholars, this volume represents a uniquely current and diverse presentation of curriculum studies inquiry. The focus on emergent/junior scholars anticipates evolving lines of inquiry in the field, and brings those inquiries into direct dialogue with experts in the field/s. In this sense, this volume is current, progressive, and in some sense revolutionary.’ – Michael P. O’Malley, Texas State University San Marcos, USA What comes after the reconceptualization of curriculum studies? What is the contribution of the next wave of curriculum scholars? Comprehensive and on the cutting edge, this Handbook speaks to these questions and extends the conversation on present and future directions in curriculum studies through the work of twenty-four newer scholars who explore, each in their own unique ways, the present moment in curriculum studies. To contextualize the work of this up-and-coming generation, each chapter is paired with a shorter response by a well-known scholar in the field, provoking an intra-/inter-generational exchange that illuminates both historical trajectories and upcoming moments. From theorizing at the crossroads of feminist thought and post-colonialism to new perspectives that include critical race, currere, queer southern studies, Black feminist cultural analysis, post-structural policy studies, spiritual ecology, and East-West international philosophies, present and future directions in the U.S. American field are revealed.

June 2009: 246x174: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-98948-0: £138.99

US $250.00

Handbook of Research on Teaching Literacy Through the Communicative and Visual Arts, Volume II A project of the International Reading Association, Volume II Edited by James Flood, San Diego State University, USA, Shirley Brice Heath, Stanford University, USA and Diane Lapp, San Diego State University, USA The Handbook of Research on Teaching Literacy Through the Communicative and Visual Arts, Volume II brings together state-of-the-art research and practice on the evolving view of literacy as encompassing not only reading, writing, speaking, and listening, but also the multiple ways through which learners gain access to knowledge and skills. It forefronts as central to literacy education the visual, communicative, and performative arts, and the extent to which all of the technologies that have vastly expanded the meanings and uses of literacy originate and evolve through the skills and interests of the young.

In the years since the publication of the first volume of this Handbook in 1997, visual and performative have come to be almost synonymous with communicative, and literacy research has come to encompass much more than decoding and encoding of verbal material.

Literacy is now rarely spoken of in the singular or without descriptors such as multi-modal. Along with this marked shift has come the widespread recognition that teachers and students have to become learners together. Volume II pushes the boundaries of literacy education through an interdisciplinary range of perceptions and approaches to multiple literacies in classrooms and between and beyond the niches of formal education. Contributions from leading literacy researchers from around the world are organized around four themes: • historical and theoretical foundations • methods of inquiry in the communicative, visual, and performative arts • family and communicative contexts in the communicative, visual, and performing arts • into the language arts classroom through the visual and communicative arts.

US $225.00

For Handbooks in Psychology, see Page 38

This volume retains the ’Voices from the Field’ feature the view of practitioners and artists alike - from the 1997 Handbook. However, in recognition of the fact that increasingly we are all ’in the field’ - inquiring and practicing at the same time, in Volume II these ’voices’ are interspersed throughout the four sections.

Overall, Volume II speaks to the urgent need for educators to explore, value, and incorporate into their own ways of knowing and doing the visual, communicative, and performative arts as central to literacy education, and to keep a sustained and consistent focus on equity and on the freedoms that are fundamental to the human spirit and critical to the future of investigating, analyzing, assessing, and transmitting the what and how of learning and literacy.

A project of the International Reading Association, published and distributed by Routledge/Taylor & Francis.

Visit http://www.reading.org for more information about International Reading Association books, membership, and other services.

2007: 276x219: 632pp Pb: 978-0-8058-5700-9: £65.00

US $100.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

7

8

EDUCATION

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

NEW

Handbook of Public Pedagogy

Handbook of Formative Assessment

International Handbook of Early Childhood Education

Edited by Heidi Andrade and Gregory Cizek, State University of New York, USA

Edited by John Bennett, Tony Bertram, Philip Gammage and Christine Pascal

Formative assessment refers to a wide variety of information-gathering activities that are used to adapt instruction to the current and future needs of students.

Included in these activities are traditional classroom tests, observations, oral questioning, class discussions, group and individual projects, and homework. In recent years formative assessment has become a focus of research as state and federal policy makers realize that summative assessments have reached a point of diminishing returns as a tool for increasing student achievement. The purpose of this Handbook is to comprehensively profile this burgeoning but loosely coupled field of study.

Edited by four leading experts in the field of early childhood education, this book provides a cutting edge overview and discursive summaries of current research, main debates in the field and future trends. The entire landscape of early childhood education is surveyed through a collection of specially commissioned articles including the following themes:

Selected Contents: Section 1: Conceptual Foundations of Formative Assessment 1. Introduction: The Nature, Role, and Challenges of Formative Assessment 2. An Integrative Summary of the Research Literature and Implications for a New Theory of Formative Assessment 3. The Practical Implications of Educational Aims and Contexts for Formative Assessment Section 2: Formative Assessment Methods and Practice 4. Peer Assessment: Key Characteristics and Principles for Incorporation as a Formative Assessment Technique in Classrooms 5. Portfolios: Research Evidence on Effects and Summary of Best Practices for Use in a Formative Classroom Assessment Context 6. Performances and Public Exhibitions of Student Work: Formative Assessment Applications and Potential Fulcrum for Change 7. Formative Assessment: Concepts and Applications for Student Self-Assessment and SelfRegulation of Learning 8. The Role of Mastery Testing in Enhancing Student Achievement: Guidelines for Maximizing Benefits and Avoiding Common Implementation Errors 9. Technology-Aided Formative Assessment of Learning: New Developments and Applications 10. Research and Strategies for Adapting Formative Assessment for Students with Special Needs 11. Formative Assessment Practices that Maximize Learning for At-Risk Students 12. Essential Teacher Competencies in Formative Classroom Assessment in K12 Contexts 13. Effective Formative Assessment in College and University: Key Similarities and Differences to K-12 Practice 14. Research on Characteristics of Effective Professional Development Programs for Enhancing Educators’ Skills in Formative Assessment Section 3: Challenges and Future Directions for Formative Assessment 15. Mixing It Up: Combining Sources of Classroom Achievement Information for Formative and Summative Purposes 16. Psychometric Challenges to Implementing Formative Assessment 17. Strategies and Policies for Incorporating Formative Assessment into State Testing and Accountability Systems 18. Implementing and Sustaining a Successful Large-Scale Formative Assessment System: A Case Study 19. Summing Up and Moving Forward: Key Challenges and Future Directions for Research and Development in Formative Assessment

• professionalism and prarents

Education and Learning Beyond Schooling Edited by Jennifer A. Sandlin, Arizona State University, USA, Brian Schultz and Steven ’Jake’ Burdick Series: Studies in Curriculum Theory Series What is ’public pedagogy’? What theories, research, aims, and values inform it? What does it look like in practice? Bringing together scholars, public intellectuals, and activists from across the field of education, the Handbook of Public Pedagogy explores and maps the terrain of this burgeoning field for the first time in one comprehensive volume, readers will be able to learn about the history and scope of the concept and practices of public pedagogy. Offering a wide range of differing, even diverging, perspectives on how the ’public’ might operate as a pedagogical agent, this volume provides new ways of understanding educational practice, both within and without schools. It implores teachers, researchers, and theorists to reconsider their foundational understanding of what counts as pedagogy and of how and where the process of education occurs.

Handbook of Public Pedagogy is • Comprehensive — the first volume to comprehensively explore and map the terrain of public pedagogy. covering historical/theoretical perspectives; popular culture as public pedagogy; in/formal sites of learning as public pedagogy; intersections of formal institutions and public pedagogy; neoliberalism as public pedagogy; public pedagogy and public intellectuals; and social activism as public pedagogy, and more • Multiple perspectives — offers a wide range of differing, even diverging, perspectives on how the ’public’ might operate as a pedagogical agent • Cross-disciplinary — brings together scholars from a wide range of disciplines within the broader field of education (including curriculum studies, foundations of education, adult education, higher education, and consumer education) • Features theory and practice — features both theoretical/conceptual essays regarding the nature of public pedagogy and public intellectualism and examples of work that comprise it.

February 2010: 254x178: 608pp Pb: 978-0-415-80127-0: £55.53

US $99.95

December 2009: 254x178 Hb: 978-0-415-99319-7: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99320-3: £50.00

• child and society • policy and politics • development and learning • diversity, learning and access • new developments.

This Handbook will be an essential work of reference for any student of early childhood education, elementary education, child development, education policy and social work at both undergraduate and graduate level.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Child & Society: Constructions of Childhood. Children, Family & Community. Individual & Globalisation. Community-led Services, Investment, Work/Life Section 2: Policy & Politics: Policy & Financing. Poverty, Equality & Outcomes. Citizenship and Participatory Practice, Governance and Monitoring Section 3: Development & Learning: Child Development. Pedagogy & Curriculum. Quality Improvement & Evaluation Section 4: Diversity, Inclusion & Access: Race, Special Needs, Gifted & Talented and Gender Section 5: Professionalism & Parents: Workforce Development. Multi-Agency. Parenting & Practice Section 6: New Developments: Integrated Services, Birth to Three, Role of the State, Research Paradigms, Accession Countries, Asia December 2009: 234x156: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-47951-6: £110.00

US $220.00

US $225.00

US $89.95

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

EDUCATION

NEW

NEW

Handbook of Research on Children’s and Young Adult Literature

The Routledge International Handbook of the Sociology of Education Edited by Michael W. Apple, University of Wisconsin, USA, Stephen J Ball, University of London, UK and Luis Armand Gandin

Edited by Shelby Wolf, Karen Coats, Patricia Encisco and Christine Jenkins This multidisciplinary Handbook is the first attempt to pull together in one volume the research on children’s and young adult literature which is currently scattered across three intersecting disciplines: education, English, and library and information science. The book’s organization reflects the special interests of each of these disciplines. Section one focuses on readers, the province of education; section two on the analysis of text, the province of English and literature; and section three looks at the social contexts surrounding and influencing the intersections of readers and texts.

Selected Contents: Section 1: The Reader: Defining Children and Youth as Readers 1. Children as Readers in Society 2. Imagining Children and Reading at Home 3. Immigrant Youth Reading in Schools and Communities 4. Interpreting Literature and Identities in an After-School Program Supporting GLBT Youth 5. International Communities Building Places for Youth Reading 6. Public Libraries and the Transformation of Readers and Reading 7. School Libraries and the Transformation of Readers and Reading 8. Reading Literature in Elementary Classrooms 9. Reading Literature in Secondary School Classrooms 10. Imagining a Writer’s Life: Extending the Connection Between Readers and Books 11. A Book Becomes a Home: Becoming a Reader Across a Lifetime Section 2: The Book 12. History of Children’s and Young Adult Literature 13. Through the Looking Glass: Critical Lenses for Analyzing Books for the Young 14. Novelties Within the Novel 15. Culture and Narrative Variety 16. Folklore and its Discontents 17. On the Trail of the Fairy Tale 18. Understanding New Paradigms for Adolescent Identity through Young Adult Literature 19. The Art of the Picture Book 20. The Voices of Children’s Poetry 21. Nonfiction: Going After the Facts.

22. Comics and Graphic Novels 23. Intending Authors and Producing Authorship 24. Ideology and Children’s Books Section 3: The World Around 25. The Business of Books for the Young 26. Spinning Off: Toys, Television, and Tinsel Town 27. Censorship: Taking Books Out of the Hands of Young Readers 28. Awards: Valuing and Distinguishing Books for Young Readers 29. Journals: Studying, Evaluating, and Promoting Books for Young Readers 30. Electronic Resources Devoted to Children’s and Young Adult Literature 31. Museums Devoted to Children’s and Young Adult Literature 32. Archives and Special Collections Devoted to Children’s and Young Adult Literature 33. Community-based Events Devoted to Children’s and Young Adult Literature December 2009: 229x152 Hb: 978-0-415-96505-7: £110.00 Pb: 978-0-415-96506-4: £50.00

This collection brings together the work of a group of the world’s leading sociologists of education to explore and address key issues and concerns within the discipline. The chapters draw upon theory and research to provide ‘state of the art’ accounts of contemporary educational processes, global trends, and changing and enduring forms of social conflict and social inequality. The topics which are addressed are of international relevance and significance.

In general terms two complexly interrelated agendas are discernible in all the heat and noise of education change of the past twenty-five years. Both agendas directly connect with the economic discourses of globalisation and ‘responses’ to globalisation.

The first rests on a clear articulation and assertion by the state of its requirements of education - while the second gives at least the appearance of greater autonomy to educational institutions in the delivery of those requirements.

We can see these two political agendas being played out in terms of an ensemble of generic policies concerning parental choice and institutional competition, site-based autonomy, managerialism, performative steering, and curricula fundamentalism. Within all of these new identities, relationships, spatialities, flows and social inequalities are developed. How has the sociology of education responded to these changes? The contributors to this Handbook explore a range of critical issues which arise from this background of ‘new times’ for education using a variety of theories and techniques, covering three key areas: • theories and perspectives • social processes and practices • inequalities and resistances The readers will gain a sense of the vibrancy and diversity of the sociology of education and the nature of ‘sociological work’ in this field. They will read the most recent work of leading scholars and see the application of new theoretical ideas and concepts. The collection will be a primary resource for teaching and of major interest to practicing sociologists of education.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction and Overview Part A: Perspectives and Theories 2. Education Policy and the Sociology of Space 3. Feminism, Politics and Education 4. Foucault and Education 5. Education and CRT 6. Globalization and the Knowledge Economy 7. New Sociology of Pedagogy 8. Equality Studies 9. A Sociology of Teachers in the Global Age 10. Bernstein’s Sociology of Education in 21st Century 11. Education and Governmentality 12. A Psycho-social Sociology of Education 13. A Sociology of Connectivity in Education 14. A ‘New’ Sociology of Disability 15. Bourdieu and the Sociology of Education Policy 16. A Sociology of Elite Education 17. A Sociology of Mothers 18. Weber and School Organisation 19. Judith Butler and the Sociology of Education Part B: Social Processes and Practices 20. ‘Home’ Schooling 21. New States, New Governance and the End of Education Systems 22. Families, Values and Class Relations 23. Popular Culture 24. Schooling Bodies 25. Tracking and School Achievement 26. Bernstein’s Sociology of Education in 21st Century 27. Education, Globalization and the Skills Economy 28. Urban Policies, Education and Urban Poverty 29. Middle Classes, Social Mobility, and Bourdieu’s Cultural Capital 30. The Restructuring of the European Educational Space 31. University Reform and the Knowledge Debate 32. School Integration Part C: Inequalities and Resistances 33. Social Movements and Education 34. Women and Organizations 35. Learning Communities and Community Involvement in Education 36. Building a New Notion of Accountability in Schools, Challenging an Economistic View of Education 37. Sociolinguistics and ’Minority’ Schooling 38. Race and the Politics of Popular Memory 39. Women Educators in Developing Societies 40. Sociology, Social Class and Education 41. The Interplay of Youth, Daily Life, and Education 42. Class Relations November 2009: 246x174: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-48663-7: £110.00

US $220.00

US $195.00

US $89.95

eBooks in Education To find out more about our eBooks in Education please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

9

10

EDUCATION

NEW

NEW

NEW

Handbook of Asian Education

The International Handbook of English, Language and Literacy Teaching

Handbook of School-Family Partnerships

Edited by Yong Zhao, Michigan State University, USA This comprehensive and authoritative Handbook describes educational practices in Asia and explains and interprets these practices from cultural, historical, and economic perspectives. It documents the accomplishments and achievements of Asian education and also discusses the challenges it faces. Using a clearly explained civilization-based framework, the volume is structured in five sections, each devoted to educational practices in a particular Asian civilization (Sinic, Japanese, Hindu, Islamic, Buddhist). Topics addressed include both the formal schooling system and out-of-school educational practices, education governance and management, curriculum and assessment, teachers and teaching; learners and learning; home and community. Each section offers one chapter on the challenges education faces and what efforts are underway or planned to meet them, and one chapter on how immigrants from each civilization have come to live in the West, how they are educated, and how they are adapting to their new homes.

Handbook of Asian Education: A Cultural Perspective: • offers a novel and sensible approach to capture the essence of the diverse educational systems and practices in Asia

Edited by Dominic Wyse, University of Cambridge, UK, Richard Andrews, Institute of Education, UK and James Hoffman, University of Texas at Austin, USA The learning and teaching of English, language and literacy is the main priority for the education systems of many of the world’s nations. Since 2000, and continuing at present, a wave of initiatives has been launched with the aim of raising standards of literacy. For example in England the government-funded Rose Enquiry on the Teaching of Reading resulted in a renewed focus on the teaching of reading including, in 2007, changes to the statutory national curriculum and the extensive guidance which is part of the renewed Primary National Strategy Framework for Literacy. In the USA the work of the national reading panel was followed by the legislation of No Child Left Behind which was reauthorized in 2007 to include new nationwide targets on literacy levels. In Australia the introduction to the report from the National Inquiry into the Teaching of Literacy in 2005 articulated several key points that need addressing: • the high priority given to literacy teaching

• is written from an angle to inform readers in the U.S. and other Western cultures about Asian education and the education of Asian immigrants

• the argument that nations’ economic futures are closely aligned with literacy skills

• uniquely combines description and interpretation of educational practices in Asia.

• the renewed interest in the evidence base for educational policy and practice.

This volume is directed to education researchers and graduate students in international and comparative education, globalization and education, multicultural education, sociocultural foundations of education, Asian studies; educational administrators and education policy makers.

In view of the fact that the teaching of English is seen as fundamental to learning in all other areas it has been argued strongly that research should inform practice.

However, the teaching of English is a complex area that can potentially draw on many areas of research, and there is increasing awareness of the possible limitations of evidence-based or evidence-informed policy and practice. In order to benefit from the wealth of international research of relevance to the teaching of English there is a constant need for expert synthesis and interpretation so that teaching can be informed by these insights. For this reason

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Asian Education: A Cultural Perspective Section 1: Sinic Education 2. Cultural Overview of Education in Sinic Civilization 3. Education Governance and Management 4. Curriculum and Assessment 5. Teachers and Teaching 6. Learners and Learning 7. Home and Community 8. Challenges and Future Directions 9. Education of Immigrants from Sinic Civilization Section 2: Japanese Education 10. Cultural Overview of Education in Japanese Civilization 11. Education Governance and Management 12. Curriculum and Assessment 13. Teachers and Teaching 14. Learners and Learning 15. Home and Community 16. Challenges and Future Directions 17. Education of Immigrants from Japanese Civilization Section 3: Hindu Education 18. Cultural Overview of Education in Hindu Civilization 19. Education Governance and Management 20. Curriculum and Assessment 21. Teachers and Teaching 22. Learners and Learning 23. Home and Community 24. Challenges and Future Directions 25. Education of Immigrants from Hindu Civilization Section 4: Islamic Education 26. Cultural Overview of Education in Islamic Civilization 27. Education Governance and Management 28. Curriculum and Assessment 29. Teachers and Teaching 30. Learners and Learning 31. Home and Community 32. Challenges and Future Directions 33. Education of Immigrants from Islamic Civilization Section 5: Buddhist Education 34. Cultural Overview of Education in the Buddhist Civilization 35. Education Governance and Management 36. Curriculum and Assessment 37. Teachers and Teaching 38. Learners and Learning 39. Home and Community 40. Challenges and Future Directions 41. Education of Immigrants from Buddhist Civilization October 2009: 279x216: 912pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6445-8: £135.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6444-1: £60.00 eBook: 978-1-4106-1874-0

• the emphasis on reading

The aim of this book is: to review international research that is particularly relevant to the teaching of English, language and literacy. The chapters of the book will locate recent cutting-edge research within an appropriate theoretical context drawing as necessary on historical perspectives. This book will focus on three key areas: reading, writing, and language. In recognition that there are also important areas that are not easily categorised within these modes of English the fourth section of the book will address issues that cut across reading, writing and language. The fifth section will look at the teaching and learning of language from the perspectives of different countries and continents.

The book will address introductory and advanced phases/stages of teaching and learning relevant to compulsory schooling in the areas covered by the chapters.

October 2009: 234x156: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-46903-6: £110.00

US $220.00

Edited by Sandra L. Christenson and Amy L. Reschly Family and community involvement are increasingly touted as a means of improving both student and school-level achievement. This has led to an increase in policies, initiatives and goals designed to address family involvement in schools. Once recognized and implemented, such family-school partnerships can lead to the following benefits: enhanced communication and coordination between parents and educators; continuity in developmental goals and approaches across family and school contexts; shared ownership and commitment to educational goals; increased understanding of the complexities of children’s situations; and the pooling of family and school resources to find and implement quality solutions to shared goals.

This will be the first comprehensive review of what is known about the effects of home-school partnerships on student and school achievement. The Introduction will begin with a brief history of family-school partnerships.

Section 1. will describe the theoretical underpinnings and essential elements of family-school partnerships.

Section 2. will present the best evidence-based practices for working with families across developmental stages.

Section III will provide an agenda for future research and policy and for translating research into effective practices.

Selected Contents: Section 1: The Backdrop: Theoretical and Empirical Bases of Partnerships 1. Application of a Developmental/Ecological Model to Family-School Partnerships 2. Motivation and Commitment to Family-School Partnerships 3. Elements of Healthy Family-School Relationships 4. Diversity in Families: Parental Socialization and Children’s Development and Learning 5. Culturally-Based Worldviews, Family Processes, and Family-School Interactions Section 2: Partnerships Across Children’s Development/Schooling Levels 6. The Home Learning Environment and Achievement During Childhood 7. Parent Involvement in Early Education 8. Partnering to Foster Achievement in Reading and Mathematics 9. A School–Family Partnership: Addressing Multiple Risk Factors to Improve School Readiness and Prevent Conduct Problems in Young Children 10. Family-Centered, SchoolBased Mental Health Strategies to Reduce Student Behavioral, Emotional, and Academic Risk, Elizabeth Stormshak, Thomas Dishion, and Corrina Falkenstein 11. School-Family Partnerships to Promote Social and Emotional Learning 12. School Connectedness and Adolescent Well-Being 13. Family-School Partnerships and Communication Interventions for Young Children with Disabilities 14. Creating School-Family Partnerships in Adolescence: Challenges and Opportunities Section 3: Driving the Research Agenda to Inform Policy and Practice 15. Debunking the Myth of the Hard-to-Reach Parent 16. Family-Centered Helpgiving Practices, Parent—Professional Partnerships, and Parent, Family and Child Outcomes 17. Mapping Family-school Relations in Comprehensive School Reform Models and Charter School Designs: A Call for a New Research Agenda 18. Future Directions in Family-School Partnerships 19. Methodological Issues in Family-School Partnership Research 20. From Periphery to Center: A New Vision and Strategy for Family, School, and Community Partnerships 21. Moving Forward in SchoolFamily Partnerships in Promoting Student Competence: From Potential to Full Impact September 2009: 254x178: 600pp Hb: 978-0-415-96375-6: £125.00 Pb: 978-0-415-96376-3: £70.00

US $295.00

US $114.95

US $260.00

US $94.95

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

EDUCATION

NEW

NEW

NEW

Handbook of Reading Research, Volume 4

Handbook of Prevention Science

Handbook of Research on the Education of School Leaders

Edited by Michael L. Kamil, Stanford University, USA, P. David Pearson, Elizabeth Birr Moje, Peter Afflerbach and Peter B. Mosenthal

Edited by Beth Doll, University of Nebraska-Lincoln, School Psychology Program, USA September 2009: 254x178 Hb: 978-0-8058-6331-4: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6332-1: £50.00 eBook: 978-1-4106-1783-5

US $195.00

US $89.95

The Handbook of Reading Research is the research Handbook for the field. Each volume has come to define the field for the period of time it covers. The editors extensively reviewed the reading research literature since the publication of Volume 3 in 2000, as portrayed in a wide array of research and practitionerbased journals and books, to identify the themes and topics covered. Volume 4 brings the field authoritatively and comprehensively up-to-date.

August 2009: 254x178: 1,040pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5342-1: £135.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5343-8: £60.00

US $260.00

US $94.95

NEW

Handbook of Metacognition in Education Edited by Douglas J. Hacker, University of Utah, USA, John Dunlosky, Kent State University, USA and Arthur C. Graesser, University of Memphis, USA Providing comprehensive coverage of the theoretical bases of metacognition and its applications to educational practice, this compendium of focused and in-depth discussions from leading scholars in the field: • represents an intersection of education, cognitive science, and technology; • serves as a gateway to the literature for researchers and practitioners interested in one or more of the wide array of topics included • sets the standard for scholarship for theoretical research and practical applications in this field.

The Handbook of Metacognition in Education - covering Comprehension Strategies, Metacognitive Strategies, Metacomprehension, Writing, Science and Mathematics, Individual Differences, Self-Regulated Learning, Technology, Tutoring, and Measurement - is an essential resource for researchers, faculty, students, curriculum developers, teachers, and others interested in using research and theory on metacognition to guide and inform educational practice.

June 2009: 254x178: 504pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6353-6: £139.99 Pb: 978-0-8058-6354-3: £59.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87642-8 US $99.95

US $250.00

NEW

Handbook of Motivation at School Edited by Kathryn Wentzel and Allan Wigfield, both at University of Maryland – College Park, USA The Handbook on Motivation at School provides the first comprehensive and integrated compilation of theory and research on children’s motivation at school. It covers the major theoretical perspectives in the field as well as their application to instruction, learning and social adjustment at school. In addition to reviewing the extant literature on motivation, it also provides an overview of new directions and issues for the field.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Section 1: Theories 2. An Attributional Approach to Motivation in School 3. Self-efficacy Theory 4. Expectancy – Value Theory 5. Achievement Goal Theory: The Past, Present, and Future 6. Goal-Directed Behavior In The Classroom 7. Self-Theories and Motivation: Students’ Beliefs About Intelligence 8. Self-Worth Theory: Retrospection And Prospects 9. Promoting Self-Determined School Engagement: Motivation, Learning, and Well-Being 10. Situational and Individual Interest 11. Engagement and Disaffection as Organizational Constructs in the Dynamics of Motivational Development 12. Motives to Self-Regulate Learning: A Social Cognitive Account 13. Commentatary: Building on a Strong Foundation: Five Pathways to the Next Level of Motivational Theorizing Section 2: Contextual and Social Influences on Motivation 14. Parenting and Children’s Motivation at School 15. Students’ Relationships with Teachers as Motivational Contexts 16. Peers and Motivation 17. Teacher Expectations and Self-Fulfilling Prophecies 18. School as a Context of Student Motivation and Achievement 19. Gender and Motivation 20. Achievement Motivation in Racial and Ethnic Context 21. Commentary: The Role of Environment in Contextual and Social Influences on Motivation: Generalities, Specificities, and Causality Section 3: Teaching, Learning, and Motivation 22. Beliefs About Learning In Academic Domains 23. Reading Motivation 24. Understanding Motivation in Mathematics: What is Happening in Classrooms? 25. Motivation and Achievement in Physical Education 26. Emotions at School 27. Motivation and Learning Disabilities: Past, Present and Future 28. Teachers’ Self-Efficacy Beliefs 29. Commentary: What Can We Learn from A Synthesis of Research on Teaching, Learning, and Motivation?

June 2009: 254x178: 656pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6284-3: £160.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6290-4: £60.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87949-8

Edited by Michelle Young, University of Texas at Austin, USA, Gary Crow, Rodney Ogawa, University of California - Santa Cruz, USA and Joseph Murphy, Vanderbilt University, USA Sponsored by the University Council of Educational Administration (UCEA), Division A of AERA, National Council of Professors in Educational Administration, and Teaching in Educational Administration, this fifty chapter Handbook will be the definitive work on leadership education in the USA. Although research oriented, the content is written in a style that makes it appropriate for any of the following audiences: university professors and researchers, professional development providers, practicing administrators, and policy makers who work in the accreditation and licensure arenas.

June 2009: 229x152: 756pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6157-0: £140.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6158-7: £55.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87886-6

US$295.00

US $115.00

NEW

Handbook of Research on the Sociocultural Foundations of Education Edited by Steve Tozer, Annette Henry and Bernardo P. Gallegos This sixty chapter Handbook provides a comprehensive overview of what is possibly the broadest, most loosely-coupled and least understood field of education.

As a field of study, the sociocultural foundations of education lies both inside and outside the study of teaching and school administration. Using analytical methods borrowed from the humanities and social sciences, it provides critical, interdisciplinary perspectives of teaching and school practices.

The volume approaches the social foundations of education in two ways. First, it provides traditional and emerging theoretical perspectives (or lens) that can be used to view and analyze any educational phenomena.

Section 1 covers traditional perspectives and Section 2 emerging perspectives. Second, it describes and analyzes specific cultural forces and changes (phenomena) using the theoretical perspectives provided in sections 1. and 2. Section 3 examines the forces of globalization, institutions and power. Section 4 looks at media, technology, and popular culture and Section 5 at schools, pedagogy and students.

September 2009: 229x152 Hb: 978-0-8058-4211-1: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-4212-8: £50.00 US $99.95

US $295.00

US $115.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

US $250.00

11

12

EDUCATION

NEW

NEW

NEW

The Handbook of Practice and Research in Study Abroad

International Handbook of Bullying Edited by Jimerson, Swearer and Espelage

Handbook of Research on School Choice

Higher Education and the Quest for Global Citizenship

May 2009: 254x178 Hb: 978-0-8058-6392-5: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6393-2: £50.00 eBook: 978-1-4106-1851-1

Edited by Mark Berends, Mathew G. Springer, Dale Ballou and Herbert J. Walberg, all at University of Illinois, Chicago, USA

US $195.00

US $89.95

Edited by Ross Lewin, University of Connecticut, USA The Handbook of Practice and Research in Study Abroad is a comprehensive survey of the field. Each chapter eloquently conveys an enthusiasm for study abroad alongside a critical assessment of the most up-to-date research, theory and practice.

Selected Contents: Introduction: The Quest for Global Citizenship through Study Abroad Part 1: Defining Global Citizenship in Study Abroad 1. Global Citizenship in Theory and Practice 2. Fostering Engagement: The Role of International Education in the Development of Global Civil Society 3. Global Learning and the Making of Citizen Diplomats 4. International Studies and Foreign Languages: A Critical American Priority 5. Global Citizenship Education: Challenges and Possibilities Part 2: Aligning Global Citizenship and Study Abroad With the Mission of the Academy 6. Study Abroad and Language: From Maximal to Realistic Models 7. Constructive Disequilibrium: Cognitive and Emotional Development through Dissonant Experiences in Less Familiar Destinations 8. The Liberal Arts and Global Citizenship: Fostering Intercultural Engagement Through Integrative Experiences and Structured Reflection 9. Study Abroad and Nursing: From Cultural to Global Competence 10. The Role of Study Abroad in Preparing Globally Responsible Teachers 11. Democratizing Study Abroad: Challenges of Open Access, Local Commitments, and Global Competence in Community Colleges 12. North of 49: Global Citizenship à la canadienne 13. Global Citizenship and Study Abroad: A European Comparative Perspective 14. Strategy for Development of a Global City: Study Abroad in Singapore Part 3: Institutional Challenges and Strategies to Fostering Global Citizenship Study Abroad 15. It Takes an Entire Institution: A Blueprint for the Global University 16. Turning our Back on the World: Study Abroad and the Purpose of Higher Education 17. Faculty Beliefs and Institutional Values: Identifying and Overcoming these Obstacles to Education Abroad Growth 18. Selling the World: Study Abroad Marketing and the Privatization of Global Citizenship 19. Global Citizenship for All: Low Minority Student Participation in Study Abroad-Seeking Strategies for Success 20. Understanding the Challenges of Assessing Global Citizenship 21. Here to Stay: Increasing Acceptance of Short-Term Study Abroad Programs 22. Going Global in the Sciences: A Case Study of Emory University 23. Undergraduate Research in Study Abroad: Scope, Meaning and Potential Part 4: Innovative Global Citizenship Study Abroad Program Models 24. Georgia Tech’s Comprehensive and Integrated Approach to Developing Global Competence 25. Holistic Student Learning and Development Abroad: The IES 3-D Program Model 26. It Takes A Curriculum: Bringing Global Mindedness Back Home 27. Educating Globally Competent Citizens through International Service Learning 28. Creating Deep Partnerships with Institutions Abroad: The University as Global Citizen 29. Creating Study Abroad Opportunities for First Generation College Students 30. It’s Not About You: The UConn Social Entrepreneur Corps Global Commonwealth Study Abroad Model May 2009: 254x178: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-99160-5: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99161-2: £37.50 eBook: 978-0-203-87664-0

US $155.00

US $69.95

NEW

Handbook of Research on Schools, Schooling and Human Development Edited by Judith Meece, University of North Carolina, USA and Jacquelynne Eccles, University of Michigan, USA Children spend more time in school than in any social institution outside the home, and schools probably exert more influence on children’s development and life chance than any environment beyond the home and neighborhood. In spite of this, there has never been a comprehensive Handbook that attempted to assemble the widely dispersed body of research on the developmental effects of schooling. That is the mission of this book. It will attempt to provide a comprehensive review of what is known about the effects of schools and schooling on human development.

Topical coverage will range from historical/theoritical foundations to investigative methodologies and from classroom-level influences such as teacher-student relations to broad, impersonal influences such as school and societal organizational patterns and educational policy. By bringing together critical findings from this loosely-coupled, cross-disciplinary field of study, this forty-chapter, six-part book provides a much-needed centerpiece around which the field can continue to grow in an organized and interdisciplinary manner.

September 2009: 229x152: 704pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5948-5: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5949-2: £50.00 US $99.95

US $250.00

Sponsored by the National Center on School Choice (NCSC), this Handbook makes readily available the most rigorous and policy-relevant research on K-12 school choice. Coverage includes charters, vouchers, home schooling, magnet schools, cyber schools, and other forms of choice, with the ultimate goal of defining the current state of this evolving field of research, policy, and practice. Key features include the following.

Comprehensive – this is the first book to provide a comprehensive review of what is known about the major forms of school choice from multiple perspectives: historical, political, economic, legal, methodological, and international. It also includes work on the governance, structure, process, effectiveness, and costs of school choice.

Readable – the editors and authors have taken care to translate rigorous research findings into comprehensible prose accessible to a broad range of readers.

International – in addition to thorough coverage of domestic research, the volume also draws on international and comparative studies of choice in foreign countries.

Expertise – the National Center on School Choice (NCSC) is a consortium that is headquartered at Vanderbilt University and includes the following partners: Brookings Institution, Brown University, Harvard University, Indiana University, National Bureau of Economic Research, Northwest Evaluation Association, and Stanford University.

This book is suitable for researchers, faculty and graduate students in education policy studies, politics of education, and social foundations of education. It should also be of interest to inservice administrators and policy makers.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Perspectives on School Choice 1. Political Perspectives on School Choice 2. An Economic Perspective on School Choice 3. Social Perspectives on School Choice 4. A Legal Perspective on School Choice 5. International Perspectives on School Choice Section 2: Charter Schools 6. Perspectives on Charter Schools 7. Politics and Governance in Charter Schools 8. Charter School Law 9. Social Context of Charter Schools 10. Charter School Finance 11. Charter School Competition 12. Charter School Outcomes 13. International Perspective on Charter Schools Section 3: School Vouchers 14. Perspectives on School Vouchers 15. Voucher Politics and Governance 16. Voucher Law 17. Social Context of Vouchers 18. Voucher Finance 19. Voucher Outcomes 20. International Perspective on Vouchers Section 4: Magnet Schools 21. Perspectives on Magnet Schools 22. Legal Aspects of Magnet Schools 23. Social Context of Magnet Schools 24. Magnet School Outcomes Section 5: Private Schools 25. Perspectives on Private Schools 26. Private Schools in Education Markets 27. Perspectives on Elite Boarding Schools 28. Perspectives on Catholic Schools 29. International Perspectives on Private Schools Section 6: Other Forms of School Choice 30. Perspectives on Homeschooling 31. Perspectives on Virtual Schools 32. Perspectives on Educational Management Organizations 33. Supplemental Educational Services Under NCLB 34. Education Tax Credits April 2009: 254x178: 656pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6223-2: £125.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6224-9: £50.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88178-1

US $225.00

US $99.95

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

EDUCATION

13

NEW

NEW

NEW

Handbook of Education Policy Research

Handbook of Positive Psychology in Schools

Handbook of Research on Reading Disabilities

Edited by David N. Plank, University of California, Berkeley, USA, Gary Sykes and Barbara Schneider, both at Michigan State University, USA

Edited by Michael Furlong, Richard Gilman and Scott Huebner

Edited by Richard Allington and Anne McGill-Franzen

National surveys consistently reveal that an inordinate number of students report high levels of boredom, anger, and stress in school, which often leads to their disengagement from critical learning and social development. If the ultimate goal of schools is to educate young people to become responsible and critically thinking citizens who can succeed in life, understanding factors that stimulate them to become active agents in their own leaning is critical. A new field labeled ’positive psychology’ is one lens that can be used to investigate factors that facilitate a student’s sense of agency and active school engagement.

This comprehensive Handbook is the first attempt to present the full range of overlapping paradigms and perspectives (sociological, historical, cultural, psychological, and linguistic) whose research informs the world of reading disability. It explores the relation of reading disabilities to language and learning, poverty and prejudice, and instruction and schooling. In addition to examining theoretical perspectives (and associated research), the contributors present their material within the framework of a classroom teacher struggling to develop instructional practices that meet the learning needs of their lowest achieving readers. Throughout the book, learning to read proficiently is conceptualized as a long-term developmental process involving many interventions of various kinds – all keyed to individual developmental needs.

Educational policy continues to be of major concern.

Defining the theoretical boundaries and methodological approaches of education policy research are the two primary themes of this comprehensive, AERA-sponsored Handbook.

April 2009: 279x216: 1,104pp Hb: 978-0-415-98991-6: £140.00 Pb: 978-0-415-98992-3: £55.00

US $295.00

US $114.95

NEW

The Routledge Companion to Dyslexia Edited by Gavin Reid, Moray House School of Education, University of Edinburgh, UK, Gad Elbeheri, Ministry of Education Kuwait Dyslexia Association, John Everatt, Deborah Knight, both at Rollins Centre for Language & Learning, Atlanta Speech School, USA and Janice Wearmouth, University of Wellington, Education, New Zealand A ground-breaking study of the whole field of dyslexia by a distinguished international team of contributors, this is a superb resource for those coming to the subject for the first time as well as students and practitioners already familiar with it.

February 2009: 246x174: 384pp Hb: 978-0-415-43078-4: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43079-1: £26.99

February 2009: 254x178: 520pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6361-1: £125.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6362-8: £55.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88408-9

US $225.00

US $99.95

NEW

Handbook of Social Justice in Education Edited by William Ayers, University of Illinois at Chicago, USA, Therese Quinn, The School of the Art Institute of Chicago, USA and David Stovall, University of Illinois at Chicago, USA The Handbook of Social Justice in Education, a comprehensive and up-to-date review of the field, addresses, from multiple perspectives, education theory, research, and practice in historical and ideological context, with an emphasis on social movements for justice. Each of the nine sections explores a primary theme of social justice and education:

US $140.00

US $51.95

• historical and theoretical perspectives • international perspectives on social justice in education • race and ethnicity, language and identity: seeking social justice in education • gender, sexuality and social justice in education • bodies, disability and the fight for social justice in education • youth and social justice in education • globalization: local and world issues in education • the politics of social justice meets practice: teacher education and school change • classrooms, pedagogy, and practicing justice.

Timely and essential, this is a must-have volume for researchers, professionals, and students across the fields of educational foundations, multicultural/diversity education, educational policy, and curriculum and instruction.

2008: 254x178: 792pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5927-0: £170.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5928-7: £50.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88774-5 US $89.95

US $225.00

Selected Contents: Section 1: Pespectives on Reading Disability 1. Political Contexts of Reading Disability 2. Historical Contexts for Understanding Reading Disabilities 3. Poverty and Reading Disabilities 4. Ethnicity and Reading Disabilities 5. Home Language and Reading Disabilities 6. Cognitive Profiles and Reading Disabilities 7. Biological Characteristics and Reading Disabilities 8. Neurosciences and Reading Disabilities 9. Language Development and Reading Disabilities 10. Socio-cultural Aspects of Reading Disabilities 11. Critical Theory and Reading Disabilities 12. Opportunity to Learn and Reading Disabilities Section 2: Causes and Consequences of Reading Disabilities 13. Individual Differences and Reading Disabilities 14. Home Differences and Reading Disabilities 15. Summer Setback and Reading Disabilities 16. Persistence of Reading Disabilities 17. Gender and Reading Disabilities 18. Drug Exposure and Reading Disabilities 19. Aliteracy, Agency, and Identity Section 3: Assessing Reading Proficiency 20. Beliefs and Reading Assessment 21 .Assessments for Different Goals 22. Reading Ability as Developing Expertise 23. Traditions of Reading Diagnosis 24. Assessing Reading Disabilities in ELL Student 25. Culturally Relevant Assessment of Reading Disabilities Section 4: Developmental Patterns of Reading Proficiency and Difficulties 26. Emergent Literacy 27. Word Recognition and Fluency 28. Vocabulary 29. Self-regulation 30. Comprehension 31. Writing 32. Discussion 33. Motivation Section 5: Developmental Interventions 34. Expert Classroom Instruction 35. Extended Learning Beyond the Classroom 36. Interventions to Develop the Phonological Systems 37. Interventions to Develop Decoding Proficiencies 38. Interventions to Enhance Fluency and Rate of Reading 39. Interventions to Enhance Vocabulary Development 40. Interventions to Enhance Narrative Comprehension 41. Interventions to Enhance Informational Text Comprehension 42. Interventions to Develop e-text Learning Section 6: Studying Reading Disabilities 43. Teacher Research 44. Single-subject and Case Study Designs 45. Experimental Research 46. Observational Research 47. Interpretive Research 48. Large Database Analyzes 49. Survey 50. Metaanalysis August 2009: 254x178 Hb: 978-0-8058-5333-9: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5334-6: £50.00 US $89.95

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

US $195.00

14

EDUCATION

NEW

NEW

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Research on Reading Comprehension

Handbook of Latinos and Education

Handbook of Child and Adolescent Behavior Disorders

Edited by Susan E. Israel, Author and Literacy Consultant and Gerald G. Duffy, University of North Carolina - Greensboro, USA The Handbook of Research on Reading Comprehension assembles researchers of reading comprehension, literacy, educational psychology, psychology, and neuroscience to document the most recent research on the topic. It summarizes the current body of research on theory, methods, instruction, assessment, including coverage of landmark studies. Designed to deepen understanding of how past research can be applied and has influenced the present and to stimulate new thinking about reading comprehension, the volume is organized around seven themes: • historical perspectives on reading comprehension • theoretical perspectives • changing views of text • elements of reading comprehension

Edited by Enrique G. Murillo Jr., California State University, USA Profiling the scope and terrain of academic inquiry on Latinos and education, this Handbook captures the field at this point in time. It presents the most significant and potentially influential work in terms of its contributions to research, to professional practice, and to the emergence of related interdisciplinary studies and theory. Providing a comprehensive review of rigorous, innovative, and critical scholarship relevant to its topic, and including an extensive Appendix of Resources, the volume is organized around four themes: • theoretical and methodological approaches • politics/policy • language and culture • teaching and learning.

The Handbook of Latinos and Education is a must-have resource for educational researchers, graduate students, teacher educators, and the broad spectrum of individuals, groups, agencies, organizations and institutions sharing a common interest in educational issues that impact Latinos.

January 2010: 254x178 Hb: 978-0-8058-5839-6: £135.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5840-2: £60.00

US $260.00

US $94.95

• assessing and teaching reading comprehension • cultural impact on reading comprehension • where to from here?

This is an essential reference volume for the international community of reading researchers, reading psychologists, graduate students, and professionals working in the area of reading and literacy.

2008: 254x178: 712pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6200-3: £125.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6201-0: £50.00 eBook: 978-1-4106-1585-5

US $225.00

US $89.95

World of Learning Online

Edited by Richard Morris and Thomas Kratochwill, University of Wisconsin/Madison, USA Even though research in the fields of school psychology, child clinical psychology, and child psychiatry has grown exponentially over the past twenty-five to thirty years, no single volume has attempted to comprehensively organize and describe these findings.

Selected Contents: 1: Introduction and Overview Introduction and Overview to the Book 2: Assessment Neuropsychological Assessment of Behavior Problems 1. Behavior Rating Scales, Inventories, and Checklists 2. Personality Assessment 3. Behavioral Assessment Techniques 4. Diagnostic Interviewing Techniques 5. Cultural Issues in Assessment of Behavior Disorders 3: Diagnosis and Classification 6. Issues in Classification of Childhood Psychopathology 7. Categorical Approaches to Diagnosis 8. Developmental Approaches to Diagnosis 9. Multivariate Approaches to Diagnosis 10. Family Systems Perspectives to Diagnosis 4: Characteristics, Etiologies, and Interventions 11. Attachment Disorders 12. Obsessive Compulsive Disorder 13. Fears and Related Anxieties 14. Child and Adolescent Depression 15. Posttraumatic Stress Disorder 16. Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder 17. Conduct Disorder 18. Juvenile Delinquency 19. Somatic Disorders 20. Autism Spectrum Disorders 21. Mental Retardation 22. Sexual and Physical Abuse Victimization 23. Substance Abuse 24. Eating Disorders 25. Biploar Disorder 26. Academic Problems 27. Family Violence 5: Prevention 28. Early Childhood Prevention Models 29. Building Competence/Resilience; Positive Psychology Movement 6: Ethical Practices, Standards, and Policy Issues 30. Ethical Issues, Standards, and Laws Related to the Delivery of Mental Health Services to Minors 31. Licensing and Certification – Protecting the Public 32. Cultural and Diversity Issues in Providing Psychological Services to Children and Adolescents 7: Education and Training of Child/Adolescent Therapists 33. Training Models 34. Internship and Post-Doctoral Residency Programs 8: Research Methods Issues 35. Research Issues in Assessment 36. Research Issues in Intervention December 2010: 229x152 Hb: 978-0-8058-6109-9: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6110-5: £50.00

US $195.00

US $89.95

www.worldoflearning.com A unique and invaluable source of global and educational contacts.

Handbook of Data-Based Decision Making in Education

• Fully searchable by country, institution name, professorial subject specialization and many more options

Theodore Kowalski and Thomas J. Lasley, both at University of Dayton, USA

• Updated four times a year

This forty-two chapter Handbook will be a major contribution to the literature of education. It will be a comprehensive, cross-disciplinary, research-based, and practice-based resource that all educators can turn to as a guide to data-based decision making.

• Contains more than 11,000 clickable links to institutional sites • Fully networkable to allow multi-user access.

Email reference@routledge.com to order your free trial today!

2008: 254x178: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-96503-3: £125.00 Pb: 978-0-415-96504-0: £50.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88880-3

US $225.00

US $89.95

www.online.taylorandfrancis.com

online

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

EDUCATION

Handbook of Research on Adult Learning and Development

The Routledge International Companion to Gifted Education

Operations Research and Management Science Handbook

Edited by M. Cecil Smith, Northern Illinois University, USA and with Nancy DeFrates-Densch, Assistant Editor, Northern Illinois University, USA

Edited by Tom Balchin, Brunel University, UK, Barry Hymer, Education Consultant, UK and Dona J. Matthews, City University of New York, USA

Operations Research (OR) began as an interdisciplinary activity to solve complex military problems during World War II. Utilizing principles from mathematics, engineering, business, computer science, economics, and statistics, OR has developed into a full fledged academic discipline with practical application in business, industry, government and military.

Currently regarded as a body of established mathematical models and methods essential to solving complicated management issues, OR provides quantitative analysis of problems from which managers can make objective decisions.

Operations Research and Management Science (OR/MS) methodologies continue to flourish in numerous decision making fields.

This comprehensive, state-of-the-art Handbook analyzes, integrates, and summarizes theoretical advances and research findings on adult development and learning.

Contributors include prominent scholars across diverse disciplinary fields (education, developmental psychology, public policy, gerontology, neurology, public health, sociology, family studies, and adult education).

2008: 254x178: 832pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5819-8: £155.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5820-4: £55.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88788-2

US $275.00

US $99.95

The Routledge International Companion to Gifted Education is a ground-breaking collection of fully-referenced chapters written by many of the most highly-respected authorities on the subject from around the world. These fifty contributors include distinguished scholars who have produced many of the most significant advances to the field over the past few decades, like Joseph Renzulli and Robert Sternberg, alongside authorities who ask questions about the very concepts and terminology embodied in the field – scholars such as Carol Dweck and Guy Claxton.

This multi-faceted volume:

The Routledge International Handbook of Lifelong Learning Edited by Peter Jarvis, University of Surrey, UK As lifelong learning grows in popularity, few comprehensive pictures of the phenomenon have emerged. The Routledge International Handbook of Lifelong Learning provides a disciplined and complete overview of lifelong learning internationally.

The theoretical structure puts the learner at the centre and the book emanates from there, pointing to the social context beyond the learner.

Up-to-the-minute syntheses from many of the leading international experts in the field give vital snapshots of this rapidly evolving subject from wide-ranging perspectives including: • learning throughout life • sites of lifelong learning • modes of learning • policies • social movements • issues in lifelong learning • geographical dimensions.

• highlights strategies to support giftedness in children, providing ideas that work and weeding out those that do not • is written in jargon-free language in an easy-to use themed format • is the most authoritative collection of future-focused views, ideas and reflections, practices and evaluations yet produced • includes chapters dealing with the major controversies and concerns in the field today, from the problems of identification to changing understandings of giftedness and creativity.

The international aspect of the Companion, and its juxtaposition of points of view – whereby chapters are deliberately positioned and accompanied by editorial commentary to highlight the contrasts with each other,– ensures that different views are addressed, allowing the reader to absorb and reflect upon the many perspectives on each issue.

Featuring a mix of international authors, Operations Research and Management Science Handbook combines OR/MS models, methods, and applications into one comprehensive, yet concise volume. The first resource to reach for when confronting OR/MS difficulties, this text – Provides a single source guide in OR/MS Bridges theory and practice Covers all topics relevant to OR/MS Offers a quick reference guide for students, researchers and practitioners Contains unified and up-to-date coverage designed and edited with non-experts in mind Discusses software availability for all OR/MS techniques Includes contributions from a mix of domestic and international experts

The Companion is a guide to the new ideas and controversies that are informing gifted education discussion and policy-making around the world. It is a first class resource to students and researchers alike.

Selected Contents: History and Definition of Operations Research. Linear Programming. Nonlinear Programming.

Integer Programming. Network Optimization Models.

Multiple Criteria Decision Making. Dynamic Programming.

Decision Analysis. Graph Theory. Project Management.

Stochastic Processes and Markov Chains. Inventory Control. Production Planning, Scheduling, and Sequencing. Queuing Models. Reliability. Quality Control.

Stochastic Programming. Simulation. Game Theory. Large Scale Optimization. Heuristic Methods.

2008: 246x174: 400pp Pb: 978-0-415-46137-5: £27.99

2007: 246x174: 904pp Hb: 978-0-8493-9721-9: £82.00

US $129.95

US $57.50

This authoritative volume, essential reading for academics in the field of Lifelong Learning, examines the complexities of the subject within a systematic global framework and places it in its socio-historic context.

2008: 246x174: 560pp Hb: 978-0-415-41904-8: £125.00

US $220.00

To recommend any of these titles to your library please see centre of catalogue for the Library Recommendation form

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

15

16

EDUCATION

2ND EDITION

Handbook of College Reading and Study Strategy Research Edited by Rona F. Flippo, University of Massachusetts Boston, USA and David C. Caverly, Texas State University - San Marcos, USA This Handbook is the most comprehensive and up-to-date source available for college reading and study strategy practitioners and administrators. In response to changing demographics, politics, policy, issues, and concerns in the field of college reading and study strategies since publication of the first edition in 2000, this new edition has been substantially revised and updated to reflect the newest research in the field, including six new chapters and a more user-friendly structure to make it easier for researchers, program administrators, college instructors, and graduate students to find the information that they need.

In this thorough and systematic examination of theory, research, and practice, college reading teachers will find information to make better instructional decisions, administrators will find justification for programmatic implementations, and professors will find in one book both theory and practice to better prepare graduate students to understand the parameters and issues of this field. The Handbook is an essential resource for professionals, researchers, and students as they continue to study, research, learn, and share more about college reading and study strategy issues and instruction.

2008: 254x178: 520pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6000-9: £145.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6001-6: £50.00 eBook: 978-0-203-89494-1

US $265.00

US $95.00

International Handbook on the Preparation and Development of School Leaders Jacky Lumby, University of Southhampton, UK, Gary Crow and Petros Pashiardis, Open University of Cyprus Sponsored by the University Council of Educational Administration (UCEA), the British Educational Leadership, Management, and Administration Society (BELMAS), and the Commonwealth Council for Educational Administration and Management (CCEAM), this is the first book to provide a comprehensive and comparative review of what is known about the preparation and development of primary and secondary schools leaders across the globe. It describes current issues and debates and an assessment of where the field of leadership development is headed.

2008: 254x178: 522pp Hb: 978-0-415-98847-6: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6387-1: £55.00 eBook: 978-1-4106-1847-4

Handbook of Design Research Methods in Education

International Handbook of Research on Conceptual Change

Innovations in Science, Technology, Engineering, and Mathematics Learning and Teaching

Edited by Stella Vosniadou, University of Athens

Edited by Anthony E. Kelly, and John Y. Baek, both at George Mason University, USA, Richard A. Lesh, Indiana University, USA

The study of conceptual change traces its heritage to the notions of paradigm (networks of shared beliefs, concepts, practices) and paradigm shift made famous by Thomas Kuhn in his book, The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. Kuhn’s work was quickly linked to developmental psychology (how knowledge develops) and to science education (teaching big, new ideas). This book is the first comprehensive review of the conceptual change movement and of the impressive research it has spawned on how knowledge develops and can be taught in different content areas. Because of its interdisciplinary focus chapter authors were instructed to write in a manner comprehensible to researchers and students from different fields.

This Handbook presents the latest thinking and current examples of design research in education.

The defining book for the field, it is designed as a guide for doctoral students, early career researchers, and cross-over researchers from fields outside of education interested in supporting innovation in educational settings through conducting design research.

2008: 254x178: 560pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6058-0: £140.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6059-7: £65.00 eBook: 978-1-4106-1794-1

US $275.00

US $100.00

2ND EDITION

Handbook of International Research in Mathematics Education Edited by Lyn D. English, Queensland University of Technology, Australia The second edition continues this Handbook’s mission of bringing together important new mathematics education research that makes a difference in both theory and practice. This edition includes ten totally new chapters; all other chapters are thoroughly revised and updated.

2008: 254x178: 944pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5875-4: £145.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5876-1: £55.00

US $265.00

Series: Educational Psychology Handbook

The International Handbook of Research on Conceptual Change consists of twenty-seven chapters that clarify the nature of conceptual change research, describes its most important findings and demonstrates their importance for education. It is organized into six sections that include detailed discussions of key theoretical and methodological issues, the roots of conceptual change research in the philosophy and history of science, mechanisms of conceptual change, and learner characteristics. It also contains chapters that describe conceptual change research in the content areas such as physics, astronomy, biology, medicine and health, and history. A particular focus is given to students’ difficulties in learning more advanced and counter-intuitive concepts.

2008: 254x178: 768pp Pb: 978-0-8058-6045-0: £60.00

US $110.00

US $105.00

2ND EDITION

Handbook of Education Politics and Policy Edited by Bruce Cooper, Fordham University, USA James Cibulka, University of Kentucky, USA and Lance Fusarelli, North Carolina State University, USA Written by a mix of established and rising stars in school politics, policy, law, finance, and reform this comprehensive Handbook provides a three part framework that helps organize this relatively new and loosely organized field of study.

2008: 254x178: 464pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6111-2: £125.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6112-9: £50.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88787-5

Handbook of Research for Educational Communications and Technology A Project of the Association for Educational Communications and Technology Edited by David H. Jonassen and Marcy P. Driscoll Series: AECT Series 2003: 279x216: 1,232pp Hb: 978-0-8058-4145-9: £150.00

US $225.00

US $89.95

US $195.00

US $99.95

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

US $275.00

EDUCATION

Handbook of School Counseling Edited by Hardin L.K. Coleman, University of Wisconsin, USA and Christine Yeh, University of San Francisco, USA Series: Counseling and Counseling Education The mission of this forty-eight chapter Handbook is to provide a comprehensive reference source that integrates counseling theory, research and practice into one volume. It is designed to meet the needs of entry-level practitioners from their initial placement in schools through their first three to five years of practice.

It will also be of interest to experienced school counselors, counselor educators, school researchers, and counseling representatives within state and local governments.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Introduction to the Field of School Counseling. History of School Counseling. A Concept of Best Practices in Training School Counselors. School Counseling: Moving Towards Standards and Models. Student Accomplishment: Equity and the School Counselor’s Role. Understanding Yourself as a School Counselor. Section 2: Diversity and School Counseling. The Acculturative Environment of Schools and the School Counselor: Goals and Roles that Create a Supportive Context for Immigrant Adolescents.

Immigrant Children and Youth in Schools. Racial Harassment in American Schools. The Role of Ethnic Identity in the Practice of School Counseling.

Understanding and Implementing Gay, Lesbian, Bisexual, Transgender, Questioning Affirmative Practices as School Counselors. Social Class in School Counseling. Disability in the Schools. Race and Ethnicity in School Counseling.

African American Empowerment in Secondary School Counseling. Section 3: Student Development.

Facilitating Personal and Social Development. Physical Health and Emotional Development: A Primer for School Counselors. Adolescent Sexual Health and Development.

The School Counselor’s Role in Promoting Literacy in Elementary School-aged Children. Designing Culturally Responsive School Counseling Career Development Programming for Youth. Section 4: School Counselor Competence. School Counselor Training: School and Societal Needs in the 21st Century. Supervision of Professional School Counselors. Multicultural Competence of School Counselors. Consultation with Teachers, Administrators, and Counseling Agencies.

Creating Caring School Communities.

Section 5: School-based Interventions. Youth Development and Prevention in the Schools. Individual Counseling as Intervention in Schools. Focused, But Flexible: A Developmental Approach to Small-Group Work in Schools. Conducting Groups in Schools: Challenges and Rewards. Families in Context: An Essential Component of School Counseling. Crisis Management in the Schools. Collaboration and Consultation as Essential Services for School Counseling Programs. Career Development Interventions in Schools. Creative Arts Counseling in Schools: Toward a More Comprehensive Approach. Counseling the Gifted and Talented.

Cultural Identity Enhancement Strategies for Culturally Diverse Youth. Section 6: Working with SocioEmotional Challenges. Interpersonal Relationships.

Suicide Prevention, Intervention, and Postvention.

Working with School Failure. Measuring and Evaluating Adolescent Connectedness. Bullying and Peer Victimization. School Violence. Substance Abuse.

Section 7: Accountability and Professional Issues in School Counseling. Evaluation of School Guidance and Counseling Programs: Past, Present, and Future. Research in and on School Counseling. The Essential Role of School-Community Partnerships in School Counseling.

Law and Ethics in School Counseling. Professional Activities in School Counseling.

2008: 279x216: 928pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5622-4: £125.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5623-1: £49.99

Handbook of Research on New Literacies

Handbook of Moral and Character Education

Edited by Julie Coiro, University of Rhode Island, USA, Michele Knobel, Colin Lankshear, both at Montclair State University, USA and Donald J. Leu, New Literacies Project, University of Connecticut, USA

Edited by Larry P. Nucci, University of IllinoisChicago, USA and Darcia Narvaez, Notre Dame University, USA

Situated at the intersection of two of the most important areas in educational research today – literacy and technology – this Handbook draws on the potential of each while carving out important new territory. It provides leadership for this newly emerging field, directing scholars to the major issues, theoretical perspectives, and interdisciplinary research concerning new literacies.

2008: 254x178: 1,096pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5651-4: £130.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5652-1: £55.00

US $235.00

US $95.00

Handbook of Research in Social Studies Education Linda S. Levstik, University of Kentucky, USA and Cynthia A. Tyson, Ohio State University, USA This Handbook outlines the current state of research in social studies education – a complex, dynamic, challenging field with competing perspectives about appropriate goals, and on-going conflict over the content of the curriculum – and, equally important, encourages new research needed to move the field forward to foster the civic competence which advocates for the social studies have long claimed as a fundamental goal.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Change and Continuity in Social Studies 2. Continuity and Change in Social Studies Curriculum 3. Early Elementary Social Studies 4. What Happens in Social Studies Classrooms? Research on K-12 Social Studies Practice Part 2: Civic Competence in Pluralist Democracies 5. Knowing and Doing in Democratic Citizenship Education 6. International Political Socialization Research 7. Service-Learning 8. Controversial Issues asnd Democratic Discourse 9. Diversity and Citizenship Education: Historical, Theoretical, and Philosophical Issues Part 3: Social Justice and the Social Studies 10. Social Justice and the Social Studies 11. Gender and Sexuality in the Social Studies 12. Global Education Part 4: Assessment and Accountability 13. Assessment and Accountability in the Social Studies Part Five: Teaching and Learning in the Disciplines 14. Research on Students’ Ideas about History 15. Research on K-12 Geography Education 16. Recent Research on the Teaching and Learning of Pre-Collegiate Economics Part 6: Information Ecologies: Technology in the Social Studies 17. Technology and Social Studies Part 7: Teacher Preparation and Development 18. The Education of Social Studies Teachers 19. The Professional Development of Social Studies Teachers 2008: 254x178: 424pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5535-7: £130.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5536-4: £46.99 eBook: 978-0-203-93022-9 US $95.00

US $265.00

Series: Educational Psychology Handbook There is widespread agreement that schools should contribute to students’ moral development and character formation. Currently 80% of states have mandates regarding character education. This apparent support for moral education, however, masks a high degree of controversy surrounding the meaning and the methods of moral and/or character education. The purpose of this Handbook is to replace the ideological rhetoric that infects this field with a comprehensive, research-oriented volume that includes the extensive changes that have occurred over the last fifteen years.

Coverage includes the latest applications of developmental and cognitive psychology to moral and character education from preschool to college settings.

2008: 254x178: 656pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5960-7: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5961-4: £55.00 eBook: 978-0-203-93143-1

US $210.00

US $95.00

Handbook of Technological Pedagogical Content Knowledge (TPCK) for Educators Edited by The AACTE Committee on Innovation and Technology, USA This Handbook addresses the concept and implementation of technological pedagogical content knowledge — the knowledge and skills that teachers need in order to integrate technology meaningfully into instruction in specific content areas.

Selected Contents: Part 1: What is Technological Pedagogical Content Knowledge (TPCK)?

1. Introducing TPCK 2. Bridging Digital and Cultural Divides: TPCK for Equity of Access to Technology Part 2: Integrating Technological Pedagogical Content Knowledge Into Specific Subject Areas 3. TPCK in K-6 Literacy Education: It’s Not That Elementary! 4. Leveraging the Development of English TPCK Within the Deictic Nature of Literacy 5. TPCK: An Integrated Framework for Educating World Languages Teachers 6. Toward Democracy: Social Studies and TPCK 7. Perhaps a Matter of Imagination: TPCK in Mathematics Education 8. Placing the Magic in the Classroom: TPCK in Arts Education 9. Science, Technology, and Teaching: The Topic-Specific Challenges of TPCK in Science 10.The Role of TPCK in Physical Education Part 3: Integrating Technological Pedagogical Content Knowledge Into Teacher Education and Professional Development 11. Guiding Preservice Teachers in Developing TPCK 12. TPCK in In-Service Education: Assisting Experienced Teachers’ ’Planned Improvisations’ 13. Advancing TPCK Through Collaborations Across Educational Associations Afterword: TPCK Action for Teacher Education: It’s About Time! About The AACTE Committee on Innovation and Technology About the Contributors Indexes 2008: 229x152: 336pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6355-0: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6356-7: £33.99 eBook: 978-1-4106-1818-4

US$160.00

US $62.95

US $225.00

US $89.95

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

17

18

EDUCATION

GEOGRAPHY

3RD EDITION

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Research on Teacher Education

Handbook of Urban Ecology

Enduring Questions in Changing Contexts Edited by Marilyn Cochran-Smith, Boston College, USA, Sharon Feiman-Nemser, Brandeis University, USA, D. John McIntyre, Southern Illinois University, USA and Kelly E. Demers, Associate Editor, Boston College, USA Co-Published by Routledge/Taylor & Francis Group and the Association of Teacher Educators.

The Handbook of Research on Teacher Education was initiated to ferment change in education based on solid evidence. The publication of the First Edition was a signal event in 1990.

While the preparation of educators was then – and continues to be – the topic of substantial discussion, there did not exist a codification of the best that was known at the time about teacher education.

Reflecting the needs of educators today, the Third Edition takes a new approach to achieving the same purpose. Beyond simply conceptualizing the broad landscape of teacher education and providing comprehensive reviews of the latest research for major domains of practice, this edition: • stimulates a broad conversation about foundational issues • brings multiple perspectives to bear • provides new specificity to topics that have been undifferentiated in the past • includes diverse voices in the conversation.

The Editors, with an Advisory Board, identified nine foundational issues and translated them into a set of focal questions: • What’s the Point?: The Purposes of Teacher Education • What Should Teachers Know? Teacher Capacities: Knowledge, Beliefs, Skills, and Commitments • Where Should Teachers Be Taught? Settings and Roles in Teacher Education • Who Teaches? Who Should Teach? Teacher Recruitment, Selection, and Retention • Does Difference Make a Difference? Diversity and Teacher Education • How Do People Learn to Teach?

• Who’s in Charge? Authority in Teacher Education • How Do We Know What We Know? Research and Teacher Education • What Good is Teacher Education? The Place of Teacher Education in Teachers’ Education.

The Association of Teacher Educators (ATE) is an individual membership organization devoted solely to the improvement of teacher education both for school-based and post secondary teacher educators.

For more information on our organization and publications, please visit: www.ate1.org 2008: 254x178: 1,392pp Hb: 978-0-8058-4776-5: £130.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-4777-2: £55.00 eBook: 978-0-203-93869-0 US $95.00

Edited by Ian Douglas, University of Manchester, UK, David Goode, University College London, UK, Mike Houck, Portland State University, USA and Rusong Wang, Chinese Academy of Sciences, China The birds, animals, insects, trees and plants encountered by the majority of the world’s people are those that survive in, adapt to, or are introduced to, urban areas. Some of these organisms give great pleasure; others invade, colonise and occupy neglected and hidden areas such as derelict land and sewers. Urban ecology analyzes this biodiversity and complexity and provides the science to guide policy and management to make cities more attractive, more enjoyable, and better for our own health and that of the planet. This book provides a state-of the art guide to the science, practice and value of urban ecology to help everyone understand and enjoy their urban habitat.

Original contributions from leading academics and practitioners from across the world provide an in-depth coverage of the main elements of practical urban ecology. The sixty-five chapters provide practitioners and students with the wealth of interdisciplinary information needed to manage the biota and green landscapes in urban areas. In six parts it deals with the philosophies, concepts and history of urban ecology; followed by consideration of the biophysical character of the urban environment and the diverse habitats found within it. It then examines human relationships with urban nature, the health, economic and environmental benefits of urban ecology before discussing the methods used in urban ecology and ways of putting the science into practice.

Urban areas have high biodiversity. Urban gardens and vegetable plots have multiple benefits, from helping to reduce greenhouse gases to providing insect and bird habitats. Encounters with nature in cities help to improve our physical and mental health. The ecosystem services provided by nature in cities include cooling the urban area, reducing urban flood risks, filtering pollutants, supplying some of our food, and giving opportunities for accessible recreation. Yet protecting urban nature faces competition from other urban land uses.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Context, History and Philosophies: Introduction 1. Urban Ecology: Goals and Definitions N. E. Mcintyre 2. The Analysis of Cities as Ecosystems 3. Urban Complexity Analysis: Social-EconomicNatural Complex Ecosystem Approach Rusong Wang 4. Urban Ecology and Industrial Ecology Xuemei Bai 5. Urban Areas in the Context of Human Ecology Roderick J. Lawrence 6. The Politics of Providing for Nature and for Human Well-being and Economic Activities in Cities 7. Environmental and Intergenerational Justice: From Victorian Paternalism to ‘Intergenerational Denial’ 8. The Human Relationship with Nature: Rights of Animals and Plants in the Urban Context Jason Byrne 9. Urban Areas in the Context of Human Ecology Roderick J. Lawrence 10. Urban Natural Histories: Steps in the Path to Urban Ecology 11. Urban Greenspace Conservation: The History of Urban Greenspace Hazel Conway 12. History of Planning for Nature in Cities David Goode 13. Economic Imperialism and its Lessons for Nature in Cities Anna Chiesura Part 2: The Urban Ecological Environment: Introduction 14. The Climate of Cities Sue Grimmond 15. The Urban Heat Island Dr. T. R. Oke 16. Indoor Microclimatic Environments 17. Urban Rainfall J. Marshall Shepherd 18. Urban Hydrology and Drainage Ing. Erik Pasche 19. Urban Geomorphology: Modified and Urban Land Forms Ian Douglas 20. Urban Soils Peter J. Marcotullio 21. The Process of Natural Succession in Urban Areas Wayne C. Zipperer 22. Recombinant Ecology in Urban Areas 23. Restoration Ecology Stephen Handel 24. Creative Ecology Grant Luscombe and Richard Scott Part 3: The Nature Of Urban Habitats: Introduction 25. Paved, Roofed, Densely Built-up Urban Complexes Devoid of Vegetation and Water Bodies C. Philip Wheater 26. Urban Cliffs 27. Suburban Mosaic of Houses, Roads, Gardens and Mature Trees Alison Loram 28. Corridor Zones of Wild Plants Jon Sadler 29. Landscaped Parks and Open Spaces Martin Hermy 30. Derelict Land and Construction Sites B. Strauss and R. Biedermann 31. Grassland on Reclaimed Soil, with Streets, Car Parks and Buildings But Few or No Mature Trees Tony Kendle 32. Urban Contaminated Land Mike Rivett and Jon Sadler 33. Small Woodland and Rural Areas Within the City C. Y. Jim 34. Water Bodies 35. Wetlands and Much-modified Water Bodies Joan G. Ehrenfeld, Emilie Stander, Monica Palta 36. Urban Animal Ecology: Wildlife and Pets Peter Jarvis 37. Feral Animals in the Urban Environment Peter Jarvis Part 4: Ecosystem Services And Urban Ecology: Introduction 38. The Human Values of Urban Ecosystems: An Overview Marina Alberti 39. Intrinsic and Aesthetic Values of Urban Nature: Two Views David Nicholson-Lord and Rachel Kaplan 40. Urban Nature and Human Physical Health Jenna H. Tilt 41. Urban Nature and Human Psychological and Social Mental Health William C. Sullivan 42. Urban Street Trees and the Urban Environment Gerald Dawe 43. Urban Vegetation and Urban Runoff 44. Urban Gardens and Biodiversity K. J. Gaston 45. Recreational Values of Urban Nature C. Y. Jim 46. Urban Agricultural Ecology 47. The Ecology of Urban Drainage Part 5: Methodologies: Introduction 48. Urban Habitat Analysis Penny Angold 49. Urban Habitat Type Mapping Peter Jarvis 50. Analysis of Urban Introduced and Invasive Species 51. Analysis of Urban Environmental Influences on Speciation 52. Urban Biogeochemical Flux Analysis Nancy Grimm 53. Urban Metabolism Analysis ShuLi Huang 54. Urban Greenspace Quality and Function Rusong Wang Part 6: Applications And Policy Implications: Introduction 55. Urban Greenspace Standards John Box 56. Urban Areas and the Biosphere Reserve Concept Pete Frost 57. Urban Greenspace and Adaptation to Climate Change John Handley 58. Urban Ecology and Sustainable Urban Drainage Peter Worrall 59. Green Roofs, Urban Trees and Urban Runoff Joachim Tourbier 60. Urban Ecology and Multiple Purpose Floodplain Use 61. Achieving Benefits from Urban Wildlife and Urban Nature Conservation Mathew Frith 62. Urban Ecology in a Regional Context: Integrating the Urban Green with Rural Areas Joe Ravetz 63. Biodiversity as a Statutory Component of Urban Planning David Goode 64. Making Urban Ecology a Key Element in Urban Development and Planning John Stewart Murray 65. Towards Ecopolis: New Technologies, New Philosophies and New Developments Rusong Wang Conclusion May 2010: 246x189: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-49813-5: £128.00

US $230.00

US $235.00

eBooks in Geography To find out more about our eBooks in Geography please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

GEOGRAPHY

HISTORY

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

Routledge Worlds

Handbook of Local and Regional Development Edited by Andy Pike, and John Tomaney, both at University of Newcastle upon Tyne, UK July 2010: 246x189: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-54831-1: £98.00

US $165.00

The Atlantic World 1400 –1850

FORTHCOMING

Edited by William O’Reilly

The Victorian World

Series: Routledge Worlds

Edited by Martin Hewitt, Leeds Trinity & All Saints, UK

The Atlantic world is a constantly shifting arena, but one which has been a focus of huge and vibrant debate for many years.

FORTHCOMING

Series: Routledge Worlds

Routledge Handbook of Climate Change and Society

With an interdisciplinary approach that encompasses the political history, history of ideas, cultural history, art history, this volume, in the successful Routledge Worlds series, offers a sweeping survey of the world in the 19th century.

Edited by Constance Lever-Tracey This Handbook brings together the latest research on climate change from the social sciences. It comprehensively covers social causes, impacts, recognition and responses to climate change and features cutting edge research by leading scholars from Australia, Canada, Europe, UK and USA, and new material on China, India and South East Asia. The science of climate change is introduced in non technical language by a leading climatologist. It is aimed at advanced undergraduates, postgraduated, researchers and libraries in the social sciences.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introductory 1. The Scientific Study of Global Warming. How Does Global Warming Work? How Do We Know? What Do We Know?

2. Natural and Social Science: Interaction of Nature and Society Requires Multidisciplinarity Part 2: Social Causes 3. Fossil Fuels at Basis of Industrial Revolution. Competition Fuels Growth, Trade etc 4. Capitalism V Nature. Socialist Models 5. Big Organisations and Climate Change 6. Consumerism Under Discussion Part 3: Future Social Impacts 7. Vulnerability and Adaptation 8. Case Study on Urban Vulnerability in India 9. Climate Change and Risk Society Part 4 : Social Recognition of Anthropogenic Climate Change 10. Why Did it Take so Long?

11. Sceptics, Deniers and their Think Tanks 12. Media 13. Case Study: Climate Change Reporting in Time Magazine, Before and After Katrina 14. Public Opinion 15. Religion and Climate Change Part 5: Social Responses - Different Perspectives 16. Economics of Climate Responses - Efficiency; Offsets, Carbon Trades; Externalities; ‘Ecological Debt; Stern Report etc 17. Economic Crises, Climate Change and Business Innovations 18. The Global Politics of Energy 19. Ethics and the Politics of Climate Change Part 6: National and Global Responses 20. Global Responses. Under Discussion 21. Europe and US 22. China’s Emissions: Dangers and Responses 23. Case Study: Comparing Wind Energy in Germany and the UK Part 7: Implications of Alternative Mitigation Proposals 24. Simpler Lifestyles and Sustainable Agriculture 25. Renewable Energy 26. Case Study: Agroforestry in the Philippines 27. Biofuels 28. Risks of Nuclear Energy Conclusion April 2010 Hb: 978-0-415-54476-4: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-54478-8: £28.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87621-3

US $155.00

US$56.95

With essays from leading historians, art historians, literary scholars, sociologists, political scientists, historical geographers, and academics working in cultural studies, this multi-disciplinary volume takes a global approach to the Victorian period, ensuring that the perspective of the volume is not solely metropolitan, but understands the Victorianism of the period from multiple positions, social and spatial as well as disciplinary.

Divided into seven thematic sections, the volume starts with an introductory, context setting, historiographical section on mapping and milestones – grounding the themes that follow.

It then moves on to consider the world order, the economy, politics high and low, knowledge and belief culture and Victorianism around the world.

In over fifty chapters, all written by experts in the field, The Atlantic World takes up these debates and gathers together key, original scholarship in the area.

Thematically structured, the volume covers a broad range of subjects. Part 1 investigates the exploration and investigation of the Atlantic, from navigation and cartography to the natural world. Part 2 explores the migration of people across the Atlantic in many different guises, from slavery and the slave trade to religious migration. Other parts go on to look at cultural encounters, governance, economy and empire, how ideas circulated across and around the Atlantic and outside this geographical sphere as well and Atlantic revolutions, such as the wars of independence and the slave revolts.

Including an introductory essay from the editor which defines the field and lavishly illustrated with paintings and drawings and maps this accessible volume is invaluable reading for all students and scholars of this broad sweep of world history.

Selected Contents: Introduction The Idea of the Victorian 1.Milestones; 2. The World Order 3. Economy and Society 4. Politics; 5. Knowledge and Belief 6. Culture 7. Varieties of Victorian.

Selected Contents: Introduction: The Atlantic World: Definition, Theory, and Boundaries Part 1: Atlantic Explorations Part 2: The Movement of Peoples Part 3: Cultural Encounters Part 4: Governance, Economy and Empire Part 5: Religion Part 6: The Circulation of Ideas Part 7: The Structure of Colonial Societies Part 8: Indigenous Societies Part 9: Atlantic Revolutions Part 10: Atlantic Networks Conclusion: The Future of Atlantic History

June 2011: 246x174: 736pp Hb: 978-0-415-49187-7: £150.00

January 2011: 246x174: 736pp Hb: 978-0-415-46704-9: £135.00

Lavishly illustrated, vivid and accessible this volume is invaluable reading for all students and scholars of the 19th century.

US $300.00

US $236.00

The Viking World Edited by Stefan Brink, University of Aberdeen, UK and Neil Price, University of Uppsala, Sweden Series: Routledge Worlds Filling a gap in the literature for an academically oriented volume on the Viking period, this unique book is a one-stop authoritative introduction to all the latest research in the field.

Bringing together today’s leading scholars, both established seniors and younger, cutting-edge academics, Brink and Price have constructed the first single work to gather innovative research from a spectrum of disciplines (including archaeology, history, philology, comparative religion, numismatics and cultural geography) to create the most comprehensive Viking Age book of its kind ever attempted.

Consisting of longer articles providing overviews of important themes, supported by shorter papers focusing on material of particular interest, this comprehensive volume covers such wide-ranging topics as social institutions, spatial issues, the Viking Age economy, warfare, beliefs, language, voyages, and links with medieval and Christian Europe.

This original work, specifically oriented towards a university audience and the educated public, will have a self-evident place as an undergraduate course book and will be a standard work of reference for all those in the field.

For Handbooks in Urban and Planning, see Page 1

Selected Contents: Part 1: Viking Age Scandinavia People, Society and Social Institutions. Living Space.

Technology and Trade. Warfare and Weaponry. Pre-Christian Religion and Belief. Language, Literature and Art Part 2: The Viking Expansion The British Isles. Continental Europe and the Mediterranean. The Baltic. Russia and the East. The North Atlantic Part 3: Scandinavia Enters the European Stage The Coming of Christianity. The Development of Nation States (r’ki) 2008: 246x174: 717pp Hb: 978-0-415-33315-3: £135.00 eBook: 978-0-203-41277-0

US $240.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

19

20

HISTORY

The Islamic World

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

Edited by Andrew Rippin, University of Victoria, Canada

The Living Hindu World

The Ottoman World

Edited by Sushil Mittal, James Madison University, USA and Gene Thursby, University of Florida, USA

Edited by Christine Woodhead

Series: Routledge Worlds The Islamic World is an outstanding guide to Islamic faith and culture in all its geographical and historical diversity. Written by a distinguished international team of Islamic scholars, it elucidates the history, philosophy and practice of one of the world’s great religious traditions. Its grounding in contemporary scholarship makes it an ideal reference source for students and scholars alike.

Edited by Andrew Rippin, a leading scholar of Islam, the volume covers the political, geographical, religious, intellectual, cultural and social worlds of Islam, and offers insight into all aspects of Muslim life including the Qur’an and law, philosophy, science and technology, art, literature, and film and much else. It explores the concept of an ‘Islamic’ world: what makes it distinctive and how uniform is that distinctiveness across Muslim geographical regions and through history?

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Geo-political Islamic World 1. The Arab Middle East 2. West Africa 3. East Africa 4. Turkey 5. Iran 6. Central Asia 7. Southeast Asia 8. Europe 9. The Diaspora in the West Part 2: The Religious Islamic World 10. The Qur’an 11. Muhammad 12. Sunni Law 13. Theology: Freewill and Predestination 14. Ritual Life 15. Sidebar Rites of Passage 16. Sufism 17. Shi’ism 18. The Iba’is 19. Relations with Other Religions Part 3: The Intellectual Islamic World 20. The Arabic Language 21. Philosophy 22. The Scientific Tradition 23. Education 24. The Transmission of Knowledge 25.Travel Biographies: 26. Abd al-Jabbar 27. Niam al-Mulk 28. Al-Ghazali 29. Ibn Arabi 30. Ibn Taymiyya 31. Nair al-Din al-usi 32. Al-Suyui 33. Shah Wali Allah 34. Bediüzzaman Said Nursi 35. Sayyid Qub 36. Fazlur Rahman Part 4: The Cultural Islamic World 37. Art 38. Architecture 39. Material culture 40. Military Organization and Warfare 41. Popular Piety and Cultural Practices 42. Music 43. Cinema Part 5: Social Issues and the Islamic World 44. Civilization 45. Social Change 46. Secularism 47. Public Ethics 48. Marriage, Family, and Sexual Ethics 49. Women, Gender and Human Rights 50. Religious Minority Rights 51. sidebar International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (extracts) Glossary. Index.

2008: 246x174: 704pp Hb: 978-0-415-36646-5: £150.00

The Living Hindu World documents the range and depth of the Hindu traditions in its many lived manifestations to the present day. It explores the continuing relevance of Hinduism in contemporary life in India and, indeed, throughout the world, covering Hindu material culture in contexts such as medicine, temple architecture, printing technologies, ritual objects, and clothing. It also includes chapters devoted to the reevaluation of facts and systems of thought ignored or neglected until recently, owing to the dominance of western categories and preconceptions in earlier studies of the tradition.

The Living Hindu World takes into account tradition both north Indian and southern, learned and popular, orthodox and devotional, ascetic and social-affirming, traditional and modernizing, high caste and low, and male and female, while emphasizing Hinduism’s role in everyday life. It paints a rich and enjoyable picture of one of the world’s most vibrant and complex traditions.

February 2010: 246x174: 640pp Hb: 978-0-415-45160-4: £120.00

US $216.00

Series: Routledge Worlds Was there such a thing as an ’Ottoman world’? The Ottoman empire as a political entity comprised most of the present Middle East, North Africa and South-Eastern Europe. For over 500 years, it encompassed a wide range of communities with differing religious, linguistic and cultural traditions, most of which lived under Ottoman rule as a result of military conquest.

Traditional study of the Ottoman empire has focused on the dynasty in Istanbul, its military undertakings and its centralised administration: the nature of its huge and diverse state has not been seriously addressed until recently and is not covered in standard textbooks. The Ottoman World inverts this approach, looking not from Istanbul outwards, but from the provinces inwards, and examining Ottoman social and cultural worlds from the bottom up. How did major cities such as Cairo or Damascus adjust to Ottoman rule - or did it adjust to them? What produced the consensus that held the empire together, particularly in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries? To what degree did subject peoples see themselves as part of a political whole?

How far did the state impinge upon the lives of ordinary people in the provinces?

Thirty-Five of the world’s leading specialists examine these and many other questions in this ambitious and important volume, making readily available the exciting new research which has been undertaken in recent years.

March 2010: 246x174: 720pp Hb: 978-0-415-44492-7: £135.00

US$270.00

Also available in this series…

The Babylonian World 2007: 246x174: 616pp Hb:978-0-415-35346-5: £140.00

US $270.00

The World of Pompeii 2007: 246x174: 704pp Hb: 978-0-415-17324-7: £140.00

The Renaissance World 2007: 246x174: 728pp Hb: 978-0-415-33259-0: £140.00

The Egyptian World 2004: 246x174: 736pp Hb: 978-0-415-21575-6: £140.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

HISTORY

NEW

NEW

NEW

The Elizabethan World

The Orthodox Christian World

Edited by Susan Doran, Jesus College, University of Oxford, UK and Norman Jones, Utah State University, USA

Edited by Augustine Casiday, University of Durham, UK

The Routledge Handbook of the Peoples and Places of Ancient Western Asia

Series: Routledge Worlds The Elizabethan world is of immense social, cultural and economic significance, and the events and people of the time are some of the most colourful and best-known in British history. Elizabeth I is one of British history’s most famous monarchs, and her reign saw the defeat of the Spanish Armada, the foundations of the early British Empire and the emergence of Britain as a major maritime power.

Literature and the arts flourished, with Shakespeare in full creative bloom and the growth of commercial theatre.

Major religious changes took place at this time, including the 1559 Church Settlement from which the Church of England traces its roots.

This lavishly illustrated, multi-disciplinary volume approaches the Elizabethan World thematically. Topics covered include the royal court; political ideas; censorship and propaganda; Protestantism and national identity; the Catholic community; social hierarchies; women; the family and household; commerce and consumption; urban and rural economies; theatre; art; architecture; education; exploration and imperialism; and Elizabethan wars. The book conveys a vivid picture of how politics, religion, science, popular culture, the world of work and social practices fit together in an exciting world of change.

Selected Contents: Introduction Susan Doran and Norman Jones Part 1: Governance and Politics 1. Governing Norman Jones 2. Elizabeth Susan Doran 3 Council Natalie Mears 4. Court William Tighe 5. Political Ideas Ann McLaren 6. Parliament David Dean 7. Censorship and Propoganda Cyndia Clegg 8. Centre and Localities John Cooper 9. Ireland David Edwards Part 2: Religion and Religious Cultures 10. The Church: Structure and Teachings Brett Usher 11. Parochial Religion John Craig 12. Protestantism and National Identity Thomas Freeman 13. The Catholic Community William Sheils 14. The Godly Peter Lake Part 3: Society 15. Social Hierarchies Susan Amussen 16. Nobility and Gentry Janet Dickinson 17. The Parish Elite Henry French 18. The Poor Steve Hindle 19. Women Tim Stretton 20. Family and Household Alex Shepard 21. Rebellion and Disorder K. J. Kesselring Part 4: Work and the Economy 22. Economic Preoccupations David Sacks 23. Commerce and Consumption Ian Archer 24. Tudor Troubles: Problems of Youth in Elizabethan England Paul Griffiths 25. Urban Economies Joe Ward and Muriel McClendon 26 Rural Economies Richard Hoyle Part 5: Culture 27. Transformations in Popular Culture Martin Ingram 28. News Joad Raymond 29. Theatre Lawrence Manley 30. Popular Entertainments Paul White 31. Art Richard Williams 32. Architecture Tara Hamling 33. Poetry Steven May 34. Intellectual Developments Freyja Cox Jensen Part 6: The Outside World 35. Europe 1558–1603 David Potter 37. The Catholic Threat and Elizabethan Wars Paul Hammer 38. Exploration and Imperialism Ken MacMillan 39. Elizabethan Awareness of the Outside World Matthew Dimmock October 2009: 246x174: 640pp Hb: 978-0-415-40959-9: £140.00

Series: Routledge Worlds Orthodox Christianity is the main historical inheritor of the Byzantine tradition of Christianity, and is still practised around the world. The two main strands are Greek Orthodox and Russian Orthodox, but there are thriving communities in countries are varied as Egypt (the Copts), Armenia, and Romania, with strong diasporic communities in Western Europe, North America, Australia, and elsewhere.

This book offers a compelling overview of the Orthodox World, covering the main regional traditions and the ways in which the tradition has become global; key figures from John Chrysostom to the contemporary Fathers of Mount Athos and a rich selection of key themes, including theology, monasticism, iconography and the arts, pastoral care and Orthodoxy through the eyes of travellers.

The contributors are drawn from the Orthodox community worldwide, providing an innovative and illuminating approach to the subject, ideal for students and scholars alike.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Orthodox Christianity around the world Regional Traditions. The Greek Tradition. The Slavic Tradition (inc. Russian, Ukrainian, Serbia, Bulgaria). The Romanian Tradition. The Syriac Tradition. The Arabic Tradition. The Coptic Tradition.

The Ethiopian Tradition. The Armenian Tradition. The Georgian Tradition. Orthodoxy Worldwide. Western Europe. North America. Subsection: Alaska SubSaharan Africa. South America. Australasia.

Section 2: Important Figures in Orthodox Christianity. Origen – John Chrysostom. Ephrem the Syrian. Cyril of Alexandria. Babai the Great. Emperor Justinian. Dionysius the Areopagite. Maximus the Confessor. Theodore Abu. Qurrah Cyril and Methodius.

Photius the Great. Symeon the New Theologian.

Gregory abu-l Farag (Barhebraeus). Takla Haymanot. The Hesychasts. Nil Sorsky. Neagoe. Basarab. The Optina Elders. Nikodimos the Hagiorite. Philaret of Moscow.

Raphael Hawaweeny. The Paris School. Contemporary Athonite Fathers. Dumitru Staniloae. Matta el-Meskein.

Section 3: Major themes in Orthodox Christianity Orthodox Worship. Orthodox Doctrine. ‘Sophia’ Calendars and Chronologies Monasticism. Iconography and Aesthetics. Canon Law. Ecclesiology and Ecumenism. Pastoral Care and Counselling. Education.

Music. Literature: Russian Literature: Greek Ethnicity and Orthodoxy. Orthodoxy Through the Eyes of Travellers.

November 2009: 246x174: 672pp Hb: 978-0-415-45516-9: £120.00

The Near East from the Early Bronze Age to the fall of the Persian Empire Trevor Bryce, University of Queensland, Australia This 500,000 word reference work provides the most comprehensive general treatment yet available of the peoples and places of the regions commonly referred to as the ancient Near and Middle East – extending from the Aegean coast of Turkey in the west to the Indus river in the east. It contains some 1,500 entries on the kingdoms, countries, cities, and population groups of Anatolia, Cyprus, Syria-Palestine, Mesopotamia, and Iran and parts of Central Asia, from the Early Bronze Age to the end of the Persian empire.

Five distinguished international scholars have collaborated with the author on the project. Detailed accounts are provided of the Near/Middle Eastern peoples and places known to us from historical records.

Each of these entries includes specific references to translated passages from the relevant ancient texts.

Numerous entries on archaeological sites contain accounts of their history of excavation, as well as more detailed descriptions of their chief features and their significance within the commercial, cultural, and political contexts of the regions to which they belonged.

The book contains a range of illustrations, including twenty maps. It will serve as a major, indeed a unique, reference source for students as well as established scholars, both of the ancient near eastern as well as the classical civilizations. It will also appeal to more general readers wishing to pursue in depth their interests in these civilizations. There is nothing comparable to it on the market today.

Selected Contents: List of maps. List of figures.

Abbreviations. Maps. Introduction. Historical Overview Alphabetical Entries Appendices 1. – General Chronology 2. – The Major Royal Dynasties 3. – Urartian Chronology 4. – Greek and Roman Authors Glossary Bibliography Index.

June 2009: 246x174: 864pp Hb: 978-0-415-39485-7: £160.00

US$215.00

US $250.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

US $260.00

21

22

HISTORY

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

NEW

English Historical Documents, 1914-1957

The Routledge History of Slavery

English Historical Documents, 1603–1660

Edited by John Stevenson, Worcester College, Oxford, UK English Historical Documents is the most ambitious, impressive and comprehensive collection of primary documents on English history ever published. The volumes were published between 1953 and 1977 and have become landmark publications in their own fields.

This exciting new volume covers the period from 1914 to 1957, bringing the series further into the twentieth century. The format of the series has been updated and the documents gathered here encompass the most up to date approaches to the material, covering political, social and cultural history. This volume includes informative introductory pieces for the parts and sections and editorial comment is directed towards making sources intelligible rather than drawing conclusions from them.

February 2010: 234x156: 928pp Hb: 978-0-415-47603-4: £200.00 before publication; £250.00 thereafter US $450.00

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Guide to European Political Archives Sources since 1945 Edited by Chris Cook, formerly Head of the Modern Archives Unit, UK Presenting a comprehensive range of 1,500 personal papers, this major reference work provides an authoritative and wide-ranging guide to archives and sources now becoming available for European political history since 1945.

Selected Contents: Introduction and Acknowledgements. Abbreviations of Major Record Repositories. Part 1: Checklist of Archives of Organisations and Societies (A-Z). Part 2: Personal Archive Collections. Appendix 1: The Colonial Records Survey. Appendix 2: The Military Records Survey.

Appendix 3: A Note on Electronic Pathways May 2011: 246x189: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-46475-8: £145.00

Edited by Trevor Burnard and Gad Heuman, University of Warwick, UK The Routledge History of Slavery is a landmark publication that provides an overview of the main themes surrounding the history of slavery spanning the last two milennia. With the 200th anniversary of the abolition of the slave trade in the UK just passed, this volume comes at a timely moment. Taking stock of the field of Slave Studies the book concentrates on the major advances in the field over the past decades in which the study of slavery has become so prominent.

Offering an unusual, transnational history of slavery, the specially commissioned chapters first look at slavery in different parts of the world and over time, such as in Ancient Rome, Africa and the transatlantic slave trade.

In part two they move on to focus on different themes that define slavery such as slave culture, the slave economy, slave resistance and the planter class, as well as areas of life affected by slavery, such as family and work. The final part of the volume goes on to study changes and continuities over time, looking at areas such as abolition, but also the continuance of modern slavery alongside the very pertinent issue of commemoration and remembrance,

Edited by Peter Gaunt, University of Chester, UK and Barry Coward, Birkbeck, University of London, UK Series: English Historical Documents English Historical Documents is the most ambitious, impressive and comprehensive collection of primary documents on English history ever published. The volumes were published between 1953 and 1977 and have become landmark publications in their own fields.

This long awaited volume covers 1603–1660, the years of the Stuart Kings, the English Civil War and the rise and fall of the Republic. The format of the series has been updated and the documents gathered here encompass the most up to date approaches to the material. This volume includes informative introductory pieces for the parts and sections and editorial comment is directed towards making sources intelligible rather than drawing conclusions from them.

Selected Contents: Part 1: General Trends Part 2: 1603–1640 (a) Government and Politics (b) Religion and the Church Part 3: 1640–1660 (a) War & Military Affairs (b) Government and Politics

Including contributors renowned in their field of expertise, presenting a survey of the current state of the field, and including essays which address the most pressing issues, this ground-breaking collection is essential reading for all those interested in the history of slavery.

December 2009: 234x156: 832pp Hb: 978-0-415-19909-4: £200.00 before publication; £250.00 thereafter

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Slavery as a Global Institution 1. Ancient: Greek & Roman 2. African 3. Indian Ocean 4. Native American Slavery 5. Origins of Early Modern Slavery 6. Transatlantic Slave Trade Part 2: The Character of Slavery 7. Work 8. Demography 9. Family & Gender 10. Religion 11. Slave Culture 12. Slave Economy 13. Slave Resistance 14. Slave Rebellions 15. Planter Class 16. Free Part 3: Changes and Continuities 17. Revolutions 18. Abolition 19. Forging 20. Modern Slavery 21. Commemorations and Remembrance

Handbook for Classical Research

May 2010: 234x156: 560pp Hb: 978-0-415-46689-9: £100.00

US $200.00

US $275.00

US $450.00

NEW Edited by David Schaps, Bar-Ilan University, Israel A basic Handbook for every student of classics that will instruct him/her in how to research every area of classical studies, from undergraduate dissertation upwards. It will also be of assistance to scholars and complements standard reference books by concentrating on ’how-to’ topics.

Selected Contents: 1. The Nature of the Field; General Rules of Research 2. The Stages of Research 3. Bibliography 4. Sources and How to Use Them 5. Book Reviews 6. Lexicography 7. Grammar 8. Linguistics 9. Textual Criticism 10. Literary Criticism 11. Oratory and Rhetoric 12. Philosophy 13. History 14. Archaeology 15. Papyrology 16. Numismatics 17. Mycenaean Studies 18. Sociology, Anthropology, Economics and Ecology 19. Ancient Religion 20. Ancient Science 21. Art History 22. Ancient Dance and Music 23. Law 24. The Classical Tradition 25. History of Classical Scholarship 26. Reconstructing the Ancient World 27. Translation September 2009: 234x156: 416pp Hb: 978-0-415-42522-3: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42523-0: £22.99 US $135.00

US $41.95

eBooks in History To find out more about our eBooks in History please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

HISTORY

LANGUAGE AND LINGUISTICS

NEW

American Women During World War II An Encyclopedia Edited by Doris Weatherford American Women During World War II relates in one volume the experiences of women of all races, social classes, and major ethnic groups who lived in the United States during the war era, including the periods directly before and after the actual conflict. Among the biographical entries are those of American women who served in the British armed forces prior to the creation of U.S. military units for women. Other biographical entries explicate the experience of American women caught in Japanese attacks on Asian cities that took place years before Pearl Harbor.

Similarly, some of women’s most unusual and precedent-setting activities occurred in the immediate postwar years. Many women, for instance, participated in the founding meetings of the United Nations, while others pioneered war-related areas such as the prosecution of war criminals in Europe.

The work documents the lives and stories of women who contributed directly to the war effort via official and semi-official military organizations, as well as the millions of women who worked in civilian defense industries, ranging from aircraft maintenance to munitions manufacturing and much more. It also illuminates how the war changed the lives of women in more traditional home front roles. All women had to cope with rationing of basic household goods, and most women volunteered in war-related programs. Other entries discuss institutional change, as the war affected every aspect of life, including as schools, hospitals, and even religion.

American Women During World War II provides a handy one-volume collection of information and images suitable for any public or professional library.

October 2009: 279x216: 576pp Hb: 978-0-415-99475-0: £90.00

The Routledge Handbook of Greek Mythology Based on H. J. Rose’s Handbook of Greek Mythology Edited by Robin Hard This new edition is a completely rewritten and revised version of Rose’s original, seminal, text.

Adding a huge amount of new material, Robin Hard incorporates the results of the latest research into his authoritative accounts of all the gods and heroes.

The narrative framework of the book includes helpful signposting so that the book can be used as work of reference, and alongside the narrative chapters, it includes full documentation of the ancient sources, maps, and genealogical tables.

Illustrated throughout with numerous photographs and line drawings, it will remain the definitive account of ancient Greek mythology for generations to come.

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Handbook of Multilingualism Edited by Marilyn Martin-Jones, Adrian Blackledge and Angela Creese The Routledge Handbook of Mulitlingualism provides a comprehensive survey of the field of multilingualism for a global readership and an overview of the research which situates multilingualism in its social, cultural and political context.

The Handbook includes an Introduction and five sections with thirty–two chapters by leading international contributors. The Introduction charts out the changing landscape of social and ethnographic research on multilingualism (theory, methods & research sites) and it foregrounds key contemporary debates.

Chapters are structured around sub-headings such as: Early developments, key issues related to theory and method, new research directions.

The Routledge Handbook of Multilingualism offers an authoritative guide to shifts over time in thinking about multilingualism as well as providing an overview of the range of contemporary themes, debates and research sites.

Selected Contents: 1. Sources for Greek Mythology 2. The Beginnings of Things 3. The Rise of Zeus and Revolts against his Rule 4. The Brothers and Sisters of Zeus 5. The Younger Olympian Gods and Goddesses 6. Lesser Deities and Nature Spirits 7. The Early History of the Inachids 8. The life of Herakles and the Return of the Heraklids 9. The Mythical History of Thebes 10. Legends of Crete and Athens 11. Jason and the Argonauts 12. The History of the Deukalionid Family 13. The Trojan War 14. The Return of the Greeks and the History of the Pelopids 15. The Atlantids and the Arcadian Family 16. Legends of Greek Lands 17. Aeneas, Romulus and the Origins of Rome Notes Bibliography Genealogical Tables

Selected Contents: Introduction. Part 1: Multilingualism: Nations, States and Citizenship Part 2: Multilingualism and Education Part 3: Multilingualism Within Other Institutional Sites Part 4: Multilingualism in Social and Cultural Change Part 5: Multilingualism: Situated Practices

2008: 246x174: 776pp Pb: 978-0-415-47890-8: £24.99

James Simpson

January 2011: 246x174: 496pp Hb: 978-0-415-49647-6: £95.00

US $170.00

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Handbook of Applied Linguistics

US $44.95

US $175.00

NEW

English Historical Documents 1558–1603 Edited by Ian W. Archer, Keble College, University of Oxford, UK and F. Douglas Price, late of Keble College, University of Oxford, UK Series: English Historical Documents Selected Contents: Part 1: The Making of the Regime Part 2: The Regime at Work Part 3: Society and Economy Part 4: Confessional Politics, 1572–88 Part 5: Elizabeth’s Second Reign, 1588–1603 December 2009: 234x156: 1,104pp Hb: 978-0-415-35097-6: £250.00

The Routledge Handbook of Applied Linguistics serves as an introduction and reference point to key areas in the dynamic field of applied linguistics. It is characterised by its scope, its broad relevance, its social engagement, and its authoritative yet straightforward chapters. For newcomers and established academics alike, it offers a readable and accessible overview of the field.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Descriptions of Language for Applied Linguistics Part 2: The Study of Language in Use: Evidence and Enquiry Part 3: Language, Culture and Identity Part 4: Language in Social Life: Problems, Puzzles, Questions Part 5: Language and Languages, English and Englishes Part 6: Language Learning, Language Education January 2011: 246x174: 624pp Hb: 978-0-415-49067-2: £95.00

US $170.00

US $450.00

To recommend any of these titles to your library please see centre of catalogue for the Library Recommendation form

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

23

24

LANGUAGE AND LINGUISTICS

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

NEW

World Englishes Handbook

The Routledge Handbook of Corpus Linguistics

3RD EDITION

Edited by Michael McCarthy and Anne O’Keeffe

Edited by Kirsten Malmkjaer

The Routledge Handbook of Corpus Linguistics brings together the leading figures in the field to produce a state-of-the-art overview of a significant area within applied linguistics.

The Linguisitcs Encyclopedia is a single-volume Encyclopedia covering all major and subsidiary areas of linguistics and applied linguistics. The seventy-nine articles provide in-depth coverage of the topics and sub-topics of the field, extensively cross-referenced so the reader can see how areas interrelate. Including a substantial introduction which provides a potted history of linguistics and suggestions for further reading, this is an indispensable reference tool for specialists and non-specialists alike.

Edited by Andy Kirkpatrick World Englishes is perhaps the most rapidly growing area of applied linguistics, on the back of the growth of English as a second or other language. This Handbook constitutes a comprehensive introduction to the field, including approximately thirty-two essays structured in the following six sections: Historical Perspectives, Newer Regional Varieties, Emerging Themes, Contemporary Functional Varieties, Debates and Pedagogical Implications and The Future. There is a substantial editor’s introduction and with a conclusion.

Among the themes covered here are the development of English as a lingua franca among speakers for whom English is a common but not first language, the parallel development of English as a medium of instruction in educational institutions throughout the world and the role of English as the international language of scholarship and scholarly publishing, as well as the development of ‘computer-mediated’ Englishes, including ‘cyberprose’.

Selected Contents: 1. Historical Context 2. Variational Contexts 3. Acculturation 4. Crossing Borders 5. Grammar Qars vs Standard 6. Ideology, Identity 7. WE and Globalization 8. WE and Applied Theory 9. Resources on WE June 2010: 246x174: 624pp Hb: 978-0-415-47039-1: £95.00

Corpus Linguistics, a rapidly growing area of applied linguistics, involves the electronic analysis of large bodies of text in order to demonstrate linguistic points and its influence is spreading fast. Increasingly, its no longer acceptable to make assumptions or statements about language without the back-up of corpus-based evidence. In recent years, Corpus Linguistics has been applied to a vast range of fields: applied linguistics, forensic linguistics, translation studies, computational linguistics, pragmatics, lexicography, discourse analysis, stylistics, and many more. In this Handbook, the editors capture as many of these as possible. The introduction covers the historical development of the area and its growing influence and application in many areas.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Building and Designing a Corpus 2. Analyzing a Corpus: What are the Basics? 3. Using a Corpus for Language Research: What Can a Corpus Tell us About Language? 4. Using a Corpus for Language Pedagogy 5. Using a Corpus and Corpus-based Materials in the Language Classroom 6. Using Corpora to Study Literature and Translation

US $170.00

June 2010: 246x174 Hb: 978-0-415-46489-5: £95.00

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Handbook of Forensic Linguistics

FORTHCOMING

Edited by Malcolm Coulthard and Alison Johnson Forensic Linguistics, an increasingly popular option with students, is the study of language and the law, covering topics from legal language and courtroom discourse to plagiarism. It looks at the linguist as expert providing evidence for the defence and prosecution, investigating areas from blackmail to trademarks and warning labels.

This Handbook includes a comprehensive introduction to the field written by the editors and approximately thirty essays, written by leading international experts and structured in three sections: core issues and topics, the linguist as expert and new debates and new directions.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Core Issues and Topics Section 2: The Linguist as Expert Section 3: New Debates and New Directions May 2010: 246x174: 384pp Hb: 978-0-415-46309-6: £95.00

US $170.00

This new edition includes ten completely new articles, introducing new areas like slang language and new technologies. Articles from the previous edition have also been thoroughly updated.

August 2009: 246x174: 704pp Hb: 978-0-415-42104-1: £125.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42432-5: £27.99

US $225.00

US $49.95

NEW

The Routledge Handbook of Multimodal Analysis Edited by Carey Jewitt, University of London, UK

The Indian Postcolonial A Critical Reader Edited by Elleke Boehmer, University of Oxford, UK and Rosinka Chaudhuri, University of Calcutta, India An invaluable resource for those working on postcolonial studies, Subaltern studies and Indian literature and culture, this critical reader brings together classic essays and newly commissioned pieces from leading experts in the field. Focussing on postcolonial issues through the lens of regional and cultural geography, the collection is divided into four comprehensive and thought-provoking sections on Literature, History, Politics and Culture.

June 2010: 234x156: 500pp Hb: 978-0-415-46747-6: £85.00

The Linguistics Encyclopedia

US $140.00

The Handbook offers a theoretical and methodological tool kit to support multimodal research including: chapters on key concepts, methodological issues, key factors, a range of theoretical approaches, multimodal case studies and an extensive glossary.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: What is Multimodality? Carey Jewitt 2. Multimodal Data Collection and Transcription Rosie Flewit and Regine Hampel 3. What is Mode? Gunther Kress 4. Materiality and Meaning: A Social Semiotic Approach Theo van Leeuwen 5. Multimodality and Language: A Retrospective and Prospective View Ron Scollon and Suzie Wong Scollon 6. Modal Density and Modal Configurations Sigrid Norris 7. Transduction and Transformation Pippa Stein 8. Multimodality, Identity, and Time Jay Lemke 9. Technology and Sites of Display Rodney Jones 10. Historical Changes in Semiotic Signs Kay O’Halloran 11. Conceptions of Literacy Len Unsworth 12. Culture and Multimodality Kevin Leander

US $170.00

July 2009: 246x174: 416pp Hb: 978-0-415-43437-9: £85.00

US $150.00

eBooks in Linguistics To find out more about our eBooks in Linguistics please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

LANGUAGE AND LINGUISTICS

MEDIA, CULTURAL STUDIES AND LITERATURE

Sociolinguistics Around the World

2ND EDITION

A Handbook

The World’s Major Languages

Edited by Martin J. Ball, University of Louisiana at Lafayette, USA

Edited by Bernard Comrie

This collection is a survey of current and recent research trends in sociolinguistics around the world. Divided into sections covering: The Americas, Asia, Europe, CIS, North Africa and the Middle East, Central & Southern Africa and Australasia, each chapter is authored by an internationally recognized scholar and survey sociolinguistic work in that country or group of countries. There is a diversity of research reported in the various chapters. Some chapters concentrate on traditional variationist sociolinguistics, whereas others report on the areas of bi- and multilingualism together with diglossia and code-switching, language and culture, language and power, and language planning.

Yet other research is concerned with the study of conversation/discourse and areas subsumed under the heading of pragmatics or discourse studies. There is a substantial editors’ introduction, further reading in the chapters and a comprehensive index.

July 2009: 246x174: 416pp Hb: 978-0-415-42278-9: £85.00

US $150.00

Handbook of Cognitive Linguistics and Second Language Acquisition Edited by Peter Robinson, Aoyama Gakuin University, Japan and Nick C. Ellis, University of Michigan, USA This cutting-edge volume describes the implications of Cognitive Linguistics for the study of second language acquisition (SLA). Chapters in the first two sections identify theoretical and empirical strands of Cognitive Linguistics, presenting them as a coherent whole.

Selected Contents: An Introduction to Cognitive Linguistics, Second Language Acquisition, and Language Instruction. Section 1: Cognitive Linguistics and Cognition. Aspects of Attention in Language. Prototypes in Cognitive Linguistics. Cognitive Grammar as a Basis for Language Instruction. Word Grammar, Cognitive Linguistics and Second Language Learning and Teaching. Spatial Language Learning and the Functional Geometric Framework. Language Without Grammar. Children’s First Language Acquistion from a Usage-based Perspective.

Construction Learning and SLA. Usage-based Grammar and SLA. Section 2: Cognitive Linguistics, SLA and L2 Instruction. Learning to Talk About Motion in a Foreign Language. Gestures and SLA. Conceptual Transfer and Meaning Extensions. A Unified Model. Usage-based and Form-focussed SLA: The Associative Learning of Constructions, Learned-attention and the Limited L2 Endstate. Corpus-based Methods in Analyzes of SLA Data. Teaching Construal: Cognitive Pedagogical Grammar. Cognitive Linguistics and Second Language Instruction. Conclusions: Cognitive Linguistics, SLA and L2 Instruction - Issues for Research.

2008: 229x152: 576pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5351-3: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5352-0: £35.99 eBook: 978-0-203-93856-0

FORTHCOMING

This volume features over fifty of the world’s languages and language families. The featured languages have been chosen based on the number of speakers, their role as official languages and their cultural and historical importance. Each language is looked at in depth, and the chapters provide information on both grammatical features and on salient features of the language’s history and cultural role. This second edition has been updated and revised. Two new languages, Amharic and Javanese, have been included. This accessible volume will appeal to anyone with an interest in linguistics.

Key features: • attention is paid to both grammatical and sociolinguistic features • attention is concentrated on the world’s major languages • designed to be accessible to all readers with an interest in language.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Indo-European Languages Philip Baldi 2. Germanic Languages John A. Hawkins 3. English Edward Finegan 4. German John A. Hawkins 5. Dutch Jan G. Kooij 6. Danish, Norwegian and Swedish Einar Haugen 7. Latin and the Italic Languages R. G. G. Coleman 8. Romance Languages John N. Green 9. French Linda R. Waugh and Monique Monville-Burston 10. Spanish John N. Green 11. Portuguese Stephen Parkinson 12. Italian Nigel Vincent 13. Rumanian Graham Mallinson 14. Slavonic Languages Bernard Comrie 15. Russian Bernard Comrie 16. Polish Gerald Stone 17. Czech and Slovak David Short 18. Serbo-Croat: Bosnian, Croatian, Montenegrin, Serbian Greville Corbett and Wayles Browne 19. Greek Brian D. Joseph 20. IndoAryan Languages George Cardona 21. Sanskrit George Cardona 22. Hindi-Urdu Yamuna Kachru 23. Bengali M. H. Klaiman 24. Iranian Languages J. R. Payne and Behrooz Mahmoodi-Bakhtiari 25. Persian Gernot L. Windfuhr 26. Pashto D. N. MacKenzie 27. Uralic Languages Robert Austerlitz 28. Hungarian Daniel Abondolo 29. Finnish Michael Branch 30. Turkish and the Turkic Languages Jaklin Kornfilt 31. Afroasiatic Languages Robert Hetzron 32. Semitic Languages Robert Hetzron and Alan S. Kaye 33. Arabic Alan S. Kaye 34. Hebrew Robert Hetzron and Alan S. Kaye 35. Amharic Grover Hudson 36. Hausa and the Chadic Languages Paul Newman 37. Tamil and the Dravidian Languages Sanford B. Steever 38. Tai Languages David Strecker 39. Thai Thomas John Hudak 40. Vietnamese Dinh-Hoà Nguy-n 41. Sino-Tibetan Languages Scott DeLancey 42. Chinese Charles N. Li and Sandra A. Thompson 43. Burmese Julian K. Wheatley 44. Japanese Masayoshi Shibatani 45. Korean Nam-Kil Kim 46. Austronesian Languages Ross Clark 47. MalayIndonesian Uri Tadmor 48. Javanese Michael P. Oakes 49. Tagalog Paul Schachter and Lawrence A. Reid 50. Niger-kordafian Languages Douglas Pulleyblank 51. Yoruba Douglas Pulleyblank, O. lanike. and O. la Orie 52. Swahili and Bantu Benji Wald 2008: 246x174: 928pp Hb: 978-0-415-35339-7: £100.00

25

Handbook of Comparative Communication Research Edited by Frank Esser and Thomas Hanitzsch Series: ICA Communication Series The Handbook of Comparative Communication Research aims at providing a comprehensive understanding of comparative communication research.

It fills an obvious gap in the literature and offers an extensive and interdisciplinary discussion of the general approach of comparative research, its prospect and problems as well as its applications in crucial sub-fields of communications. The first part of the volume charts the state of the art in the field; the second section introduces relevant areas of communication studies where the comparative approach has been successfully applied in recent years; the third part offers an analytical review of conceptual and methodological issues; and the last section proposes a roadmap for future research.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. Comparative Communication Research: Charting an Evolving Field Part 2: Domains of Comparative Communication Research 2. Political Communication 3. Organizational and Business Communication 4. Popular Communication 5. New Media and Computermediated Communication 6. Visual Communication 7. Development Communication 8. Interpersonal and Intercultural Communication 9. Language and Social Interaction 10. Health Communication 11. Gender and Communication Part 3: Central Fields in Comparative Communication Research 12. Media Systems 13. Media Policy and Governance 14. Media Markets 15. Media and Democracy 16. Journalistic Cultures 17. Journalistic Fields 18. Foreign and International News 19. European and National News 20. Election Campaign Communication 21. Public Relations 22. Identity and Popular Media 23. Entertainment and Emotions 24. Media Use and Reception 25. Media Effects Part 4: Conceptual and Methodological Issues 26. Status of Methodological Advancement 27. Comparative Designs 28. Securing Equivalence: Problems and Solutions 29. Cross-cultural Survey Research 30. Cross-Cultural Content Analysis 31. Cross-cultural Ethnography 32. Advanced Strategies of Data Analysis Part 5: The Future of Comparative Communication Research 33. Synthesis and Outlook: Building an Agenda for Comparative Communication Research March 2011: 254x178: 600pp Hb: 978-0-415-80271-0: £125.00 Pb: 978-0-415-80275-8: £40.00 US $80.00

US $200.00

US $175.00

US $69.95

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

US $250.00

26

MEDIA, CULTURAL STUDIES AND LITERATURE

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Companion to Literature and Science

Handbook of Communication Ethics

The Routledge Companion to Caribbean Literatures in English

Edited by Bruce Clarke, Texas Tech University, USA and Manuela Rossini, Swiss Academies of the Arts and Sciences, Switzerland There has long been friction and debate between the sciences and the humanities, culminating in the ‘two cultures debate’ in which scientist and novelist C. P. Snow declared the breakdown of communication between the ‘two cultures’. This triggered many responses and debates and has led to the suggestion of a ‘third culture’ which is the area in which the humanities and natural sciences in general, but more specifically literature and science interact, often now called the ‘posthumanities’.

Edited by George Cheney, Steve May and Debashish Munshi, University of Waikato, New Zealand Series: ICA Communication Series This Handbook will bridge ’explicit’ treatments of ethical issues in communication and ’implicit’ considerations of ethics, putting under one umbrella analyzes and applications that draw upon recognized ethical theories and those which, while they do not cite traditional ethical theorists, nevertheless engage important questions of power, equality, and justice.

Selected Contents: Part 1. Literatures and Sciences Part 2. Disciplinary and Theoretical Approaches Part 3. Cultures and Periods Part 4. Chronolgy of Literature and Science

Selected Contents: Introduction: Defining Our Terms-Communication Ethics, Communicating about Ethics, and Ethical Communication. Part 1: Theory Old and New Ethics and Communication in the Western Philosophical Tradition. Ethics, Rhetoric, and Discourse.

Ethics and Dialogue. Feminist Ethics and Communication.

Ethics, Power, and Authority. Ethics, Narrative, and Postmodernism. Postcolonial Explorations of Ethics.

Part 2: Contexts of Application and Theory Development Interpersonal Communication. Group Communication in Natural and Experimental Settings.

Organizational and Professional Communication.

Journalism. New Technology/Media. Advertising, Public Relations, Marketing, and Integrated Communications.

Visual Communication in Traditional and Digital Contexts.

Law. Politics. Health Communication. Science Communication. Intercultural Communication.

Part 3: Contemporary Issues Diversity, Multiculturalism, and Identity Politics. Peace, Nonviolence, Intervention, and Security. Democracy, Pluralism, Participation, and Global Governance. Religion, the State, and Secularism.

Environmental Sustainability and Justice. Economic (In)equality. Corporate Social Responsibility and Economic Governance. International Legal Frameworks, Trade and Communication Networks. Globalization and ’Localization’.

July 2010: 246x174: 560pp Hb: 978-0-415-49525-7: £85.00

August 2010: 229x152 Hb: 978-0-415-99464-4: £110.00

With over fifty newly commissioned essays from leading scholars The Routledge Companion to Literature and Science offers an overview of the history of these debates whilst tracing the interaction, reaction and conflict between the two disciplines. Divided into four main sections, part one looks at the ways in which different types of science are more closely related to different authors or types of literature from Artificial Intelligence to thermodynamics; part two provides a broad survey of the different theoretical and disciplinary approaches currently at work in the study of Science and Literature from agricultural sciences to theology; part three looks at specific cultures from around the globe and periods from the classical era to the present day; part four offers a chronology of key events in the history of literature and science.

This is the essential guide to anyone approaching this vibrant area of study.

US $140.00

Edited by Alison Donnell, University of Reading, UK and Michael Andrew Bucknor, University of the West Indies, Jamaica The Routledge Companion to Caribbean Literature offers a comprehensive and critically engaging overview of this increasingly important area of literature.

This volume is divided into four sections that provide an introduction and critical history of the field, discussions of key texts and a critical debate on major topics such as the nation, race, gender and migration.

In the final section contributors examine the material dissemination of Caribbean literature and point towards the new directions that Caribbean literature and criticism are taking.

This volume is an essential text, bringing together sixty essays representing three generations of Caribbean critics, from the foundational critics such as Baugh, Morris and Walcott to the emerging voices such as DeLoughrey, Puri and Scott. The volume’s interdisciplinary nature and clarity of writing will provide an excellent resource and springboard to further research for those working in literature and cultural studies, postcolonial and diaspora studies as well as Caribbean studies, history and geography.

September 2010: 246x174: 560pp Hb: 978-0-415-48577-7: £85.00 US $140.00

US $200.00

eBooks in Media, Cultural Studies and Literature To find out more about our eBooks in Media, Cultural Studies please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

To recommend any of these titles to your library please see centre of catalogue for the Library Recommendation form

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

MEDIA, LITERATURE AND CULTURAL STUDIES

NEW

NEW

NEW

The Routledge Companion to Science Fiction

Communication Yearbook 33

Sourcebook for Political Communication Research

Edited by Mark Bould, University of the West of England, UK, Andrew M. Butler, Canterbury Christ Church University, UK, Adam Roberts, Royal Holloway, University of London, UK and Sherryl Vint, Brock University, Canada

The Communication Yearbook annuals publish diverse, state-of-the-discipline literature reviews across the field of communication. Sponsored by the International Communication Association, volumes offer insightful descriptions of research as well as reflections on the implications of those findings for other areas of the discipline.

Editor Christina S. Beck presents a diverse, international selection of articles that highlight empirical and theoretical intersections in the communication discipline.

Series: Routledge Literature Companions ‘Well designed for reference, for serendipitous browsing, or for systematic study, The Routledge Companion to Science Fiction will be welcomed by novice and veteran scholars alike.’- Carl Freedman, Louisiana State University, USA The Routledge Companion to Science Fiction is a comprehensive overview of the history and study of science fiction. It outlines major writers, movements, and texts in the genre, established critical approaches and areas for future study. Fifty-six entries by a team of renowned international contributors are divided into four parts which look, in turn, at: • History – an integrated chronological narrative of the genre’s development • Theory – detailed accounts of major theoretical approaches including feminism, Marxism, psychoanalysis, cultural studies, postcolonialism, posthumanism and utopian studies • Issues and Challenges – anticipates future directions for study in areas as diverse as science studies, music, design, environmentalism, ethics and alterity • Subgenres – a prismatic view of the genre, tracing themes and developments within specific subgenres.

Bringing into dialogue the many perspectives on the genre The Routledge Companion to Science Fiction is essential reading for anyone interested in the history and the future of science fiction and the way it is taught and studied.

January 2009: 246x174: 576pp Hb: 978-0-415-45378-3: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45379-0: £21.99

US $150.00

US $39.95

Edited by Christina S. Beck

May 2009: 229x152: 456pp Hb: 978-0-415-99961-8: £80.00

US $150.00

NEW

Handbook of Spanish Language Media Alan Albarran, University of North Texas, USA With the rise of Spanish language media around the world, no reference work is available that provides an overview of the field or its emerging issues. The Handbook of Spanish Language Media is intended to fill that need. The goal is to establish a Handbook that will become the definitive source for scholars interested in this emerging field of study; not only to provide background knowledge of the various issues and topics relevant to Spanish Language media, but also to establish directions for future research in this rapidly growing area.

This volume is an edited compilation, drawing on the expertise of authors and collaborators throughout the globe. The Handbook consists of three main sections: • overview of Spanish Language Media • issues in Spanish Language Media • future directions in Spanish Language Media The work is an essential reference work for graduate students, professors, and media practitioners interested in Spanish Language Media, and is certain to influence the course of future research in this growing and increasing influential area.

July 2009: 254x178 Hb: 978-0-415-99044-8: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99101-8: £35.00

US $150.00

US $59.95

Methods, Measures, and Analytical Techniques Edited by Erik Bucy, Indiana University and R. Lance Holbert Series: LEA’s Communication Series The Sourcebook for Political Communication Research will offer scholars, students, researchers, and other interested readers a comprehensive source for state-of-the-art/field research methods, measures, and analytical techniques in the field of political communication.

Selected Contents: Introduction: Advancing Methods and Measurement in Political Communication Research Part 1: Survey Methodology 1. The Challenges and Benefits of Panel Designs 2. Strategies for Representative Web-Based Survey Designs 3. Problems with Probability Sampling and Response Rates: Cell Phone Use and Other Conundrums Part 2: Secondary Analysis and Meta Analysis in Political Communication 4. Reliability and Validity Issues Involved in Secondary Analyzes 5. Comparative Strengths and Weaknesses of ANES and NAES for Political Communication Scholarship 6. Advancing the Use of Meta-Analysis in Political Communication Research Part 3: Experimental Methods 7. Between Subjects and Repeated Measures Designs 8. Using the Web as a Tool for Experimental Research 9. Advancing the Study of Long-Term Experimental Effects Part 4: Content Analysis 10. Assessing Political Images and News Visuals 11. Framing Analysis in Political Communication Research: Issues and Opportunities 12. Advancements in Computerized Content Analysis Part 5: Discourse Analysis 13. Qualitative Focus Group Analysis 14. Linguistic Approaches to Discourse Analysis 15. Textual Analysis of Presidential Communication Part 6: Network and Deliberation Analyzes 16. Network Analysis in Political Communication 17. Online Deliberation Analysis 18. Levels of Analysis Issues in the Study of Political Communication Networks Part 7: Comparative Political Communication Methods 19. Advancing Comparative Political Communication Methods: A European Perspective 20. Advancing Comparative Political Communication Methods: An Asian Perspective 21. Methodological Issues Involved in Comparing Non-Democratic, Emerging Democratic, and Established Democratic States Part 8: Statistical Techniques 22. Structural Equation Modeling for Political Communication 23. Hierarchical Linear Modeling for Political Communication 24. Assessment of Mediation Models in Political Communication Part 9: Measurement Issues 25. Explication and Scale Construction in Political Communication Research 26. Physiological Measurement for Political Communication 27. Using Neuroscience and fMRI to Study Political Phenomena Conclusion: The Role of Method in Advancing Political Communication Research June 2009: 229x152: 456pp Hb: 978-0-415-96495-1: £43.99

US $70.00

For Handbooks in Religion and Sociology, see Page 51

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

27

28

MEDIA, LITERATURE AND CULTURAL STUDIES

NEW

NEW

Routledge Handbook of Applied Communication

2ND EDITION

Edited by Lawrence Frey, University of Colorado at Boulder, USA and Kenneth N. Cissna, University of South Florida, USA

Theory, Research, and Practice

Series: LEA’s Communication Series The Routledge Handbook of Applied Communication Research explores the significance of real-world communication concerns that people today are confronted with. Situations such as raising and educating children in families and schools, structuring work environments, and coping with and helping others to face significant illnesses are covered in the context of the applied communication discipline. Through this examination, it fully captures the crucial role of communication in creating better social worlds. It serves as a comprehensive guide to the applied communication research field, and will help both experienced scholars and those just starting out to understand and appreciate the discipline of applied communication research.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Foundations of Applied Communication Research 1. The Development of Applied Communication Research 2. Across Applied Divides: Great Debates of Applied Communication Scholarship 3. Practical Theory in Applied Communication Scholarship Part 2: Methods of Applied Communication Research 4. Using Quantitative Methods to Conduct Applied Communication Research 5. Rhetorical Methods of Applied Communication Scholarship 6. Ethnography in Applied Communication Research 7. Discourse Analysis: The Practice and Practical Value of Taping, Transcribing, and Analyzing Talk Part 3: Issues in Applied Communication Research 8. Positioning Gender as Fundamental in Applied Communication Research: Taking a Feminist Turn 9. Race as Political Identity: Problematic Issues for Applied Communication Research 10. Technology in/as Applied Communication Research 11. Managing a World of Problems: The Implications of Globalization for Applied Communication Research 12. Applied Communication Ethics: A Summary and Critique of the Research Literature Part 4: Contexts of Applied Communication Research 13. Family as Agency of Potential: Toward a Positive Ontology of Applied Family Communication Theory and Research 14. Organizational Communication and Applied Communication Research: Parallels, Intersections, Integration, and Engagement 15. In the Public Interest: Communication in Nonprofit Organizations 16. Health Communication as Applied Communication Inquiry 17. Communication in the Helping Professions 18. Aging and Applied Communication Research 19. Applied Political Communication Research 20. Applied Communication Research in Educational Contexts 21. Communication for Participatory Development: Dialogue, Action, and Change Part 5: Exemplary Programs of Applied Communication Research 22. Drug Resistance Strategies Project: Using Narrative Theory to Enhance Adolescents’ Communication Competence 23. Applied Research on Group Decision Support Systems: The Minnesota GDSS Project 24. Fear Appeals and Public Health: Managing Fear and Creating Hope 25. The Multiple Faces of the Public Dialogue Consortium: Scholars, Practitioners, and Dreamers of Better Social Worlds May 2009: 254x178: 688pp Hb: 978-0-8058-4983-7: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-4984-4: £39.99

The Global Public Relations Handbook, Expanded and Revised Edition Edited by Krishnamurthy Sriramesh, Nanyang Technological University, Singapore and Dejan Vercic Expanding on the theoretical framework for studying and practicing public relations around the world, The Global Public Relations Handbook, Expanded and Revised Edition extends the discussion in the first volume on the history, development, and current status of the public relations industry from a global perspective. This revised edition offers twenty new chapters in addition to the original contents. It includes fourteen additional country- or regionallyfocused chapters exploring public relations practice in Africa, Asia, Europe, and the Americas. Contributors use a theoretical framework to present information on the public relations industry in their countries and regions. They also focus on such factors as the status of public relations education in their respective countries and professionalism and ethics.

Each country-specific chapter includes a case study typifying public relations practice in that country. Additional new chapters discuss political economy, activism, international public relations, and United Nations public affairs.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Global Public Relations: Conceptual Framework 1. A Theoretical Framework for Global Public Relations Research and Practice 2. Political Economy and Public Relations 3. Culture and Public Relations 4. The Mass Media and Public Relations 5. Activism and Public Relations Section 2: Asia and Australasia 6. Public Relations in Australasia: Friendly Rivalry, Cultural Diversity and a Global Focus 7. An Overview of Public Relations in Japan and the ’Self-Correction’ Concept 8. Professionalism and Diversification: The Evolution of Public Relations in South Korea 9. Becoming Professionals: A Portrait of Public Relations in Singapore 10. Public Relations in Mainland China: An Adolescent With Growing Pains 11. Sharing the Transformation: Public Relations and the UAE Come of Age 12. Public Relations in Palestine: Inside and Out 13. The Israeli Public Relations Experience: Nation Building and Professional Values Section 3: Africa 14. The Nature and Status of Public Relations in Africa 15. Public Relations in Nigeria 16. The Status of Public Relations in Kenya 17. Public Relations in South Africa: From Rhetoric to Reality 18. Public Relations in Egypt: Practices and Obstacles Section 4: Europe 19. The United Kingdom: Advances in Practice in a Restless Kingdom 20. From ’Literary Bureaus’ to a Modern Profession: The Development and Current Structure of Public Relations in Germany 21. Public Relations in Norway: Communication in a Small Welfare State 22. Public Relations in the Polder: The Case of the Netherlands 23. Public Relations in Sweden: A Strong Presence, Increasing in Importance 24. Public Relations in Italy: Masters of Ceremony in a Relational Society 25. Public Relations in an Economy and Society in Transition: The Case of Poland 26. Public Relations in a Corporativist Country: The Case of Slovenia Dejan Vercic 27. Challenges of Revived Democracies: The Rise of Public Relations in Romania 28. A Hungarian Rhapsody: The Evolution and Current State of Hungarian Public Relations 29. The Development of Public Relations in Russia: A Geopolitical Approach Section 5: The Americas 30. Public Relations in the United States: A Generation of Maturation 31. A Different Country, A Different Public Relations: Canadian PR in the North American Context 32. Public Relations in México: From Amateurism to Professionalism 33. Overview of Public Relations in South America 34. Public Relations in Brazil: Practice and Education in a South American Context 35. Public Relations in Chile: Searching for Identity Amid Imported Models Section 6: International Public Relations: Key Dimensions and Actors 36. Transnational Public Relations by Foreign Governments 37. Public Relations of ’Movers and Shakers:’ Transnational Corporations 38. Non-Governmental Organizations and International Public Relations 39. Public Relations, Public Diplomacy, and Strategic Communication 40. Sustainable Development in Sub-Saharan Africa: A Communication Ethic for the Global Corporation 41. Managing Your Global Reputation: The Public Relations Agency 42. Public Information in the UNESCO: Progress Toward a Strategic Role 43. The United Nations Department of Public Information: Intractable Dilemmas and Fundamental Contradictions 44. The Missing Link: Multiculturalism and Public Relations Education January 2009: 254x178: 992pp Hb: 978-0-415-99513-9: £150.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99514-6: £45.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88937-4

US $300.00

US $90.00

US $200.00

US $79.95

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

MEDIA, LITERATURE AND CULTURAL STUDIES

NEW

The Routledge Companion to News and Journalism Studies Edited by Stuart Allan, Bournemouth University, UK The Routledge Companion to News and Journalism Studies is an authoritative, comprehensive treatment of the diverse forms of the news media, including newspapers, radio, television, news magazines, photojournalism, online news and beyond.

Entries are written by an outstanding team of international contributors and provide students and scholars of journalism studies and related disciplines with a critical, historically informed guide to news media and journalism studies.

Additional features include annotated further reading, a general introduction and section introductions by the editor and a comprehensive index.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. Mapping the Terrain: News and Journalism Studies Part 2: Histories 2. News and Public Sphere 3. Freedom of the Press 4. Professionalism 5. Agenda Setting and Gatekeeping 6. Objectivity 7. Impartiality 8. News Values 9. Journalism Ethics 10. Public Relations and Spin 11. 24-hour News Part 3: Institutions 12. The Journalistic Field 13. Quality or Broadsheet Press 14. Popular or Tabloid Press 15. News Agencies 16. Radio News 17. Television News 18. Magazine Journalism 19. Photojournalism 20. Online News 21. Alternative Journalisms Part 4: Newswork 22. Investigative Journalism 23. Election Journalism 24. Crime Reporting 25. Moral Panics and Scandals 26. Disasters 27. Environmental Journalism 28. Health and Science Journalism 29. Sports Journalism 30. Celebrity Journalism 31. War Reporting Part 5: Representations 32. Bias and News 33. News and Propaganda 34. Class 35. Racism 36. Islamophobia 37. Sexism 38. Homophobia 39. Nationalism 40. Protest and Social Movements 41. Fictional Representations of Journalists Part 6: Audiences 42. News, Citizenship and Public Opinion 43. Infotainment and ‘Dumbing Down’ 44. Local News and Community 45. Decoding News Ideologies 46. Emotion, Affect and News 47. Children and Traumatic News 48. News and the ‘iPod Generation’ 49. News Interactivity and Blogging 50. Watching Global News Events 51. Journalism and Public Memory Part 7: Challenges 52. News and the Network Society 53. Ownership and Control 54. Profitability versus Public Service 55. News and Distant Suffering 56. Peace Journalism 57. News on Demand: Convergence and Digitalization 58. Citizen Journalism 59. Rethinking Journalism Education 60. Globalising News and Journalism Studies November 2009: 246x174: 752pp Hb: 978-0-415-46529-8: £95.00

US $170.00

Handbook of Risk and Crisis Communication

The Handbook of Mass Media Ethics

Edited by Robert L. Heath, University of Houston, USA and H. Dan O’Hair, University of Oklahoma, USA

Edited by Lee Wilkins, University of Missouri, USA and Clifford G. Christians, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, USA

The Handbook of Risk and Crisis Communication explores the scope and purpose of risk, and its counterpart, crisis, to facilitate the understanding of these issues from conceptual and strategic perspectives. Recognizing that risk is a central feature of our daily lives, found in relationships, organizations, governments, the environment, and a wide variety of interactions, contributors to this volume explore such questions as ’What is likely to happen, to whom, and with what consequences?’ ’To what extent can science and vigilance prevent or mitigate negative outcomes?’ and ’What obligation do some segments of local, national, and global populations have to help other segments manage risks?’, shedding light on the issues in the quest for definitive answers.

The Handbook offers a broad approach to the study of risk and crisis as joint concerns. Chapters explore the reach of crisis and risk communication, define and examine key constructs, and parse the contexts of these vital areas. As a whole, the volume presents a comprehensive array of studies that highlight the standard principles and theories on both topics, serving as the largest effort to date focused on engaging risk communication discussions in a comprehensive manner.

With perspectives from psychology, sociology, anthropology, political science, economics, and communication, the Handbook of Risk and Crisis Communication enlarges the approach to defining and recognizing risk and how should it best be managed. It provides vital insights for all disciplines studying risk, including communication, public relations, business, and psychology, and will be required reading for scholars and researchers investigating risk and crisis in various contexts.

2008: 254x178: 720pp Pb: 978-0-8058-5778-8: £45.00

This Handbook encapsulates the intellectual history of mass media ethics over the past twenty-five years. Chapters serve as a summary of existing research and thinking in the field, as well as setting agenda items for future research.

Key features include: • up-to-date and comprehensive coverage of media ethics, one of the hottest topics in the media community • ’one-stop shopping’ for historical and current research in media ethics • experienced, top-tier editors, advisory board, and contributors.

It will be an essential reference on media ethics theory and research for scholars, graduate students, and researchers in media, mass communication, and journalism.

2008: 254x178: 416pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6191-4: £84.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6192-1: £35.00 eBook: 978-0-203-89304-3

The Concise New Makers of Modern Culture Edited by Justin Wintle A Who’s Who of Western Culture, from Woody Allen to Emile Zola...

Containing four hundred essay-style entries, and covering the period from 1850 to the present, The Concise New Makers of Modern Culture includes artists, writers, dramatists, architects, philosophers, anthropologists, scientists, sociologists, major political figures, composers, film-makers and many other culturally significant individuals and is thoroughly international

US $80.00

Handbook of Journalism Studies Edited by Karin Wahl-Jorgensen, Cardiff University, UK and Thomas Hanitzsch, University of Zurich, Switzerland Series: ICA Communication Series This Handbook charts the growing area of journalism studies, exploring the current state of theory and setting an agenda for future research in an international context. The volume is structured around theoretical and empirical approaches, and covers scholarship on news production and organizations; news content; journalism and society; and journalism in a global context.

2008: 254x178: 472pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6342-0: £125.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6343-7: £40.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87768-5 US $80.00

US $250.00

US $150.00

US $60.00

in its purview.

Next to Karl Marx is Bob Marley, with John Ruskin is Salman Rushdie, alongside Darwin is Luigi Dallapiccola, Deng Xiaoping rubs shoulders with Jacques Derrida as do Julia Kristeva and Kropotkin.

With its global reach, The Concise New Makers of Modern Culture provides a multi-voiced witness of the contemporary thinking world. The entries carry short bibliographies and there is thorough cross-referencing as well as an index of names and key terms.

2008: 246x174: 896pp Hb: 978-0-415-47782-6: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47783-3: £39.95 eBook: 978-0-203-88428-7

US $180.00

US $79.95

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

29

30

MEDIA, LITERATURE AND CULTURAL STUDIES

Handbook of Election News Coverage Around the World Edited by Jesper Strömbäck, Mid Sweden University, Sundsvall, Sweden and Lynda Lee Kaid, University of Florida, USA Series: ICA Communication Series The Handbook of Election Coverage Around the World focuses on the news coverage of national elections in democracies around the globe. It brings together and compares election news coverage within a single framework, offering a systematic consideration of various factors. Considering the prominence and power of the press in the election process, this volume will offer unique breadth in its global consideration of the topic.

2008: 254x178: 472pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6036-8: £120.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6037-5: £35.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88717-2

US $200.00

US $70.00

MUSIC AND PERFORMANCE

NEW

NEW

The Frantic Assembly Book of Devising Theatre

Tadeusz Kantor

Edited by Scott Graham and Steven Hoggett

Tadeusz Kantor was a key figure in European avant-garde theatre. He was a theoretician, director, innovator and painter famed for his very visual theatre style. Kantor was also known for his challenging theatrical innovations such as extending stages and the combination of mannequins with living actors.

Acclaimed by audiences and critics for their highly innovative and adventurous theatre, Frantic Assembly have created playful, intelligent and dynamic productions for over fourteen years. Written by artistic directors Scott Graham and Steven Hoggett, The Frantic Assembly Book of Devising Theatre is the first book to reflect on the history and practice of this remarkable company, and includes: • practical exercises • essays on film, music and physical theatre • inspiration for devising, writing and choreographing performance

Edited by Noel Witts

September 2009: 198x129: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-43486-7: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43487-4: £15.99 US$110.00

US $28.95

The Routledge Companion to Directors’ Shakespeare Edited by John Russell Brown

• suggestions for scene development

The Routledge Companion to Director’s Shakespeare is a major collaborative book about plays in performance. Thirty authoritative accounts describe in illuminating detail how some of theatre’s most talented directors have brought Shakespeare’s texts to the stage.

• an anthology of Frantic Assembly productions

Communication Yearbook 32

• an eight page colour section, and illustrations throughout.

Edited by Christina S. Beck

Accompanied by a companion website featuring clips of rehearsals and performances, this intimate and personal account offers an accessible, educational and indispensable introduction to the evolution and success of Frantic Assembly.

The Communication Yearbook annuals publish diverse, state-of-the-discipline literature reviews across the field of communication. Sponsored by the International Communication Association, volumes offer insightful descriptions of research as well as reflections on the implications of those findings for other areas of the discipline. Editor Christina S. Beck presents a diverse, international selection of articles that highlight empirical and theoretical intersections in the communication discipline.

2008: 229x152: 456pp Hb: 978-0-415-98859-9: £90.00

US $150.00

Selected Contents: Introduction. A Very Brief History of Frantic Assembly. The Book. What Devising Means to Us. Anthology of Work. Part 1: Documentation Frantic Essays. Scenes and Their Creation. Playing With Scenes Part 2: Practical Exercises Getting Started.

Suggestions for Constructive Warm-ups. Games - A Selection of Crowdpleasers. Choreography. Movement For Non- Dancers/Choreography That Doesn’t Feel Like Dance. New Physical Vocabulary/Restrictions And Freedom. Advanced Exercises - Pushing the Potential.

Devising with Words - Devising through Images. Textual Analysis. Getting Scenes on Their Feet. Physical Characters And Relationships. Some Things to Think About. Bibliography of Inspiration April 2009: 234x156: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-46536-6: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46760-5: £16.99

US$105.00

US $29.95

A must-have work of reference for students of both Shakespeare and theatre, this book presents some of the most acclaimed productions of the last hundred years in a variety of cultural and political contexts. Each entry describes a director’s own theatrical vision, and methods of rehearsal and production.

2008: 246x174: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-40044-2: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-93252-0

US $153.00

NEW

The Routledge Companion to Actors’ Shakespeare Edited by John Russell Brown April 2011: 246x174: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-48302-5: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48301-8: £19.99

US $120.00

US $35.95

eBooks in Music and Performance To find out more about our eBooks in Music and Performance please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

PHILOSOPHY

FORTHCOMING

NEW

NEW

The Routledge Companion to Philosophy and Music

The Routledge Companion to Philosophy of Psychology

The Routledge Companion to Nineteenth Century Philosophy

Edited by Andrew Kania, Trinity University, USA and Theodore Gracyk

Edited by John Symons, University of Texas, USA and Paco Calvo, University of Murcia, Spain

Edited by Dean Moyar, Johns Hopkins University, USA

Series: Routledge Companions

Series: Routledge Philosophy Companions

Series: Routledge Philosophy Companions

May 2010: 246x174 Hb: 978-0-415-48603-3: £95.00

The Routledge Companion to Philosophy of Psychology is an invaluable guide and reference source to the major topics, problems, concepts and debates in philosophy of psychology and is the first companion of its kind.

The nineteenth century is one of the most important periods in the history of philosophy. Characterised by philosophical change and diversity on a massive scale, it was also crucial in defining the early part of twentieth century intellectual thought. The Routledge Companion to Nineteenth Century Philosophy is an outstanding survey and assessment of the century as a whole.

Divided into six parts and including thirty-one chapters written by leading international scholars, the Companion examines and assesses the central topics, themes, and philosophers of the Nineteenth century, presenting the first comprehensive picture of the period in a single volume.

US $190.00

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Companion to Ethics Edited by John Skorupski, University of St. Andrews, UK Series: Routledge Philosophy Companions Selected Contents: Part 1: History 1. Ethical Thought in China 2. Ethical Thought in India 3. Plato and Socrates 4. Aristotle 5. Later Ancient Ethics 6. The Arabic Tradition 7. Mediaeval Ethics 8. Natural Law 9. Hobbes 10. Ethics and Reason 11. Ethics and Sentiment 12. Hume 13. Utilitarianism to Bentham 14. Kant 15. Hegel 16. Mill 17. Green, Bradley and Sidgwick 18. Nietzsche 19. Pragmatism (to Rorty) 20. Existentialism 21. Heidegger Part 2: Meta-ethics 22. Ethics, Religion, Science 23. ‘Open Question’ Arguments, Supervenience, Universalisability 24. Reasons for Action 25. Freedom and Responsibility 26. NonCognitivism 27. Realism 28. Relativism 29. Cognitivism without Realism 30. Error Theory and Fictionalism Part 3: Ideas and Methods from Outside Ethics 31. Social Anthropology 32. Psychology 33. Biology 34. Formal Methods in Ethics 35. Ethics and Law Part 4: Perspectives in Ethics 36. Reasons, Values and Morality 37. Consequentialism 38. Contemporary Kantian Ethics 39. Intuitionism [Moral pluralism] 40. Virtue Ethics 41. Contractualism 42. Contemporary Natural Law Theory 43. Feminist Ethics 44. Ethics and Aesthetics Part 5: Morality 45. Morality and its Critics 46. Conscience, Integrity 47. Moral Identity, Narrative 48. Recognition, Respect 49. Blame, Remorse, Mercy, Forgiveness 50. Evil 51. Responsibility: Intention and Consequence 52. Responsibility: Act and Omission 53. Partiality and Impartiality 54. Particularism and Principles Part 6: Debates in Ethics 55. The Ends of Life (Welfarism) 56. Ideals of Living (Perfectionism) 57. Rights 58. Justice and Punishment 59. Justice and Distribution 60. Life and Death 61. Beginning Life (the Ethics of Reproduction) 62. Ending Life 63. Population 64. Animals 65. Environment 66. The Ethics of Free Speech 67. The Ethics of Research 68. World Poverty 69. War 70. Terrorism and Torture February 2010: 246x174: 760pp Hb: 978-0-415-41362-6: £95.00

US $190.00

Selected Contents: Introduction Paco Calvo and John Symons Part 1: Historical Background 1. Rationalist Roots of Modern Psyhology Gary Hatfield 2. Empiricist Roots of Modern Psychology Raymond Martin 3. Origins of Experimental Psychology Alan Kim Part 2: The Status of Psychological Theories 4. Is Folk Psychology a Theory? Ian Ravenscroft 5. What is a Psyhological Explanation William Betchel and Cory Wright 6. The Interface Between Neuroscience and Psychology Valerie Hardcastle Part 3: Modeling the Mind: The Battle of the ‘isms’ 7. Behavourism David Braddon-Mitchell 8. Cognitivism Alan Garnham 9. Computational Functionalism Tom Polger 10. Connectionism Noel Sharkey 11. Dynamicism Gregor Schöner 12. Interactivism Mark Bickhard Part 4: Behavior, Development and the Brain 13. Conceptual Problems in Statistics, Testing and Experimentation David Danks 14. Imaging Technologies Geraint Rees 15. Neural Mehanisms Carl Craver 16. Cellular and Sub-cellular Neuroscience John Bickle 17. Evolutionary Models in Psychology Michael Wheeler 18. Development and Learning Aarre Laakso 19. Embodied Cognition and the Extended Mind Ken Aizawa and Fred Adams 20. Actiona and Mind Alfred Mele Part 5: Thought and Language 21. The Many Problems of Representation Zoltan Dienes 22. Naturalising Content Dan Ryder 23. Language and Thought Susan Schneider 24. Modularity Verena Gottschling 25. Nativism Richard Samuels 26. Non-human Minds and Languages Colin Allen 27. Mind Reading Joseph Cruz 28. Representation and the Brain Art Markman Part 6: Perception and Consciousness 29. Consciousness Timothy Bayne 30. Individuating the Senses Brian Keeley 31. Vision Patricia Churchland and John Jacobson 32. Color Jonathan Cohen 33. Audition Casey O’Callaghan 34. Attention Christopher Mole Part 7: The Inner World 35. Introspection Jordi Fernández 36. Memory Mark Rowland 37. Dreams John Sutton 38. Emotion Anthony Atkinson 39. The Unconscious/Freud Edward Erwin 40. Temporality Rick Grush Part 8: Psychology and the Self 41. Personal Identity Marya Schechtman 42. Emodiment in Schitzophrenia Giovanni Stanghellini 43. Confabulation William Hirstein 44. Aphasis Daniel Kolak 45. (Propositional) Imagination Shaun Nichols 46. Moral Judgements Jennifer Nado, Daniel Kelly and Stephen Stich 47. Buddhist Perspectives Owen Flanagan A Glossary for Philosophy of Psychology February 2009: 246x174: 700pp Hb: 978-0-415-39632-5: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87931-3

The Routledge Companion to Metaphysics The Routledge Companion to Metaphysics is an outstanding, comprehensive and accessible guide to the major themes, thinkers, and issues in metaphysics. The Companion features over fifty specially commissioned chapters from international scholars which are organized into three clear parts:

Selected Contents: Introduction Dean Moyar Part 1: German Idealism 1. Self-Consciousness, System, Dialectic Scott Jenkins 2. Philosophy of Mind/Epistemology Christoph Halbig 3. Philosophy of Nature Dieter Wandschneider 4. Moral Theory Allen Wood 5. Political Theory Dean Moyar 6. Aesthetics Rachel Zuckert Part 2: Philosophy as Politics 7. Young Hegelians Michael Quante 8. Tocqueville Jon Elster 9. Marx Tony Smith Part 3: Challenges to Rationality 10. Romantics (Novalis/Holderlin/Schlegels, etc.) Jane Kneller 11. Schopenhauer David Wellbery 12. Kierkegaard Merold Westphal 13. Nietzsche Ken Gemes 14. Bergson Keith Ansell-Pearson Part 4: Biology, Psychology, Value 15. Positivism Robert Scharff 16. Darwin’s Philosophical Impact Richard Richards 17. Philosophy of Race Robert Bernasconi 18. Experimental Psychology Gary Hatfield 19. Dilthey and the Neo-Kantians Rudolph Makkreel and Sebastian Luft Part 5: British Currents 20. Utilitarian Moral Thought Phillip Kitcher 21. Mill’s Theoretical Philosophy Fred Wilson 22. British Idealism – Practical Philosophy David Boucher 23. British Idealism: Theoretical Philosophy Stewart Candlish Part 6: American Contributions 24. Transcendentalism Steven Affeldt 25. C.S. Peirce Nathan Houser 26. William James Robert Burch 27. Josiah Royce David Schweikard Part 7: Mind and Logic 28. Logic Between Hegel and Frege Stephan Käufer 29. Franz Brentano Peter Simons 30. Gottlob Frege Kevin Klement 31. Edmund Husserl Christian Beyer October 2009: 246x174: 800pp Hb: 978-0-415-40450-1: £95.00

US $190.00

US $190.00

Each section features an introduction which places the range of essays in context, while an extensive glossary allows easy reference to key terms and definitions. The Routledge Companion to Metaphysics is essential reading for students of philosophy and anyone interested in surveying the central topics and problems in metaphysics from causation to vagueness and from Plato and Aristotle to the present-day.

April 2009: 246x174 (7x10) 632pp Hb:978-0-415-39631-8 £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49396-3 £24.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87930-6 US $190.00

• History of Metaphysics • Ontology

US $50.00

US $50.00

• Metaphysics and Science.

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

31

32

PHILOSOPHY

The Routledge Companion to Philosophy and Film

The Routledge Companion to Twentieth Century Philosophy

The Routledge Companion to Philosophy of Science

Edited by Paisley Livingston, Lingnan University, Hong Kong and Carl Plantinga, Calvin College, USA

Edited by Dermot Moran, University College Dublin, Ireland

Edited by Stathis Psillos, University of Athens, Greece and Martin Curd, Purdue University, USA

Series: Routledge Philosophy Companions Selected Contents: Part 1: Issues and Concepts 1. Acting Johannes Riis 2. Authorship Aaron Meskin 3. Censorship Susan Dwyer 4. Consciousness Murray Smith 5. Definition of ’Cinema’ Trevor Ponech 6. Depiction Robert Hopkins 7. Digital Cinema Berys Gaut 8. Emotion and Affect Carl Plantinga 9. Empathy and Character Engagement Amy Coplan 10. Ethics Folke Tersman 11. Film as Art Robert Stecker 12. Formalism Katherine Thomson-Jones 13. Gender Angela Curran and Carol Donelan 14. Genre Brian Laetz and Dominic McIver Lopes 15. Interpretation George Wilson 16. Medium Kevin Sweeney 17. Music Jeff Smith 18. Narration No’l Carroll 19. Narrative Closure No’l Carroll 20. Ontology David Davies 21. Race Dan Flory 22. Realism Andrew Kania 23. Spectatorship Carl Plantinga 24. Sound Giorgio Biancorosso 25. Style No’l Carroll 26. Violence Stephen Prince Part 2: Authors and Trends 27. Rudolph Arnheim Jinhee Choi 28. Walter Benjamin Stéphane Symons 29. David Bordwell Patrick Colm Hogan 30. Bertolt Brecht Angela Curran 31. No’l Carroll Jonathan Frome 32. Stanley Cavell William Rothman 33. Cognitive Theory David Bordwell 34. Gilles Deleuze Ronald Bogue 35. Sergei Eisenstein David Bordwell 36. Christian Metz Francesco Casetti 37. Jean Mitry Brian Lewis 38. Edgar Morin Dudley Andrew 39. Hugo Munsterberg Don Fredericksen 40. Phenomenology Vivian Sobchack 41. Psychoanalysis Richard Allen 42. Semiotics and Semiology Joseph Kickasola 43. Ludwig Wittgenstein Malcolm Turvey Part 3: Genres and Other Types 44. Dogme 95 Mette Hjort 45. Documentary Carl Plantinga 46. Horror Aaron Smuts 47. Pornography Susan Dwyer 48. Avant-garde Film Maureen Turim 49. Tragedy and Comedy Deborah Knight Part 4: Film as Philosophy 50. Film as Philosophy Thomas E. Wartenberg 51. Ingmar Bergman Paisley Livingston 52. Terrence Malick David Davies 53. Andrei Tarkovsky András Bálint Kovács 54. Why Be Moral? Christopher Falzon 55. Skepticism Richard Fumerton 56. Personal Identity Deborah Knight 57. Practical Wisdom and the Good Ground of Gettysburg Joseph Kupfer 58. The Five Obstructions Mette Hjort 59. Gattaca Neven Sesardic 60. Memento Andrew Kania 2008: 246x174: 704pp Hb: 978-0-415-77166-5: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87932-0

US $190.00

Series: Routledge Philosophy Companions

Series: Routledge Philosophy Companions

’It is hard to imagine a more useful, comprehensive or distinguished collection of essays on Western philosophy in the twentieth century. For anyone looking for an authoritative overview of the current state of the subject and its recent history this is where to find it.’ - Quassim Cassam, University of Cambridge, UK

’With a distinguished list of internationally renowned contributors, an excellent choice of topics in the field, and well-written, well-edited essays throughout, this compendium is an excellent resource. It will work well for any serious scholar inside or outside the field interested in the current state of philosophy of science. Highly recommended.’ - CHOICE

Featuring twenty-two chapters written by leading international scholars, this major publication covers all the key figures and movements from Frege to Derrida and philosophy of language to feminist philosophy.

Selected Contents: Introduction: Towards an Assessment of Twentieth-Century Philosophy Dermot Moran Part 1: Major Themes and Movements 1. The Birth of Analytic Philosophy Michael Potter 2. The Development of Analytic Philosophy: Wittgenstein and After Hans-Johann Glock 3. Hegelianism in the Twentieth Century Terry Pinkard 4. Kant in the Twentieth Century Robert Hanna 5. American Philosophy in the Twentieth Century James O’Shea 6. Naturalism Geert Keil 7. Feminism in Philosophy Andrea Nye Part 2: Logic, Language, Knowledge and Metaphysics 8. Philosophical Logic Mark Sainsbury 9. Philosophy of Language Jason Stanley 10. Metaphysics E. J. Lowe 11. Epistemology in the Twentieth Century Matthias Steup Part 3: Philosophy of Mind, Psychology and Science 12. Philosophy of Mind Sarah Patterson 13. Philosophy of Psychology Kelby Mason, Chandra Sekhar Sripada, Stephen Stich 14. Philosophy of Science Stathis Psillos Part 4: Phenomenology, Hermeneutics, Existentialism, and Critical Theory 15. Phenomenology Dan Zahavi 16. Twentieth-Century Hermeneutics Nicholas Davey 17. German Philosophy Karl-Otto Apel 18. Critical Theory Axel Honneth 19. French Philosophy in the Twentieth Century Gary Gutting Part 5: Politics, Ethics, Aesthetics 20. Twentieth-Century Moral Philosophy Rowland Stout 21. Twentieth-Century Political Philosophy Matt Matravers 22. Twentieth-Century Aesthetics Paul Guyer 2008: 246x174: 1,040pp Hb: 978-0-415-29936-7: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87936-8

US $165.00

This indispensable reference source and guide to the major themes, debates, problems and topics in philosophy of science contains fifty-six specially commissioned entries by a leading team of international contributors covering: Historical and Philosophical Contexts, Debates, Concepts and The Individual Sciences.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Historical and Philosophical Context 1. The Epistemology of Science after Quine 2. The History of Philosophy and Philosophy of Science 3. Metaphysics 4. Philosophy of Language 5. The Role of Logic in Philosophy of Science 6. Critical Rationalism 7. The Historical Turn in the Philosophy of Science 8. Logical Empiricism 9. Pragmatism and Science Part 2: Debates 10. Bayesianism 11. Confirmation 12. Empiricism 13. Essentialism and Natural Kinds 14. Ethics of Science 15. Experiment 16. Explanation 17. Feminist Approach to the Philosophy of Science 18. Inference to the Best Explanation 19. Laws of Nature 20. Naturalism 21. Realism/AntiRealism 22. Relativism about Science 23. Scientific Method 24. Social Studies of Science 25. The Structure of Theories 26. Theory-Change 27. Underdetermination 28. Values in Science Part 3: Concepts 29. Causation 30. Determinism 31. Evidence 32. Function 33. Idealization 34. Measurement 35. Mechanisms 36. Models 37. Observation 38. Prediction 39. Probability 40. Reduction 41. Representation in Science 42. Scientific Discovery 43. Space and Time 44. Symmetry 45. Truthlikeness 46. Unification 47. The Virtues of a Good Theory Part 4: The Individual Sciences 48. Biology 49. Chemistry 50.

Cognitive Science 51. Economics 52. Mathematics 53.

Physics 54. Psychology 55. Social Sciences Index Figures 2008: 246x174: 656pp Hb: 978-0-415-35403-5: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-00050-2

US $160.00

www.rep.routledge.com Routledge Encyclopedia of Philosophy Online is now available on a newly designed platform – Routledge Philosophy Online.

New content

eBooks in Philosophy To find out more about our eBooks in Philosophy please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

Also included are three other philosophy reference works not previously published online: • Routledge Companion to Aesthetics • Encyclopedia of Asian Philosophy • Companion to History of Modern Science

www.online.taylorandfrancis.com

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

online

PHILOSOPHY

POLITICS

History of Chinese Philosophy

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

Edited by Bo Mou, San Jose State University, USA

The European Union and Global Governance

A Handbook of Chinese International Relations

A Handbook

Edited by Shaun Breslin, University of Warwick, UK

Edited by Dr Jens-Uwe Wunderlich and David J. Bailey

This Handbook, comprising around twenty-five chapters provided by numerous experts in the field, will prove invaluable to students of international affairs, academics, researchers, businesspeople and policy analysts. Chapters will give up-do-date and unbiased information on the current state of Chinese international relations in historical perspective.

Series: Routledge History of World Philosophies The volume is a comprehensive and authoritative examination of the movements and thinkers that have shaped Chinese philosophy over the last three thousand years. An outstanding team of international contributors provide seventeen accessible entries organised into four clear parts.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Identity of Chinese Philosophy 1. Emergence of the History of Chinese Philosophy Part 2: Classical Chinese Philosophy (I): Pre-Han Period 2. The Ways of Thinking Cheng 3. Classical Confucianism (1): Confucius and the Lun-Yü 4. The Mohist School 5. School of Names 6. Classical Confucianism (2): Meng Zi and Xun Zi 7. Daoism (1): Lao Zi and the Dao-De-Jing Xiaogan Liu 8. Daoism (2): Zhuang Zi and the Zhuang-Zi Vincent Shen Part 3: Classical Chinese Philosophy (II): From Han Through Tang 9. Han Thought 10. Neo-Daoism 11. Chinese Buddhism Part 4: Classical Chinese Philosophy (III): From Song Through Early Qing 12. Song-Ming Neo-Confucianism (1): From Cheng Yi to Zhu Xi Shu-hsien Liu 13. Song-Ming Neo-Confucianism (2): From Lu Jiuyuan to Wang Yang-ming 14. Philosophical Development in Late Ming and Early Qing Chung-yi Cheng Part 5: Modern Chinese Philosophy: From Late Qing Through 21st Century 15. Enlightenment Movement: Introducing Western Thoughts and Early Engagement Attempts 16. Development of Dialectical Materialism in China 17. Modern Neo-Confucian Movement 18. Constructive Engagement of Chinese and Western Philosophy: A Contemporary Trend Towards World Philosophy Appendixes. Chronology of Philosophers. Note on Transcription. Index 2008: 246x174: 648pp Hb: 978-0-415-35688-6: £125.00 eBook: 978-0-203-00286-5

US $225.00

The European Union and Global Governance aims to analyse contemporary debates in European Studies in order to provide lessons for the development, design and normative evaluation of global governance. It brings together scholars of European studies and international relations, where much of the literature on regional and global governance is located, thereby providing interdisciplinary lessons from the study of European Union and its governance that can be used to re-evaluate processes of global governance. Each chapter examines methodological, theoretical or empirical discussions within European studies in order to draw insights for current developments in global governance.

January 2010: 246x174: 300pp Hb: 978-1-85743-509-2: £150.00

October 2009: 246x174: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-508-5: £150.00

US $300.00

US $300.00

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of US-Middle East Relations Edited by Robert Looney Divided into three sections, the Handbook of US-Middle East Relations provides a thorough and up-to-date overview of contemporary US-Middle East relations in historical perspective. With chapters contributed by leading experts in the field, this Handbook will be of use to academics, students and researchers in international relations, policy analysts, media professionals and government officials.

Part 1: Factors Affecting US Relations contains essays including Globalization, Energy Security, Wars and Revolution, Peace Processes, US Foreign Aid Policy to the Middle East, and US Relations with Islamic Groups in the Middle East.

Part 2: Perceptions of US Relations contains essays on how US policies are viewed, including The View from the Arab Street, The View from Palestine, The View from Pakistan and The View from Kurdistan.

Part 3: US Relations at the Country Level comprise essays detailing relations between the USA and countries and areas in the Middle East and North Africa, including Saudi Arabia, Egypt, Israel, Tunisia, Lebanon, Iran, Iraq, Libya, Algeria and Bahrain.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Overview of US-Middle East Relations 1. Introduction Robert Looney 2. Beyond Iraq: Lasting Issues for the US in the Middle East Larry Korb and Daniel de Wit 3. International Relations John Tirman 4. The US Foreign Aid Policy to the Middle East Hilton Root, Yan Li and Kanishka Balasuriy 5. US Relations with Islamic Groups in the Middle East Heather S. Gregg 6. Globalization as a Mediating Force in US-Middle East and North Africa Relations Anoushiravan Ehteshami 7. Nuclear Proliferation in the Persian Gulf and Middle East James Russell 8. War Dan Moran 9. The Middle East and US Energy Security Anas Alhajji 10. Peace Processes Stephen Zunes 11. US Relations with International Organizations Rodrigo Tavares 12. The Politics of Oil Anas Alhajji Part 2: Perceptions of US Relations 13. The View from the Arab Street Stephen Glain 14. The View from Palestine Naseer Aruri 15. The View from Jordan Adnan M. Hayajneh 16. The View from Pakistan Shahid Javed Burki 17. The View from Kurdistan Brendan O’Leary Part 3: US Relations at the Country Level North Africa - 18. The USA and Tunisia: Model of Stable Relations Yahia H. Zoubir 19. The USA and Algeria: Hostility, Pragmatism and Partnership Yahia H. Zoubir 20 The USA and Libya: The Lengthy Road to Reconciliation Yahia H. Zoubir 21. The USA and Morocco: the Longlasting Alliance Yahia H. Zoubir 22. US Relations with Egypt: an Overview Michael Dunn Levant – 23. Turkey and the USA Lenore G. Martin 24. American Foreign Policy in Lebanon Anne Marie Baylouny 25. US-Jordan Bilateral Relations Jomana Amara 26. The US-Israeli Hegemonic Project Leon Hadar Gulf - 27. Close Allies, Ambivalent Partners: the Role of the UAE in US Gulf Policy Christian Koch 28. Opting for the Lesser Evil: US Foreign Policy toward Iraq 1958-2008 Abbas Khadhim 29. US Relations with Qatar Jill Crystal 30. The Sultanate of Oman and the USA Joseph A. Kechichian 31. US-Saudi Diplomatic Relations: An Evolutionary Process David E. Long 32. Missed Opportunities and Political Blunders: The Tale of US-Iran Relations Manuchehr Dorraj and Hamid Zangeneh 33. Kuwait-US Relationship: A Small State Alliance with the Major Power Abduhhan Alshayji 34. Bahrain-US Relations Jeff Nugent 35. The USA and Yemen: A History of Unfulfilled Expectations Part 4: Epilogue Robert Looney July 2009: 246x174: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-499-6: £150.00

US $300.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

33

34

POLITICS

Handbook of Defence Politics

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

International and Comparative Perspectives

Routledge Handbook of American Foreign Policy

Routledge Handbook of Southeast Asian Politics

Edited by Steven W. Hook, Kent State University, USA and Christopher M. Jones, Northern Illinois University, USA

Edited by Richard Robison, Murdoch University, Australia

Edited by Isaiah ’Ike’ Wilson III and James J. F. Forrest This unique combination of analytically detailed essays with statistics, glossary, and comprehensive bibliography make this title a unique one-stop reference source as well as a training and education guide on the politics of defence worldwide. Introductory and concluding essays will be authored by the editors, to connect the overall conceptual framework with issues addressed in individual chapters.

2008: 246x174: 496pp Hb: 978-1-85743-443-9: £150.00

US $295.00

FORTHCOMING

Routledge Handbook of Central Asian Politics Edited by Reuel R. Hanks, Oklahoma State University, USA Written by experts on the region’s complex politics, this Handbook provides an in depth understanding of political issues in the five states of Central Asia. It is structured along the themes Security and Stability; Development of Political Institutions and National Integration; Issues in Political Economy and International Relations.

Selected Contents: Introduction. Security and Stability 1. The Politicization of Islam 2. The Status of Minority Populations and Interethnic Conflict 3. Border Issues Between Central Asian States 4. Water Resources and Stability. e.g Military Power and Capacity Development of Political Institutions and National Integration 1. Development of Institutions/Civil Society 2. Democratization of Political System 3. Construction of National Identity 4. Corruption, Patronage and Clan Politics 5. Role and Development of Media 6. Educational Reform Issues in Political Economy 1. Economic Development and Political Issues 2. The Drug Trade 3. Human Trafficking and the Status of Women 4. Internal and External Migration 5. Environmental Degradation 6. Infrastructure and Communications International Relations 1. Geopolitics and International Organizations 2. Relations with Russia 3. Relations with U.S. 4. Relations with South Asia (Afghanistan, Pakistan, India) 5. Relations with China 6. Relations with the EU 7. Geopolitics of Oil and Energy

No nation has maintained such an immense stature in world politics as the United States has since the Cold War’s end. In the wake of the 9/11 attacks, prompting the global war on terrorism and the U.S. invasion of Afghanistan and Iraq, along with American economic and ’soft power’ primacy, there has been increased interest in and scrutiny of American foreign policy. The Routledge Handbook of American Foreign Policy brings together leading experts in the field to examine current trends in the way scholars study the history and theories of American conduct in the world, analysis of state and non-state actors and their tools in conducting policy, and the dynamics of a variety of pressing transnational challenges facing the United States.

This volume provides a systematic overview of all aspects of American foreign policy and drives the agenda for further, cutting edge research. Contributors bring analytic depth and breadth to both the ways in which this subject is approached and the substance of policy formulation and process. The Handbook is an invaluable resource to students, researchers, scholars, and journalists trying to make sense of the broader debates in international relations.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Research Traditions 1. Foreign Policy Analysis Part 2: Historical Perspectives 2. Rise of American Power 3. Cold War 4. Post-Cold War Part 3: Theoretical Perspectives 5. Realism 6. Liberalism 7. Critical Theories 8. Constructivism 9. Institutional Analysis 10. Individual and Group Decision Making Part 4: State Actors 11. President 12. National Security Council 13. State Department 14. Defense Department 15. Intelligence Community 16. Foreign Economic Bureaucracy 17. Congress 18. Courts Part 5: Transnational Actors 19. Public Opinion 20. News Media 21. Interest Groups 22. Intergovernmental Organizations 23. Nongovernmental Organizations Part 6: Policy Instruments 24. Diplomacy 25. Use of Military Force 26. Economic Sanctions 27. Foreign Aid Part 7: Transnational Challenges 28. Weapons Proliferation 29. Counter-terrorism 30. Global Trade 31. Human Rights and Democracy Promotion 32. Environmental and Energy Security 33. Immigration 34. Shifts in the Balance of Power February 2011: 254x178: 576pp Hb: 978-0-415-80088-4: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87863-7

US $150.00

April 2010: 246x174: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-77676-9: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter US $190.00

The Routledge Handbook of Southeast Asian Politics provides a comprehensive analysis of the major themes, conflicts and ideas that have defined and shaped the politics of Southeast Asia in the modern period. The introductory chapter provides an overview of the different ways in which the complex and often turbulent politics of the region have been understood and explained.

This authoritative Handbook in both scope and quality engages the Southeast Asian experience firmly with larger debates about how modern political systems and modern states are formed and how countries and regions are drawn into the global system.

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Cold War Genesis of Politics in Southeast Asia 2. Comparisons of Different Post-colonial/Cold War Regimes 3. The Defeat of the Left and Liberal Politics Part 2: Political Regimes in the Post-Cold War period 4. Democracy, Decentralisation and Money Politics (Indonesia, Malaysia) 5. The Rise/Consolidation of Populist Democracies in Southeast Asia (Thaksin in Thailand) 6. One Party Democracies or the Rise of New Forms and Ideologies of Authoritarianism (Malaysia, Singapore) 7. Vietnam: The Reform of Politics and State as the Incubator of New Political Forces Part 3: The Politics of Markets and the Rise of Governance 8. Building the Regulatory State and the Politics of Governance 9. The Politics of Corruption 10. The Politics of Rule of Law 11. The Privatisation of Governance Part 4: Civil Society and Politics 12. Organized Labour, the Non-existence of Labour Parties and the Politics of the New Urban Poor 13. Social Movements and NGOs in the Politics of the Region 14. Human Rights Issues and Women’s Organisation 15. The Politics of Public Goods 16. Land as a New Big Political Issue in the Coming Decades and the Collision of State Officials, Private Capital and the Peasantry 17. Urbanization and the Role of Citizens and the Middle Classes in Influencing State Policy Authority Part 5: National States and Secular Authority under threat 18. The Role of Islam in Politics, Islamic Political Movements and Radical and Violent Islamic Movements 19. The War on Terror 20. Ethnic Armies, the Politics of Narcotics and Fractured States: the Case of Burma 21. Demands for Autonomy and Secession; Indonesia (Timor, Aceh, Papua) and Islamic Secession Movements (Thailand and the Philippines) 22. Resolving the Legacies of Violence and Conflict: The Case of Cambodia Part 6: Forging a Regional and Global Compact 23. Problems Across the Region: The Politics of Labour Migration and Cross-border Flows 24. The Politics of Trade 25. The Politics of Security and the Accommodation to Shifting Global Geo-politics 26. A Minnow in Two Spheres of Influence – Caught Between US and China Bibliography June 2011: 246x174: 356pp Hb: 978-0-415-49427-4: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter US $190.00

eBooks in Politics To find out more about our eBooks in Politics please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk For Handbooks in Asian Studies, see Page 2

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

35

POLITICS

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

Routledge Handbook of Ethnic Politics

Routledge Handbook of the IsraeliPalestinian Conflict

Routledge Handbook of Political Islam

Edited by Karl Cordell, University of Plymouth, UK and Stefan Wolff, University of Nottingham, UK

Edited by David Newman and Joel Peters, Virginia Tech University, USA

Edited by Shahram Akbarzadeh, University of Melbourne, Australia

From Europe to the United States and from the Middle East to Africa, ethnicity has become an increasingly important factor in political activity and organisation and a prime source of conflict.

This Handbook provides an overview of the most contentious and protracted political issue in the Middle East. The editors have gathered together a range of the top experts on the Palestinian-Israeli conflict. They tackle a range of topics from historical background, through to peace efforts, domestic politics, critical issues such as refugees and settler movements, and the role of outside players such as the Arab states, USA and EU.

This Handbook provides a multidisciplinary overview of one of the key political movements of our time.

Drawing on the expertise from some of the top scholars in the world it examines theoretical and historical backgrounds, terrorism, strategy, case studies of Islamist movements in the developing world and the West, and the relationship with democracy and gender issues.

Featuring contributions from an international team of experts, this Handbook provides a definitive global survey of the interaction of race, ethnicity, nationalism and politics. By examining the roots of national and ethnic identity, the sources of conflict and contemporary manifestations of racial hatred such as ethnic cleansing and genocide, the book delineates a variety of possible paths to reconciliation and conflict resolution.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Context and Key Concepts 1. The Origin of Modern Nations 2. The Origins of Nationalist Doctrine 3. Nationalism as an Ideology 4. The Nation-State 5. The Civic Nation-State 6. Ethnicity and the Nation-State 7. Stateless Nations in a World of Nation-States 8. Ethnicity and Race Part 2: Ethnicity and Conflict 9. Ethnicity as a Generator of Conflict: Dispelling Some Myths 10. Democracy & Democratisation 11. Ethnic Cleansing 12. Genocide 13. Preventing Ethnic Conflict 14. Managing and Settling Ethnic Conflicts 15. Judicial and Semi-Judicial Approaches to Conflict Resolution 16. Post-conflict Reconstruction in Ethnically Divided Societies Part 3: Accommodation and Conciliation 17. Bridging the Gaps: The Role of Civil Society 18. Human Rights and Ethnopolitics 19. The Role of Treaties and Formal Post-Conflict Agreements 20. CrossBorder Co-operation 21. Multi-national Frameworks 22. Territorial Models 23. Ethnic Accommodation in Unitary States 24. Cultural Autonomy 25. Power Sharing 26. Integration 27. Assimilation Strategies 28. Playing the Ethnic Card: Liberal Democratic and Authoritarian Practices Compared 29. Conclusion March 2010: 246x189: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-47625-6: £95.00

Selected Contents: Introduction - Israel and the Palestinians: One Land Two Peoples Part 1: Origins and Background 1. Palestinian Nationalism 2. Zionism Part 2: History of Conflict 3. 1948 War: Origins and Consequences 4. 1967 War: Origins and Consequences 5. Israel and the Occupied Territories 1967-93 6. The Palestinian Intifadah Part 3: Seeking Peace 7. International Efforts: 1967-1993 8. The Oslo Accords 9. The Oslo Process 10. The Camp David Summit 11. Track II Diplomacy 12. International Efforts: 2001-2008: From the Road Map to Annapolis Part 4: Domestic Politics and Actors 13. Israeli 14. The Israeli Settler Movement 15. Palestinian Citizens of Israel 16. Palestinian Politics 17. The PLO 18. Hamas Part 5: Critical Issues 19. Refugees 20. Jerusalem 21. Borders and Territory 22. Water 23. Settlements 24. Disengagement, Separation and Israeli Security Barrier 25. Terrorism Part 6: International and Regional Involvement 26. United States 27. Europe 28. The Arab World 29. International Donor Assistance 30. International Invention and Peacekeeping.

Conclusion: Prospects for Peace and the Two State Solution June 2010: 234x156: 424pp Hb: 978-0-415-77862-6: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Ideological Basis 2. The Relevance of Medieval Muslim Scholars 3. Political Thoughts of Seyyed Qutb 4. The Islamic State in the Writings of Muwlana Ma’dudi Part 2: Movements 5. Muslim Brotherhood 6. Hamas’ Flirtation with Electoral Law 7. The Iranian Islamic Revolution 8. Hizbullah and Lebanese Nationalism 9. Hizb ut-Tahrir 10. Emergence of Political Islam in Central Asia Part 3: Political Power 11. Preserving Muslim Identity Under Secular Rule in Turkey 12.

Merging Islam and Democracy in Iran? 13. Limits of Islamic Legitimacy in Saudi Arabia 14. Islamic Radicalism in Indonesia Part 4: International Aspects 15. The Significance of the Arab Israeli Conflict 16. Mobilization Against the United States 17. Johad and the Worldview of Civilizational Conflict 18. Al-Qaeda as a Terrorist Organization Part 5: Muslim Diaspora 19. The Challenge of Muslim Integration in the West 20. Radicalism in the United Kingdom 21. Submitting to Secular Rule 22. Islamic Education as Incubator of Radicalism? Part 6: Social Issues 23. Response to “Westoxification” in Muslim Societies 24. Attitude on Women and their Social Role June 2010: 234x156: 424pp Hb: 978-0-415-48473-2: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter US $155.00

US $155.00

The Routledge Politics and International Relations Resource – Routledge Reference Resources Online

US $190.00

www.reference.routledge.com The Routledge Politics and International Relations Resource is a cross-searchable online subject library that includes thirty reference essentials that have won critical accolades and places on the best reference lists, with new works and updates added every year.

Email reference@routledge.com to order your free trial today!

The Armed Conflict Database

www.online.taylorandfrancis.com

From the International Institute for Strategic Studies

www.iiss.org/acd The IISS Armed Conflict Database is an authoritative and unique online source of data and independent analysis on current and recent conflicts.

Email reference@routledge.com to order your free trial today!

www.online.taylorandfrancis.com online

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

online

36

POLITICS

NEW

NEW

NEW

Routledge Handbook of International Political Economy (IPE)

Handbook of Security Studies

Handbook of New Security Studies

Edited by Victor Mauer, Center for Security Studies, Swiss Federal Institute of Technology (ETH), Zürich, Switzerland and Myriam Dunn Cavelty, Swiss Federal Institute of Technology (ETH), Zürich, Switzerland

Edited by J. Peter Burgess, PRIO, Oslo, Norway

IPE as a global conversation Edited by Mark Blyth, Johns Hopkins University, USA The study of the International Political Economy (IPE), like the IPE itself, is plural and unbounded.

Despite what partisan’s sometimes say, rather than there being ‘one way’ of studying the IPE that is the ‘right way’, we find across the world great variation in IPE scholarship in terms of focus, questions, and methods. How then can we make sense of this and understand the field as a whole rather than simply learn one part of it?

This Handbook is designed to address precisely this concern.

It maps the shifting boundaries and diverse theoretical commitments of IPE around the world. It engages the geographical and theoretical diversity of the different versions of IPE found in North America, the UK, in Asia and Australia; and notes the absences of distinctive versions of IPE in Europe and Latin America. The volume groups together the essential attributes and positions of each school, inviting the reader to engage with and learn about IPE in all of its guises through this evolving ‘global conversation.’ Rather than adjudicate ‘the one true version’ of IPE, it argues that the intellectual diversity we see around the world is an essential, and positive, feature of the field.

With over twenty contributors from a wide range of countries Routledge Handbook of International Political Economy is an essential resource for all those with an interest in this complex and rapidly evolving field of study.

Selected Contents: Introduction: IPE as a Global Conversation Mark Blyth Section 1. North American IPE 1. The Multiple Traditions of American IPE Benjamin J. Cohen 2. Realist Political Economy: Traditional Themes and Contemporary Challenges Jonathan Kirshner 3. Thinking Rationally about Hierarchy and Global Governance Alexander Cooley 4. Constructivism as an Approach to International Political Economy Rawi Abdelal 5. Of Margins, Traditions and Engagements: A Brief Disciplinary History of IPE in Canada Randall Germain Section 2. British IPE 6. Lineages of a British International Political Economy Ben Rosamond and Ben Clift 7. Empiricism and Objectivity: Reflexive Theory Construction in a Complex World Ronen Palan and Angus Cameron 8. Power-Knowledge Estranged: From Susan Strange to Post-structuralism in British IPE Paul Langley 9. Bridging the Transatlantic Divide? Toward a Structurational Approach to International Political Economy Philip G. Cerny Section 3. IPE in Asia 10. Reading Hobbes in Beijing: Great Power Politics and the Challenge of the Peaceful Ascent Giovanni Arrighi 11. States and Markets, States versus Markets: The Developmental State Debate as the Distinctive East Asian Contribution to International Political Economy Walden Bello 12. The Rise of East-Asia: An Emerging Challenge to the Study of International Political Economy Henry Yeung 13. Neither Asia nor America: IPE in Australia Jason Sharman Section 4. IPE Elswhere - Exemptions, Exclusions, and Extensions 14. Why IPE is Underdeveloped in Europe: A Case Study of France Nicolas Jabko 15. Why Did the Latin American Critical Tradition in the Social Sciences Become Practically Extinct? Gabriel Palma 16. What Do Sociologists Bring to International Political Economy John Campbell 17. Economic History and the International Political Economy Michael J. Oliver 18. Everyday International Political Economy Leonard Seabrooke and John Hobson

The Handbook of Security Studies is a comprehensive collection of cutting-edge essays on all aspects of this subject by a mix of established and up-and-coming international scholars.

Selected Contents: Introduction Myriam Dunn Cavelty and Victor Mauer Part 1: Theoretical Approaches to Security 1. Classical, Offensive and Defensive (Neo-) Realism William Wohlforth 2. Liberalism 3. Critical Security Studies David Mutimer 4. Constructivism and Securitization Thierry Balzacq 5. Feminist Security Studies Annick Wibben 6. Post-Structuralism Claudia Aradau 7. English School Barry Buzan Part 2: Different ’Securities’ 8. Human Security Pauline Kerr 9. Societal Security Tobias Theiler 10. Homeland Security Jane Bullock 11. Non-Western Regional Security Concerns Brian Job 12. National Security, Culture, and Identity Iver B. Neumann Part 3: Contemporary Security Challenges 13. Old and New Wars (Civil Wars) 14. Terrorism Louise Richardson 15. Privatization of Security Sarah Percy 16. Weapons of Mass Destruction and the Challenge of Proliferation James W. Wirtz 17. State Failure, State Building and New Forms of Statehood Tobias Debiel and Daniel Lambach 18. Migration/Immigration Jeff Huysmans and Vickie Squire 19. Organized Crime, Drugs, Human Trafficking Phil Williams 20. Energy Security Robert Orttung and Jeronim Perovic 21. Environmental Risks and Security Nils Petter Gleditsch 22. Bio-risks (Bio-terrorism) and Biodefense Barry Kellman 23. Pandemic and Global Health Colleen O’Manique and Pieter Fourie 24. Cyberthreats Myriam Dunn Part 4: Regional Security Challenges 25. China’s Rise 26. Korean Peninsula Scott Snyder 27. India Sumit Ganguly 28. Russia’s Revival Jeffrey Mankoff 29. Middle East Martin Beck 30. Iran 31. Iraq Gareth Stansfield 32. Afghanistan 33. Pakistan 34. Israeli-Palestinian Conflict 35. Horn of Africa Jennifer G. Cooke 36. The Balkans Richard Caplan 37. European Security Victor Mauer Part 5: Confronting Security Challenges 8. Global Governance Tom Biersteker 39. Alliances Carlo Masala 40. Coercive Diplomacy Bruce W. Jentleson 41. Deterrence Richard Ned Lebow 42. Crisis Management Arjen Boin 43. Humanitarian Intervention Alex Bellamy 44. Peace Operations Oliver Ramsbotham September 2009: 246x174: 528pp Hb: 978-0-415-46361-4: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter

This new Handbook gathers together state-of-the-art theoretical reflection and empirical research by leading international scholars into the subdiscipline of Critical Security Studies.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction J. Peter Burgess Part 1: New Security Concepts 2. Civilizational Security Brett Bowden 3. Risk Oliver Kessler 4. Small Arms Keith Krause 5. Critical Human Security Taylor Owen 6. Visuality and Security Michael Shapiro 7. Critical Geopolitics Simon Dalby Part 2: New Security Subjects 8. Biopolitics Michael Dillon 9. Gendered Security Laura Shepherd 10. Identity Security Pinar Bilgin 11. Security as Ethics Anthony Burke 12. Security/Media James Der Derian Part 3: New Security Objects 13. Environmental Security Jon Barnett 14. Food Security Rachel Slater and Steve Wiggins 15. Energy Security Roland Dannreuther 16. Financial Security Marieke de Goede 17. Cyber Security Markus Jakobsson 18. Pandemic Security Stephan Elbe 19. Biosecurity Frida Kuhlau Part 4: New Security Practices 20. Surveillance Mark Salter 21. Urban Insecurity David F. J. Wood 22. Privatization of Security Anna Leander 23. Migration William Walters 24. Security Technologies Julien Jeandesboz 25. Designing Security Cynthia Weber and Mark Lacy 26. New Mobile Crime Monica den Boer September 2009: 246x174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-48437-4: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter US $155.00

Routledge Handbook of Religion and Politics Edited by Jeff Haynes, London Metropolitan University, UK From the United States to the Middle East, Asia and Africa, religion has become an increasingly important factor in political activity and organisation. This Handbook provides a definitive global survey of the interaction of religion and politics.Featuring contributions from an international team of experts, it examines the political aspects of all the world’s major religions, including such crucial contemporary issues as religious fundamentalism, terrorism, the war on terror, the ‘clash of civilizations’ and science and religion.

Four main themes addressed include: • the world religions and politics • religion and governance

US $155.00

• religion and international relations • religion, security and development.

2008: 246x174: 448pp Hb: 978-0-415-41455-5: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-89054-7

US $155.00

February 2009: 246x174: 392pp Hb: 978-0-415-77126-9: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter US $190.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

POLITICS

NEW

NEW

Handbook of Asian Security Studies

Handbook of Terrorism Research

Edited by Sumit Ganguly, Indiana University, USA, Andrew Scobell and Joseph Liow, Nanyang Technological University, Singapore

Research, Theories and Concepts

This Handbook provides a detailed exploration of security dynamics in the three distinct subregions that comprise Asia, and also bridges the study of these regions by exploring the geopolitical interstices that link each of them.

Selected Contents: Part 1: South East Asia 1. Islamist Violence in Southeast Asia 2. Internal Conflicts in Southeast Asia 3. ASEAN and Regional Security 4. Maritime Security in Southeast Asia 5. Great Power Politics and Southeast Asian Security 6. The Future of Burma/Myanmar 7. Intra-ASEAN Tensions Part 2: East Asia 8. China’s Rise: How Peaceful? 9. Japan’s Security Future 10. The Security of the Korean Peninsula 11. The Taiwan Issue 12. The Tibetan Question 13. The Shanghai Cooperation Organization and Its Implications for Regional Security Part 3: South Asia 14. The IndoPakistani Conflict and Kashmir 15. Pakistan’s Strategic Future 16. The Sino-Indian Rivalry 17. Insurgency, Instability and the Quest for Security in Afghanistan 18. The Sri Lankan Civil War 19. Nuclear Weapons and Crisis Stability in South Asia Part 4: Cross Regional Issues 20. The Nuclear Question in Asia 21. Great Power Rivalry in Asia 22. Maritime Rivalry in Asia 23. Space Rivalry in Asia 24. The ASEAN Regional Forum September 2009: 246x174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-77781-0: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter

Edited by Alex Schmid, United Nations, Terrorism Prevention Branch, Albert Jongman, Ministry of Defence, the Netherlands and Eric Price, International Atomic Energy Agency, Vienna, Austria This book is a new edition of the most comprehensive existing reference book on political terrorism, previously published to great acclaim in 1984. It is a monumental collection of definitions, conceptual frameworks, paradigmatic formulations, and bibliographic sources, which has been revised and updated as a resource for the expanding community of researchers on the subject of terrorism.

This Handbook surpasses the previous edition in both scope and importance.

Handbook of Terrorism Research will be essential reading for all students of terrorism, political science and security studies, as well as policy makers and professionals in the security field.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Terrorism and Related Concepts 2. Theories 3. Data and Databases on Domestic and International Terrorism 4. Literature of Terrorism 5. Bibliography of Political Terrorism 6. World Directory of Terrorist Organizations 7. Glossary October 2009: 246x174: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-41157-8: £95.00 before publication; £110.00 thereafter US $155.00

US $155.00

Routledge Handbook of Internet Politics Edited by Andrew Chadwick, Royal Holloway, University of London, UK and Philip N. Howard, University of Washington, USA A comprehensive set of resources, this Handbook provides linkages to established theories of media and politics, political communication, governance, deliberative democracy and social movements, all within an interdisciplinary context. Containing the latest survey data, the contributors form a strong international cast of established and junior scholars.

2008: 246x174: 528pp Hb: 978-0-415-42914-6: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-96254-1

Routledge Handbook of Political Management Dennis W. Johnson, George Washington University, USA A comprehensive overview of the field of applied politics, encompassing political consulting, campaigns and elections, lobbying and advocacy, grass roots politics, fundraising, media and political communications, the role of the parties, political leadership, and the ethical dimensions of public life.

2008: 254x178: 656pp Hb: 978-0-415-96225-4: £115.00

US $175.00

US $155.00

Europa World and the Europa Regional Surveys of the World

Routledge Handbook of Public Diplomacy Edited by Nancy Snow, Syracuse University, New York, USA and Philip M. Taylor, University of Leeds, UK This Handbook provides a comprehensive overview of public diplomacy and national image and perception management, from the efforts to foster pro-West sentiment during the Cold War to the post-9/11 campaign to ’win the hearts and minds’ of the Muslim world.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Rethinking Public Diplomacy Nancy Snow 2. Public Diplomacy and Strategic Communication Philip M. Taylor Part 1: The Context of Public Diplomacy 3. Public Diplomacy: The Evolution of a Phrase Nick Cull 4. Public Diplomacy as Loss of World Authority Michael Vlahos 5. Public Opinion and Power Ali Wyne 6. Exchange Programs and Public Diplomacy Giles Scott-Smith 7. Arts Diplomacy: The Neglected Aspect of Cultural Diplomacy John Brown Part 2: Public Diplomacy Applications 8. Operationalizing Public Diplomacy Matt Armstrong 9. Between ‘Take-offs’ and ‘Crash Landings’: Situational Aspects of Public Diplomacy John Robert Kelley 10. Mapping Out a Spectrum of Public Diplomacy Initiatives: Informational and Relational Frameworks R. S. Zaharna 11. The Nexus of U.S. Public Diplomacy and Citizen Diplomacy Sherry Mueller Part 3: Public Diplomacy Management: Image, Influence and Persuasion 12. Public Diplomacy in International Conflicts: A Social Influence Analysis Anthony Pratkanis 13. Credibility and Public Diplomacy Robert Gass and John Seiter 14. The Culture Variable in the Influence Equation Kelton Rhoads 15. Military Psychological Operations as Public Diplomacy Mark Kilbane Part 4: State and Non-State Actors in Public Diplomacy 16. American Business and Its Role in Public Diplomacy Keith Reinhard 17. The Public Diplomat: A First Person Account Peter Kovach 18. The Case for Localized Public Diplomacy William P. Kiehl 19. The Distinction Between Public Affairs and Public Diplomacy Ken S. Heller and Liza M. Persson 20. Valuing Exchange of Persons in Public Diplomacy Nancy Snow Part 5: Global Approaches to Public Diplomacy 21. Four Seasons in One Day: The Crowded House of Public Diplomacy in the UK Ali Fisher 22. German Public Diplomacy: The Dialogue of Cultures Oliver Zoellner 23. Origin and Development of Japan’s Public Diplomacy Tadashi Ogawa 24. China Talks Back: Public Diplomacy and Soft Power for the Chinese Century Gary Rawnsley 25. Central and Eastern European Public Diplomacy: A Transitional Perspective on National Reputation Management Gyorgy Szondi 26. Australian Public Diplomacy Naren Chitty Part 6: Advancing Public Diplomacy Studies 27. How Globalization Became U.S. Public Diplomacy at the End of the Cold War Joseph Duffey 28. Ethics and Social Issues in Public Diplomacy Richard Nelson and Foad Izadi 29. Noopolitik: A New Paradigm for Public Diplomacy David Ronfeldt and John Arquilla 2008: 254x178: 408pp Hb: 978-0-415-95301-6: £115.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95302-3: £36.99 eBook: 978-0-203-89152-0 US $52.95

www.europaworld.com An interactive online library for all of the countries and territories of each of the world regions.

• Impartial coverage of issues of regional importance from acknowledged experts • A vast range of up-to-date economic, political and statistical data • Book and periodical bibliographies – direct you to further research

Email reference@routledge.com to order your free trial today!

www.online.taylorandfrancis.com

online

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

US $175.00

37

38

POLITICS

PSYCHOLOGY

NEW

Routledge Handbook of International Law Edited by David Armstrong, University of Exeter, UK This Handbook provides a definitive global survey of the interaction of international politics and international law.

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Nature of International Law 1. Is International Law Really Law? 2. The Sources of International Law 3. ‘Hard’ and ‘Soft’ Law in International Relations 4. Compliance Issues 5. International Law and International Society 6. Legal and Moral Norms in International Society 7. The Effectiveness of International Law 8. Theories of International Law 9. The Practice of International Law Part 2: The Evolution of International Law 10. The Classical World 11. The Era of Grotius 12. Nineteenth Century Positivism 13. Normative Change in International Society 14. Religion(s) and International Law 15. The ‘Legalization’ and ‘Institutionalisation’ of International Relations 16. Globalisation and Claims that we are Moving Towards a Cosmopolitan Rather than Inter-State Legal Community 17. The Increasing Role of Non-State Actors Part 3: Law and Power in International Society 18. Does Law Reflect or Constrain Power?

19. Law and Force in the Twenty First Century 20.

American Hegemony and International Law (i) Pro 21. American Hegemony and International Law (ii) Anti 22. The Iraq War 23. Humanitarian Intervention Part 4: Key Issues in International Law 24. The Environment 25. Terrorism 26. The Laws of War 27. Human Rights 28. Trade 29. Finance 30. Intellectual Property 31. The United Nations 32. The International Court of Justice 33. Law of the Sea 34. Refugees and Migrants 2008: 246x174: 504pp Hb: 978-0-415-41876-8: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88462-1

US $190.00

Handbook of Conflict Analysis and Resolution Edited by Dennis J. D. Sandole, George Mason University, USA, Sean Byrne, University of Manitoba, Canada, Ingrid Sandole-Staroste, George Mason University, USA and Jessica Senehi, University of Manitoba, Canada

FORTHCOMING

Work Engagement A Handbook of Essential Theory and Research Edited by Arnold Bakker, Erasmus Unviersity Rotterdam and Michael Leiter, Acadia University, Canada

This major new Handbook is a collection of work from leading scholars in the Conflict Analysis and Resolution (CAR) field. The central theme is the value of interdisciplinary approaches to the analysis and resolution of conflicts.

Work Engagement provides the most thorough view available on this new and intriguing dimension of workplace psychology, which is the basis of fulfilling, productive work.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Core Concepts and Theories 1. The Role of Identity in Conflict 2. Encountering Nationalism: The Contribution of Peace Studies and Conflict Resolution 3. Gender Relations and Conflict Transformation Among Refugee Women 4. Causation as a Core Concept in Conflict Analysis 5. The Challenge of Operationalizing Key Concepts in Conflict Resolution Theory in International and Subnational Conflicts 6. The Enemy and the Innocent of Violent Conflicts 7. Identity Conflicts: Models of Dynamics and Early Warning 8. Generativity-Based Conflict: Maturing Micro Foundations for Conflict Theory Part 2: Core Approaches: Conceptual and Methodological 9. Human Agonistes: Interdisciplinary Inquiry into Ontological Agency and Human Conflict 10. The Ethnography of Peace Education: Some Lessons Learned from Palestinian-Jewish Integrated Education in Israel 11. Waging Conflicts Constructively 12. A Social-Psychological Approach to Conflict Analysis and Resolution 13. Building Relational Empathy Through An Interactive Design Process 14. Building Peace: Storytelling to Transform Conflicts Constructively 15. A Capacity Building Approach to Conflict Resolution 16. Gender Mainstreaming: A Valuable Tool in Building Sustainable Peace 17. Culture Theory, Culture Clash, and the Practice of Conflict Resolution 18. Conflict Resolution: The Missing Link between Liberal IR Theory and Realistic Practice 19. Understanding the Development-Conflict Nexus and the Contribution of Development Cooperation to Peacebuilding 20. Evaluation in Conflict Resolution and Peacebuilding 21. Toward A Conflictology: The Quest for Trans-Disciplinarity Part 3: Core Practices: Processes 22. Conflict Transformation: Reasons to be Modest 23. Mediation Frames/Justice Games 24. Interactive Conflict Resolution: Dialogue, Conflict Analysis and Problem Solving 25. Mediation and International Conflict Resolution: Analyzing Structure and Behavior 26. Ethical and Gendered Dilemmas of Moving from Emergency Response to Development in ’Failed’ States 27. Memory-Retrieval and Truth-Recovery 28. Shifting from Coherent Towards Holistic Peace Processes 29. Law and Legal Processes in Resolving International Conflicts Part 4: Alternative Voices and Complex Intervention Designs 30. Restorative Processes of Peace and Healing within the Governing Structures of the Rotinonshonni ’Longhouse People’ 31. Critical Systematic Inquiry in Conflict Analysis and Resolution: An Essential Bridge Between Theory and Practice 32. From Diagnosis to Treatment: Towards New Shared Principles for Israeli/Palestinian Peacebuilding 33. Strategies for the Prevention, Management and/or Resolution of (Ethnic) Crisis and Conflict: The Case of the Balkans 34. The Perception of Economic Assistance in Northern Ireland and Its Role in the Peace Process 35. Conflict Resolution in An Age of Empire: New Challenges to an Emerging Field Conclusions: Conclusion: Revisiting the CAR Field Epilogue: Implications for Theory, Research, Practice and Teaching

The book begins by defining work engagement, which has been described as ‘an opposite to burnout’, following its development into a more complex concept with far reaching implications for work-life. The chapters consider the sources of work engagement, emphasizing the importance of leadership, organizational structures, and human resource management as factors that may operate to either enhance or inhibit employee’s experience of work. The book considers the implications of work engagement for both the individual employee and the organization as a whole. To address readers’ practical questions, the book provides in-depth coverage of interventions that can enhance employees’ work engagement and improve management techniques.

2008: 246x174: 576pp Hb: 978-0-415-43395-2: £100.00 eBook: 978-0-203-89316-6

The book is based upon the most up-to-date research by the foremost experts in the world, bringing together the best knowledge available on work engagement. The book will be of great use to academic researchers, upper level students of work and organizational psychology as well as management consultants.

Selected Contents: Work Engagement: State of the Art. Defining and Measuring Work Engagement: Bringing Clarity to the Concept. Not All Days Are Created Equal: The Concept of State Work Engagement. The Push and Pull of Work: The Differences Between Workaholism and Work Engagement. The Power of Positive Psychology: Psychological Capital and Work Engagement. Feeling Energetic at Work: On Vigor’s Antecendents. Using the Job-Demands-Resources Model to Predict Engagement: Analyzing a Conceptual Model. A Meta-Analysis of Work Engagement: Relationships With Burnout, Demands, Resources and Consequences. The Gain Spiral of Resources and Work Engagement: Sustaining a Positive Worklife. Engagement and Human Thriving: Complementary Perspectives on Energy and Connections to Work. From Thought to Action: Employee Work Engagement And Job Performance. Building Engagement: The Design and Evaluation of Interventions.

Where To Go From Here: Integration and Future Research on Work Engagement.

November 2009: 246x189: 248pp Hb: 978-1-84169-736-9: £34.95 US $62.95

US $200.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

PSYCHOLOGY

Handbook of Approach and Avoidance Motivation Edited by Andrew J. Elliot, University of Rochester, USA ’Approach and avoidance motivation are central to key issues at all levels in the biobehavioral sciences. This Handbook brings all of these levels together for the first time, and does so in impressive fashion. It is a comprehensive, essential resource for all students of motivation in the social sciences, psychology, and neuroscience.’ – Richard J. Davidson, Professor of Psychology and Psychiatry, University of Wisconsin-Madison, USA Of the many conceptual distinctions present in psychology today, the approach-avoidance distinction stands out as one of, if not the, most fundamental and basic. The distinction between approach and avoidance motivation has a venerable history, not only within but beyond scientific psychology, and the deep utility of this distinction is clearly evident across theoretical traditions, disciplines, and content areas. This volume is designed to illustrate and highlight the central importance of this distinction, to serve as a one-stop resource for scholars working in this area, and to facilitate integration among researchers and theorists with an explicit or implicit interest in approach and avoidance motivation.

The main body of this volume is organized according to seven broad sections that represent core areas of interest in the study of approach and avoidance motivation, including neurophysiology and neurobiology, and evaluative processes. Each section contains a minimum of four chapters that cover a specific aspect of approach and avoidance motivation.

The broad applicability of the approach-avoidance distinction makes this Handbook an essential resource for researchers, theorists, and students of social psychology and related disciplines.

2008: 246x174: 584pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6019-1: £50.00

US $80.00

FORTHCOMING

The Dementia Carers’ Handbook Edited by Bill Lemmer January 2010: 216x138: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-38516-9: £55.00 Pb: 978-0-415-38517-6: £14.99

39

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Employee Selection Edited by James L. Farr, Pennsylvania State University, USA and Nancy T. Tippins, Valtera Corporation, Greenville, South Carolina, USA Selected Contents: Employee Selection in Work Organizations: Introduction and Overview.

Part 1: Foundations of Psychological Measurement and Evaluation Applied to Employee Selection. Reliability and Validity. Validation Strategies for Primary Studies. Making Decisions about Selection Procedures: Validity, Validation, and Generalizability. Part 2: Implementation and Management of Employee Selection Systems in Work Organizations. Attracting Job Candidates to Organizations Test Administration and the Use of Test Scores.

Technology and Employee Selection. Strategy, Selection and Sustained Competitive Advantage Managing Sustainable Selection Programs. The Business Value of Employee Selection. Part 3. Predictor Constructs in Employee Selection.

Part 3A: Categories of Individual Difference Constructs. Physical Performance Tests. Values, Styles, and Motivational Constructs. Practical Intelligence, Emotional Intelligence, and Social Intelligence. Part 3B: Assessing Work-Related Predictor Constructs. Decisions in Developing and Selecting Assessment Tools. Scoring and Administering Assessments. Evaluation of Measures: Sources of Error, Sufficiency, and Contamination. Assessment Feedback. Part 4: Criterion Constructs in Employee Selection. The Measurement of Task Performance as Criteria in Selection Research. Adaptive and Citizenship-Related Behaviors at Work. Counterproductive Work Behavior and Withdrawal. Defining and Measuring Results of Workplace Behavior. Employee Work-Related Health, Stress, and Safety. Who Defines Performance, Contribution, and Value? Part 5: Legal and Ethical Issues in Employee Selection. Ethics of Employee Selection. Professional Guidelines/Standards. Sampler of Legal Principles in Employment Selection. Perspectives from Twenty-Two Countries on the Legal Environment for Selection. Part 6. Employee Selection in Specific Organizational Contexts. Selection and Classification in the U.S. Military. Public Sector Employment. Selection Methods and Desired Outcomes: Integrating Assessment Content and Technology to Improve Entry- and Mid-Level Leadership Performance. Blue-collar Selection in Private Sector Organizations. Selection for Service and Sales Jobs. Selection in Multinational Organizations. Selection for Team Membership: A Contingency and Multilevel Perspective. Leadership and Executive Selection/High Potentials. Part 7. Milestones in Employee Selection. The Management Progress Study and Its Legacy for Selection. The Dictionary of Occupational Titles and the Occupational Information Network. Situational Specificity and Validity Generalization. European Milestones in Employee Selection. Epilogue: Employee Selection: Contemporary Status and Musings About Its Future.

October 2009: 246x174 Hb: 978-0-8058-6437-3: £49.95

US $99.00

eBooks in Psychology To find out more about our eBooks in Psychology please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

US $96.00

US $26.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

40

PSYCHOLOGY

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

NEW

Handbook of Cultural Developmental Science

2ND EDITION

2ND EDITION

Handbook of Clinical Sexuality for Mental Health Professionals

The Handbook of Play Therapy and Therapeutic Play

Edited by Stephen B. Levine, Case Western Reserve University School of Medicine, USA, Candace Risen, Assistant Clinical Professor of Social Work at Case Western University Department of Psychiatry, USA and Stanley Althof, Professor of Psychology at Case Western Reserve University Department of Urology, USA

Edited by Linnet McMahon, Retired Lecturer in Social Work, University of Reading, UK

Edited by Marc H. Bornstein, National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, USA Researchers and theoreticians alike commonly acknowledge the profound impact of culture on all aspects of development. However, many researchers and theoreticians within different spheres of developmental science are often unaware of the latest cultural literatures or how development proceeds in places other than their home locations. The goal of this Handbook is to rectify those two serious shortcomings.

The Handbook of Cultural Developmental Science offers a comprehensive contemporary scholarly approach to issue of culture in development. The book covers theoretical, methodological, substantive, and ethnic issues as well as geographic approaches. Each chapter includes and introduction, historical and demographic considerations, theory, an overview of the most important classical and modern research studies, recommended future directions in theory and research, and a conclusion. The chapters focus on children and youth (prenatal through adolescence).

Interdisciplinary in nature, the Handbook will appeal to human development researchers and advanced students in psychology, education, and pediatrics.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Domains of Development across Cultures. Culture. Methodology. Survival and Health. Perception. Motor Function. Cognition.

Language. Literacy. Emotions and Temperament. Self and Personality. Gender. Peers. Socialization. Parenting.

Religion. Part 2: Development in Different Places on Earth. The United States of America. Central and South America. European Union. North Africa and the Middle East. Afrique Noire. Russia. East and Southeast Asia: Japan, South Korea, Vietnam, and Indonesia. India.

Australia and New Zealand. The Home Environment.

Immigration and Acculturation.

August 2009: 246x174: 584pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6330-7: £47.50

US $85.00

This second edition of Handbook of Clinical Sexuality for Mental Health Professionals is a thoroughly revised and expanded edition of their first indespensable Handbook.

The new material reflects the changing needs of mental health professionals and will cover topics such as erectile dysfunction, great sex, the challenges men and women face when single again, helping the developmentally disabled with sex, and sex and cancer. Other With a well thought-out and updated organizational structure, this second edition will be even more informative and consequential than their first.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Sexual Intimacy: Hopes and Disappointments Listening to Sexual Sories. What Patients Mean by Love, Intimacy, and Sexual Desire. Great Sex. Developmental Landmarks that Restructure Relationships-Commitment, Pregnancy, Parenthood, Illness.

Single Again. Infidelity, The Unhappy Marriage.

Section 2: Sexual Dysfunction Part A: Women’s Sexual Issues. When Should a Woman Be Labeled Dysfunctional? Low Sexual Desire, Sexual Avoidance, and Sexual Aversion. Facilitating Orgasmic Responsiveness.

Painful Genital Activity. The Sexual Impact of Menopause.

Part B: Men’s Sexual Issues. Young Men’s Sexual Difficulties: Avoidance, Rapid Ejaculation, and Inability to Ejaculate. Erectile Dysfunction. Rapid Ejaculation and the Inability to Ejaculate. Part C: Beyond Gender. The Management of Professional Boundaries. Drug-Induced Sexual Dysfunction: Iatrogenic and Substance AbuseInduced. Sexual Consequences of Cancer Survival. Sexual Trauma. Section 3: Sexual Identity Struggles Sexual Addiction. The Paraphilic World. Male and Female Homosexuality in Heterosexual Life. Understanding Transgendered Phenomenon. Section 4: The Forgotten Helping the Developmentally Disabled with Sex. Helping the Chronically Mentally Ill with Sex. January 2010: 229x178: 490pp Hb: 978-0-415-80075-4: £69.50 Pb: 978-0-415-80076-1: £36.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87792-0

US $125.00

US $65.00

This completely revised and updated second edition provides a comprehensive introduction to using play to communicate with troubled or traumatized children and their families, and to heal emotional damage. The book gives examples of good practice in different settings and situations, including schools, hospitals, residential settings, families and foster carers. It also includes a consideration of the support needs of workers and carers.

Drawing on psychodynamic, systemic and attachment theory, the book provides an integrated theory base for using play in therapeutic work with children. It emphasizes non-directive approaches to therapeutic play and play therapy, based on supporting the child’s developing self within the safe boundaries provided by the setting and the worker’s emotional holding and containment. Areas explored include: • children with disabilities and illnesses • daily living with abused and traumatized children • helping troubled families • difficulties in early years • children experiencing separation, loss and bereavement • children moving to new families.

The Handbook of Play Therapy and Therapeutic Play is an invaluable resource for all of those using play therapy with children and will appeal not only to play therapists but also to professionals working in the broader field of therapeutic play. It will be useful whether the readers are at the beginning of their training or are well-established and experienced practitioners and managers.

Selected Contents: Introduction: The State of Play. The Development of Play. Approaches to Therapeutic Play.

The Process of Therapeutic Play and Play Therapy.

Therapeutic Play in the Early Years. Play in Helping Troubled Families. Therapeutic Play for Children with Disabilities and Illness. Therapeutic Play for Children Experiencing Separation, Loss and Bereavement in Their Families. Therapeutic Play with Children who have Experienced Continual Trauma and Loss. Therapeutic Play in Daily Living with Abused and Tramatized Children. Play in Therapeutic Work with Children Moving to New Families.

January 2009: 234x156: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-43941-1: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43942-8: £20.99

US $100.00

US $36.95

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

PSYCHOLOGY

NEW

NEW

NEW

Handbook of Violence Risk Assessment

2ND EDITION

Handbook of Prejudice, Stereotyping, and Discrimination

Edited by Kathleen T. Brady, Sudie E. Back, both at the Medical University of South Carolina, USA and Shelly F. Greenfield, Harvard Medical School, USA Series: International Perspectives on Forensic Mental Health ’This is an important topic that is not covered comprehensively elsewhere. I would buy the book both for myself and for my school’s library.’ Rebecca Jackson, Director of Forensic Psychology Program, Pacific Graduate School of Psychology, USA This comprehensive Handbook of original chapters serves as a resource for clinicians and researchers alike.

Two introductory chapters cover general issues in violence risk assessment, while the remainder of the book offers a comprehensive discussion of specific risk assessment measures.

Forensic psychology practitioners, mental health professionals who deal with the criminal justice system, and legal professionals working with violent offenders will find the Handbook of Violence Risk Assessment to be the primary reference for the field.

Selected Contents: The Evolution of Risk Assessment.

Heilbrun Approaches to Violence Risk Assessment: Overview and Critical Analysis. The Use of Measures of Psychopathy in Violence Risk Assessment. Juvenile Risk Assessment Tools. EARL-20B, EARL-21 SAVRY. LSI-Youth.

Adult Risk Assessment Tools. VRAG/SORAG. HCR-20.

COVR. SARA. RSVP. Static-99, SONAR, RRASOR. LSI-R, LS/CMI. VRS/VRS-SO. Summary. Necessary Future Steps in Violence Risk Assessment.

August 2009: 254x178: 448pp Hb: 978-0-415-96214-8: £50.00

US $95.00

FORTHCOMING 2ND EDITION

Handbook of Psychotherapy with Children and Adolescents, Second Edition Edited by Morris and Kratochwill December 2010: 254x178 Hb: 978-0-8058-6225-6: £105.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6226-3: £50.00 eBook: 978-1-4106-1610-4 US $89.95

US $195.00

The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy Psychoanalytic Approaches Edited by Monica Lanyado, Training Supervisor at the British Association of Psychotherapists, UK and Ann Horne, Senior member of the British Association of Psychotherapists, UK Selected Contents: Introduction. Part 1: Theoretical Foundations. The Roots of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy in Psychoanalyis. Normal Emotional Development. Contributions from Attachment Theory and Research. The Contribution from Neuroscience.

Research in Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy: An Overview. Part 2: Context. The Child Psychotherapist in the Multi-disciplinary Team. Race and Cultural Issues.

The International Scene. Part 3: Diversity of Treatments and Settings. The Therapeutic Setting and Process. Individual Psychotherapy: Assessment, Intensive and Non-intensive Work. Brief Psychotherapy and Therapeutic Consultations. How Much Therapy is ‘GoodEnough’? Work with Parents. Parent-Infant Psychotherapy. Group Psychotherapy. Working within Schools and Educational Settings. The Challenges of Inpatient Work in a Therapeutic Community. Consultation within Residential Care. Part 4: Areas of Specialist Interest. Child Psychotherapy for Children on the Autistic Spectrum. Psychotherapy with Severely Traumatised Children and Adolescents: ‘Far Beyond Words.’ Psychotherapy for Children Looked After by Local Authorities. Working with Foster Carers. Sexual Abuse and Sexual Abusing in Childhood and Adolescence. The Roots of Violence: Theory and Implications for Technique with Children and Adolescents.

Work with Children and Adolescents Exposed to Political Violence. Delinquency. Mondadori, Working with People with Eating Disorders: ‘What If I Die Without Knowing Why?’ Gender Identity Dysphoria.

June 2009: 234x156: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-46368-3: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46369-0: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-87761-6

US $100.00

US $42.95

Edited by Todd D. Nelson, California State Univeristy – Stanislaus, USA This Handbook provides a uniquely comprehensive and scholarly overview of the latest research on prejudice, stereotyping, and discrimination.

All chapters are written by eminent prejudice researchers who explore key topics, by presenting an overview of current research and, where appropriate, developing new theory, models, or scales.

The volume is clearly structured, with a broad section on cognitive, affective, and neurological processes, followed by chapters on some of the main target groups of prejudice – based on race, sex, age, sexual orientation, and weight. A concluding section explores the issues involved in reducing prejudice. Chapters on the history of research in prejudice and future directions round off this state-of-the-art Handbook.

The volume will provide an essential resource for students, instructors, and researchers in social and personality psychology, and also be an invaluable reference for academics and professionals in the fields of sociology, communication studies, gerontology, nursing, medicine, as well as government and policymakers and social service agencies.

Selected Contents: Part 1: History of Research on Prejudice, Stereotyping, and Discrimination. The Study Of Stereotyping, Prejudice, and Discrimination Within Social Psychology: A Quick History of Theory and Research.

Part 2: Cognitive, Affective, and Neurological Processes Involved in Prejudice. Formation of Prejudice.

Development of Racial and Ethnic Prejudice Among Children.

Intergroup Threat Theory. Cognitive Processes. Automaticity and Control in Stereotyping and Prejudice. Attributions to Discrimination: Antecedents and Consequences. Controlling Prejudice and Stereotyping: Antecedents, Mechanisms, and Contexts. Stereotypes and Shifting Standards. Stereotype and Social Identity Threat. The Role of Entitativity in Stereotyping: Processes and Parameters. The Unbearable Accuracy of Stereotypes. Downward and Upward Spirals in Intergroup Interactions: The Role of Egosystem and Ecosystem Goals. The Stereotypic Behaviors of the Powerful and Their Effect on the Relatively Powerless. Mechanisms Underlying the Malleability of Implicit Prejudice and Stereotypes: The Role of Automaticity and Cognitive Control. Affective Processes.

Intergroup Emotions Theory. How Our Dreams of Death Transcendence Breed Prejudice, Stereotyping, and Conflict: Terror Management Theory. Neurobiology of Prejudice. You Were Always On My Mind: How Event-Related Potentials Inform Impression Formation Research. Pictures in our Heads: Contributions of fMRI to the Study of Prejudice and Stereotyping. Measuring Prejudice. Measures of Prejudice.

Part 3: Targets of Prejudice. Racism in the 21st Century.

Sexism. Ageism. Sexual Prejudice. Anti-fat Prejudice.

Part 4: Reducing Prejudice. A Common Ingroup Identity: A Categorization-based Approach for Reducing Intergroup Bias.

The Self-regulation of Prejudice. Part 5: Epilogue. The Future of Research on Prejudice, Stereotyping, and Discrimination.

February 2009: 254x178: 584pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5952-2: £49.95 eBook: 978-1-84169-777-2

US $90.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

41

42

PSYCHOLOGY

NEW

NEW

NEW

2ND EDITION

Handbook of Peer Interactions, Relationships, and Groups

Handbook of the Uncertain Self

Auditing Organizational Communication A Handbook of Research, Theory and Practice Edited by Owen D. W. Hargie, Professor of Communication, University of Ulster, Northern Island and Dennis Tourish, Robert Gordon University, UK. Auditing Organizational Communication is a thoroughly revised and updated new edition of the successful Handbook of Communication Audits for Organizations, which has established itself as a core text in the field of organizational communication.

Research studies consistently show the importance of effective communication for business success. They also underscore the necessity for organizations to put in place validated techniques to enable them to systematically measure and monitor their communications. This Handbook equips readers with the vital analytic tools required to conduct such assessments.

Selected Contents: Editorial Introduction.

Part 1: Audits in Context Communication and Organisational Success. Auditing Communication to Maximise Performance. Part 2: Audit Methodologies The Questionnaire Approach. The Interview Approach.

The Focus Group Approach. Data Collection Log-sheet Methods. Social Network Analysis. Auditing Professional Practice. Auditing the Communications Revolution.

Crafting the Audit Report. Part 3: Audits in Action Charting Communication Performance in a Health Care Organisation. Communication Audit of a Hospital Clinic.

A Communication Audit of a Paper Mill. Auditing Corporate Leadership. Redesigning a Communication Event through External Audits. Auditing Corporate Culture. Auditing a Major Police Organisation. Auditing a Major Retail Chain. A Study of Sensemaking and CEO Change. Part 4: Final Considerations Strategy, Pedagogy and Research: The Role of Audits.

March 2009: 234x156: 520pp Hb: 978-0-415-41445-6: £49.95 Pb: 978-0-415-41446-3: £24.95 eBook: 978-0-203-88399-0

US $89.95

US $44.95

Edited by Kenneth H. Rubin, University of Maryland, USA, William M. Bukowski, Concordia University, USA and Brett Laursen, Florida Atlantic University, USA ’Truly deserving of the name ’Handbook,’ this volume offers a complete overview of empirical research on children’s peer relations, right up to today’s state-of-the-art multimodal prevention experiments. Readers will learn about the full range of methods and analytic tools for studying the broad developmental span from infancy to young adulthood. Several chapters stand out as gems.’ Kenneth A. Dodge, William McDougall Professor of Public Policy and Director, Center for Child and Family Policy, Duke University, USA This comprehensive, authoritative Handbook covers the breadth of theories, methods, and empirically based findings on the ways in which children and adolescents contribute to one another’s development.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction: History and Theory. Critical Issues and Theoretical Viewpoints. Trends, Travails, and Turning Points in Early Research on Children’s Peer Relationships: Legacies and Lessons for Our Time?

Part 2: Social Behaviors, Interactions, Relationships, and Groups: What Should be Measured, How, and Why? Children’s Behaviors and Interactions with Peers. Methods for Investigating Children’s Relationships with Friends.

Sociometric Methods. Assessment of the Peer Group: Identifying Naturally Occurring Social Networks and Capturing Their Effects. Part 3: Infancy and Early Childhood. The Beginnings of Peer Relations. Peer Interactions and Play in Early Childhood. Social - Emotional Competence in Early Childhood. Friendship in Early Childhood. Structural Descriptions of Social Transactions among Young Children: Affiliation and Dominance in Preschool Groups.

Part 4: Middle Childhood and Early Adolescence.

Friendship as Process, Function, and Outcome. The Behavioral Basis of Acceptance, Rejection, and Perceived Popularity. Social Exclusion in Childhood and Adolescence.

Conflict in Peer Relationships. Aggression and Peer Relationships in School-Age Children: Relational and Physical Aggression in Group and Dyadic Contexts. Avoiding and Withdrawing from the Peer Group. Bullies, Victims, and Bully - Victim Relationships in Middle Childhood and Early Adolescence. Adolescent Romantic Relationships and Experiences. Informal Peer Groups in Middle Childhood and Adolescence. Part 5: Distal Correlates of Children’s Peer Relationships. Sex Differences in Peer Relationships. Race and Ethnicity in Peer Relations Research. Neighborhood Contexts of Peer Relationships and Groups. Peer Interactions and Relationships from a Cross-Cultural Perspective.

Part 6: Proximal Correlates of Children’s Social Skills and Peer Relationships. Genetic Factors in Children’s Peer Relations. Temperament, Self-Regulation, and Peer Social Competence. Child - Parent Attachment Relationships, Peer Relationships, and Peer-Group Functioning. Family Influences on Children’s Peer Relationships. Part 7: Childhood Peer Experiences and Later Adjustment. Peers and Academic Functioning at School. Peer Reputations and Psychological Adjustment. The Role of Friendship in Child and Adolescent Psychosocial Development. Part 8: Translation and Policy.

Deviant by Design: Peer Contagion in Development, Interventions, and Schools. Social Skills Training to Improve Peer Relations. Author Index. Subject Index.

Edited by Robert M. Arkin, Kathryn C. Oleson and Patrick J. Carroll This Handbook examines contemporary research in social and personality on the determinants and consequences of self-uncertainty in social life.

Selected Contents: Introducing the Uncertain Self.

Part 1: Meta-Cognition and Uncertainty in Self Processes by Which Confidence (vs. Doubt) Influence the Self. Social Influences on Eyewitness Confidence: The Social Psychology of Memory Self-Certainty. Be Careful What You Wish For: The Dark Side of Freedom. The Causal Uncertainty Model Revisited. Uncertainty Orientation: Myths, Truths, and the Interface of Motivation and Cognition. The Social Psychology of Fairness and the Regulation of Personal Uncertainty.

Procedural Fairness Responses in the Context of SelfUncertainty. On First Versus False Instincts. Metacognitive Regulation as a Reaction to the Uncertainty of Stereotype Threat. Part 2: Motivation and Uncertainty in Self Coping with Life’s One Certainty: A Terror Management Perspective on the Existentially Uncertain Self. The Role of Uncertainty in Self-Evaluative Processes: Another Look at the Cognitive-Affective Crossfire.

Defensive Conviction in Emotion Regulation: Goal Mechanisms and Interpersonal Implications. The New Adventures of Regulatory Focus: Self-Uncertainty and the Quest for a Diagnostic Self-Evaluation. Preparedness.

The Uncertainty Surrounding Ostracism: Threat Amplifier or Protector? Perceived Evaluative Styles & Self-Doubt.

Part 3: Clinical and Applied Implications of the Uncertain Self Deconstructing the Link between Self-Doubt and Self-Worth: Ideas to Reduce Maladaptive Coping. Defense Mechanisms and Self-Doubt. Fragile Versus Secure High Self-esteem: Implications for Defensiveness and Insecurity. The Phenotypic Expressions of Self-Doubt about Ability in Academic Contexts: Strategies of Self-Handicapping and Subjective Overachievement. General Commentaries. Human Groups, Social Categories and Collective Self: Social Identity and the Management of Self-Uncertainty.

Self-Uncertainty and its Cousins. Editorial Commentary: Reflections on the Past, Present, and Future of Self-Uncertainty.

October 2009: 254x178 Hb: 978-0-8058-6187-7: £45.00

US $80.00

January 2009: 246x174 : 654pp Hb: 978-1-59385-441-6: £57.50 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

For Handbooks in Economics and Business, see Page 5

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

PSYCHOLOGY

NEW

NEW

NEW

Women and Addiction

Handbook of Developmental Social Neuroscience

Handbook of Research on Literacy and Diversity

Edited by Michelle de Haan, Institute of Child Health, University College London, UK, and Megan R. Gunnar, Institute of Child Development at the University of Minnesota, USA

Edited by Lesley Mandel Morrow, Rutgers University, USA, Robert Rueda, University of Southern California, USA, and Diane Lapp, San Diego State University, USA

’This Handbook describes research emerging at the interface of two of the hottest areas in neuroscience: social neuroscience and developmental cognitive neuroscience. The volume provides a comprehensive review of this exciting area, ranging from developmental neuroanatomy and comparative studies to developmental disorders. I predict that this will become a landmark work. It is essential reading for students and an important resource for researchers in cognitive neuroscience and social development.’ - Mark H. Johnson, Professor and Director, Centre for Brain and Cognitive Development, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK

’Powerful. The editors have brought together brilliant researchers who make a tremendous contribution to building knowledge about instruction that capitalizes on students’ social and cultural contexts. Perhaps most important, they point the way toward taking action that is evidence based and holds potential for making a difference in the literacy lives of our students.’ Victoria J. Risko, Department of Teaching and Learning, Vanderbilt University, USA

A Comprehensive Handbook Edited by Kathleen T. Brady, both at the Medical University of South Carolina, USA, and Shelly F. Greenfield, Harvard Medical School, USA For many years, addiction research focused almost exclusively on men. Yet scientific awareness of sex and gender differences in substance use disorders has grown tremendously in recent decades.

This volume brings together leading authorities to review the state of the science and identify key directions for research and clinical practice. Concise, focused chapters illuminate how biological and psychosocial factors influence the etiology and epidemiology of substance use disorders in women; their clinical presentation, course, and psychiatric comorbidities; treatment access; and treatment effectiveness. Prevalent substances of abuse are examined, as are issues facing special populations.

Selected Contents: Preface. Acknowledgments.

Part 1: An Overview of Women, Girls, and Addiction 1. Feminist Theory and Addiction. 2. Women, Girls, and Addiction: An Historical Perspective.

Part 2: Biopsychosocial Influences 3. Biological Factors. 4. Psychological Factors. 5. Social Factors.

Part 3: Prevention, Treatment, and Relapse Prevention across the Lifespan 6. Counseling Considerations for Women: An Overview. 7. Adolescents.

8. Women in Late Adulthood. References.

June 2009: 246x174: 528pp Hb: 978-1-60623-107-4: £43.50 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

Recent years have seen an explosion of research into the physiological and neural bases of social behavior. This state-of-the science Handbook is unique in approaching the topic from a developmental perspective.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction. The Brain in a Social Environment: Why Study Development?

Part 2: Methodological and Biological Background.

Methods in Social Neuroscience: Issues in Studying Development. Neuroanatomy of the Developing Social Brain. Part 3: Perceiving and Communicating with Others. Neural Bases of the Development of Face Processing. Decoding Social Signals in the Infant Brain: A Look at Eye Gaze Perception. The Development and Neural Bases of Processing Emotion in Faces and Voices. The Development of Social Information Gathering in Infancy: A Model of Neural Substrates and Developmental Mechanisms.

Imitation as a Stepping Stone to Empathy. Mentalizing and Development During Adolescence. Early Communicative Development and the Social Brain. Evolutionary Origins of Social Communication. Part 4: Relationships. Attachment and the Comparative Psychobiology of Mothering.

Neuroendocrine Mechanisms of Social Bonds and Child–Parent Attachment, from the Child’s Perspective.

Neurobiology and Hormonal Aspects of Romantic Relationships. Animal Models of Romantic Relationships.

Part 5: Regulatory Systems: Motivation and Emotion Temperament and Affect Vulnerability: Behavioral, Electrocortical, and Neuroimaging Perspectives. Reward Systems. Social Relationships as Primary Rewards: The Neurobiology of Attachment. , A Brain-Based Account of Developmental Changes in Social Decision Making.

Part 6: Perspectives on Psychopathology. A Social Neuroscience Approach to Adolescent Depression. The Development and Neural Bases of Psychopathy. Autism: Risk Factors, Risk Processes, and Outcome. Social and Genetic Aspects of Turner, Williams–Beuren, and Fragile X Syndromes. The Effects of Early Institutionalization on Social Behavior and Underlying Neural Correlates. Socioemotional Development Following Early Abuse and Neglect: Challenges and Insights from Translational Research.

May 2009: 246x174: 558pp Hb: 978-1-60623-117-3: £50.00 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

43

Timely and authoritative, this is the first research Handbook to address all dimensions of diversity that have an impact on literacy achievement.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Perspectives About Learning Among Diverse Students. Relating Diversity and Literacy Theory. Policy Related to Issues of Diversity and Literacy: Implications for English Learners. What Do We Know about the Discourse Patterns of Diverse Students in Multiple Settings? Family Literacy: Recognizing Cultural Significance. Poverty and Its Relation to Development and Literacy. Language, Literacy, and Content: Adolescent English Language Learners.

Part 2: Special Issues Concerning Literacy. Academic English and African American Vernacular English: Exploring Possibilities for Promoting the Literacy Learning of All Children. Engaging Diverse Students in Multiple Literacies In and Out of School. The New Literacies of Online Reading Comprehension and the Irony of No Child Left Behind: Students Who Require our Assistance the Most Actually Receive It the Least. Roles of Engagement, Valuing, and Identification in Reading Development of Students from Diverse Backgrounds. Robust Informal Learning Environments for Youth from Nondominant Groups: Implications for Literacy Learning in Formal Schooling. Assessing Student Progress in the Time of No Child Left Behind. Meeting the Needs of Diverse Learners: Effective Management of Language Arts Instruction. Part 3: Strategies for Teaching Children from Diverse Backgrounds. Cross-Language Transfer of Phonological, Orthographic, and Semantic Knowledge.

Learning to Read in English: Teaching Phonics to Beginning Readers from Diverse Backgrounds. Vocabulary Instruction for Diverse Students. Comprehension: The Means, Motive, and Opportunity for Meeting the Needs of Diverse Learners. Helping Diverse Learners to Become Fluent Readers. Part 4: Preparing Teachers to Teach Literacy to Diverse Students. Teacher Knowledge in Culturally and Linguistically Complex Classrooms: Lessons from the Golden Age and Beyond. Protecting Our Investment: Induction and Mentoring of Novice Teachers in Diversity-Rich Schools. Professional Development: Continuing to Understand How to Teach Children from Diverse Backgrounds. Afterword: From ’Just a Teacher’ to Justice in Teaching: Working in the Service of Education, the New Civil Rights.

June 2009: 246x174 : 466pp Hb: 978-1-60623-246-0: £43.50 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

To recommend any of these titles to your library please see centre of catalogue for the Library Recommendation form

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

44

PSYCHOLOGY

Handbook of Adolescent Literacy Research Edited by Leila Christenbury, Virginia Commonwealth University, USA, Randy Bomer, University of Texas at Austin, USA and Peter Smagorinsky, University of Georgia, USA The first comprehensive research Handbook of its kind, this volume showcases innovative approaches to understanding adolescent literacy learning in a variety of settings. Distinguished contributors examine how well adolescents are served by current instructional practices and highlight ways to translate research findings more effectively into sound teaching and policymaking. The book emphasizes social and cultural factors in adolescents’ approach to communication and response to instruction, and sections address literacy both in and out of schools, including literacy expectations in the contemporary workplace. Detailed attention is given to issues of diversity and individual differences among learners.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Overview. Introduction.

Sociocultural Constructions of Adolescence and Young People’s Literacies. Who Are Adolescents Today?: Youth Voices and What They Tell Us. Part 2: Literacy in School. Contexts for Adolescent Literacy. Adolescents Who Struggle with Literacy. Proficient Reading in School: Traditional Paradigms and New Textual Landscapes.

Fostering Adolescents’ Engaged Academic Literacy.

Divided Against Ourselves: Standards, Assessments, and Adolescent Literacy. Adolescent Second-Language Writing. Research on the Literacies of AAVE-Speaking Adolescents. Digital Literacies in the Classroom. The Secondary English Curriculum and Adolescent Literacy.

Visual Arts and Literacy. Policy and Adolescent Literacy.

Tracking and Ability Grouping. Part 3: Literacy Out of School. Preparing Adolescents for the Literacy Demands of the 21st-Century Workplace. The Literacy Demands of Entering the University. Literacy in Virtual Worlds.

Reading and Writing Video: Media Literacy and Adolescents. Part 4: Literacy and Culture. Literacy and Identity: Implications for Research and Practice. Latina/o Youth Literacies: Hidden Funds of Knowledge. Beyond Hip-Hop: A Cultural Context View of Literacy. Boys and Literacy: Complexity and Multiplicity. Lessons on Literacy Learning and Teaching: Listening to Adolescent Girls.

Literacy Issues and GLBTQ Youth: Queer Interventions in English Education. The Literacies of New Immigrant Youth. American Indian Adolescent Literacy.

2008: 254x178: 452pp Hb: 978-1-59385-829-2: £43.50 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

Handbook of Writing Research

NEW

Edited by Charles A. MacArthur, University of Delaware, USA, Steve Graham, Vanderbilt University, USA, and Jill Fitzgerald, University of North Carolina-Chapel Hill, USA

Social Psychology of Consumer Behavior

’This is an extraordinary resource for anyone interested in writing, and a rich volume to draw from for college teaching. It will stand for some time as a major resource for those working in the field of writing and is certain to influence the direction of future research.’ - Barry J. Zimmerman, PhD, Doctoral Program in Educational Psychology, Graduate School of the City University of New York, USA This authoritative volume synthesizes current knowledge on writing development in children and adolescents and the processes underlying successful learning and teaching. The most comprehensive work of its kind, the volume encompasses both cognitive and sociocultural perspectives. Leading investigators present salient theoretical models; describe cutting-edge research methodologies and analytic tools; summarize available data on the effectiveness of major instructional approaches; and identify key directions for future research. Emphasizing the importance of supporting all students’ writing development, the book includes a special section on cultural diversity, gender, special education, and bilingual learners.

Selected Contents: Introduction. Part 1: Theories and Models of Writing. The Social and Historical Context for Writing Research. New Directions in Writing Theory.

Writing Process Theory: A Functional Dynamic Approach.

A Sociocultural Theory of Writing. The Processing Demands of Writing. Part 2: Writing Development.

The Emergence of Writing. Implications of Advancements in Brain Research and Technology for Writing Development, Writing Instruction, and Educational Evolution. Cognitive Factors in the Development of Children’s Writing. Children’s Understanding of Genre and Writing Development. Motivation and Writing. SelfEfficacy Beliefs and Motivation in Writing Development.

Relations Among Oral Language, Reading, and Writing Development. Part 3: Instructional Models and Approaches. Strategy Instruction and the Teaching of Writing: A Meta-Analysis. Tenets of Sociocultural Theory in Writing Instruction Research. Response to Writing.

Writing to Learn: How Alternative Theories of School Writing Account for Student Performance. The Effects of New Technologies on Writing and Writing Processes. ’I Guess I’d Better Watch My English’: Grammars and the Teaching of the English Language Arts. The Process Approach to Writing Instruction: Examining Its Effectiveness. Part 4: Writing and Special Populations.

Teaching Writing in Culturally Diverse Classrooms.

Influence of Gender on Writing Development. Writing Instruction for Students with Learning Disabilities.

Multilingual Writing in Preschool through Twelfth Grade: The Last 15 Years. Part 5: Methodology and Analytic Tools. Qualitative Research on Writing. Statistical Analysis for Field Experiments and Longitudinal Data In Writing Research. Text Structure as a Window on the Cognition of Writing: How Text Analysis Provides Insights in Writing Products and Writing Processes. Applications of Computers in Assessment and Analysis of Writing.

Writing Assessment: A Technohistory. What Does Reading Have to Tell Us About Writing?: Preliminary Questions and Methodological Challenges in Examining the Neurobiological Foundations of Writing and Writing Disabilities.

Edited by Michaela Wanke, Institut fur Psychologie, Basel, Switzerland Series: Frontiers of Social Psychology The Social Psychology of Consumer Behavior brings together the most promising and theoretically fruitful research developments by internationally renowned scholars, whose work is at the cutting edge of research.

Experts from both fields – social psychology and consumer behavior – provide an informed, up-to-date overview, from an original integrative perspective.

The aim of this volume is two-fold. On the one hand, the application of social psychology to consumer behavior is meant to broaden the horizon of social psychologists. On the other hand, students and researchers of consumer behavior will be offered an advanced account of relevant theories tailored to their interests. While the range of topics is rather broad – including the construal of judgments and decisions, affective and cognitive feelings, social and media influences, and goals and self-regulation – each chapter is focused on one specific theoretical or methodological perspective and thereby gives a comprehensive and penetrative account of the relevant issues and the respective research.

The volume provides an invaluable resource to students, researchers, and instructors in social psychology, consumer psychology, consumer behavior, and marketing.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction: A Tale of Two Disciplines. What’s Social about Consumer Behavior?

Social Psychology and Consumer Psychology: An Unexplored Interface. Part 2: The Construal of Consumer Judgments and Decisions. Psychological Distance and Consumer Behavior: A Construal Level.

Theory Perspective. The Rational Unconscious: Conscious Versus Unconscious Thought in Complex Consumer Choice. Brands and Successful Brand Extensions: A Social Psychology Perspective on Economic Questions.

Compensatory Reasoning in Choice.

Part 3: Affective and Cognitive Feelings in Consumer Judgment. Conditioning as a Source of Liking: There is Nothing Simple About It. The Lexicon and Grammar of Affect-As-Information in Consumer Decision Making: The GAIM. When Thinking is Difficult: Metacognitive Experiences as Information. Part 4: Social and Media Influences on Judgment and Behavior. Cross-Cultural Issues in Consumer Behavior. Television Viewing and Social Reality: Effects and Underlying Processes. Normative Influences on Consumption and Conservation Behaviors.

Taking the Target’s Perspective: The Persuasion Knowledge Model. Part 5: Goals and Self-regulation. The Persuasive Power of Regulatory Fit. The Impulsive Consumer: Predicting Consumer Behavior with Implicit Reaction Time Measures. The Dynamics of SelfRegulation: When Goals Commit Versus Liberate.

2008: 229x152: 385pp Hb: 978-1-84169-498-6: £37.50

US $65.00

2008: 468pp Pb: 978-1-59385-750-9: £28.50 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

PSYCHOLOGY

NEW

Handbook of Imagination and Mental Simulation Edited by Keith D. Markman, William M. P. Klein and Julie A. Suhr, all at Department of Psychology, Ohio University, USA Over the past thirty years, and particularly within the last ten years, researchers in the areas of social psychology, cognitive psychology, clinical psychology, and neuroscience have been examining fascinating questions regarding the nature of imagination and mental simulation – the imagination and generation of alternative realities. Some of these researchers have focused on the specific processes that occur in the brain when an individual is mentally simulating an action or forming a mental image, whereas others have focused on the consequences of mental simulation processes for affect, cognition, motivation, and behavior.

This Handbook provides a novel and stimulating integration of work on imagination and mental simulation from a variety of perspectives. It is the first broad-based volume to integrate specific sub-areas such as mental imagery, imagination, thought flow, narrative transportation, fantasizing, and counterfactual thinking, which have, until now, been treated by researchers as disparate and orthogonal lines of inquiry. As such, the volume enlightens psychologists to the notion that a wide-range of mental simulation phenomena may actually share a commonality of underlying processes.

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Mental Simulation of Action and Behavior. Action Representation and its Role in Social Interactions. Expertise and the Mental Simulation of Action. Mental Imagery and Implicit Memory. Thou Shalt Not Make Unto Thee any Graven Image: The DistanceDependence of Representation. Implemental Intentions: The Mental Representation and Cognitive Procedures of IF-THEN Planning. Part 2: Mental Simulation and Memory. False Memories: The Role of Plausibility and Autobiographical Belief. Hypnosis and Memory: From Bernheim to the Present.

Episodic Future Thought: Remembering the Past to Imagine the Future. Temporally Asymmetric Constraints on Mental Simulation: Retrospection is More Constrained Than Prospection. Part 3: Counterfactual Thinking: Simulating the Past. Cognitive Processes in Counterfactual Thinking.

The Counterfactual Thinking Mind-Set: A Decade of Research. Counterfactual Thinking: Function and Dysfunction. Part 4: Alternatives and Alternate Selves.

It’s Hard to Imagine: Mental Simulation, Metacognitive Experiences, and the Success of Debiasing. Children’s Imaginary Companions: What is it Like to Have an Imaginary Friend? Daydreaming and Fantasizing: Thought Flow and Motivation. Simulated Worlds: Transportation into Narratives.

Part 5: Perspective-Taking: Simulating Other Minds. The Happiness of the Fish: Evidence for a Common Theory of One’s Own and Others’ Actions. Two Forms of Perspective Taking: Imagining How Another Feels and Imagining How You Would Fel. Making it up and Making do: Simulation, Iagination, and Epathic Acuracy. Perspective Taking: Misstepping into Others’ Shoes. Part 6: Simulating and Preparing For the Future. Imagining a Rosy Future: The Psychology of Optimism. On the Excessive Rationality of the Emotional Imagination: A Two Systems Account of Affective Forecasts and Experiences. Subjective Proximity of Future Selves: Implications for Current Identity, Future Appraisal, and Goal Pursuit Motivation. Seeing the Links Between the Personal Past, Present, and Future: How Imagery Perspective in Mental Simulation Functions in Defining the Temporally Extended Self. Possible Selves: From Content to Process.

Mental Contrasting of the Future and Reality to Master Negative Feedback. On the Consequences of Mentally Simulating Future Forgone Outcomes: A Regret Regulation Perspective. Preparedness, Mental Simulations, and Future Outlooks.

2008: 254x178: 488pp Hb: 978-1-84169-887-8: £49.95 eBook: 978-1-84169-888-5

2ND EDITION

4TH EDITION

Mental Health in a Multi-Ethnic Society

Clinical Handbook Of Psychological Disorders

A Multidisciplinary Handbook

A Step-by-Step Treatment Manual

Edited by Dr Suman Fernando, Chase Farm Hospital, Enfield, UK and Frank Keating, Royal Holloway University of London, UK

Edited by David H. Barlow, Boston University, USA

This new edition of Mental Health in a Multi-Ethnic Society is an authoritative, comprehensive guide on issues around race, culture and mental health service provision. It has been updated to reflect the changes in the UK over the last ten years and features entirely new chapters by over twenty authors, expanding the range of topics by including issues of particular concern for women, family therapy, and mental health of refugees and asylum seekers.

Selected Contents: Introduction. Part 1: Current Scene. Meanings and Realities. Race Relations, Mental Health and Human Rights - The Legal Framework.

Inequalities and the Politics of ‘Race’ in Mental Health.

Black and Minority Ethnic Women. Race Equality Training in the UK: An Historical Overview. Part 2: Confronting Issues. Management Approaches to Effecting Change.

Innovation in the Voluntary Sector. The Challenges of Race Equality and Cultural Capability (RECC) Training.

Developing Psychological Services for Refugee Survivors of Torture. Black Service ‘User Involvement’ – Rhetoric or Reality? A Programme for Changing Attitudes in the Statutory Sector: Dialogue is Critical. Part 3: Making It Happen. Working Therapeutically with Hidden Dimensions of Racism. The Marlborough Cultural Therapy Centre. Mental Health Services for Chinese People. Counselling and Day Care for South Asian People. African and Caribbean Mental Health Service in Manchester. The Sanctuary Practice in Hackney. A Movement Led by Black Service Users in South London.

Part 4: Lessons for the Future. The Way Ahead.

2008: 216x138: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-41486-9: £60.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41487-6: £21.99 eBook: 978-0-203-89553-5

’This is the best single-volume presentation of the state of the art for psychologists, social workers, and other mental health professionals working with people suffering from common mental disorders. Each up-to-date chapter provides a comprehensive review of assessment and therapy methods. This fourth edition will be an indispensable resource for clinicians for years to come.’ - Michael E. Thase, MD, Department of Psychiatry, University of Pittsburgh Medical Center and Western Psychiatric Institute and Clinic, USA Now in a thoroughly revised and expanded fourth edition, this widely adopted text provides students and practitioners with state-of-the-science guidelines for treating frequently encountered adult disorders.

Contributors are leading clinical researchers who present essential background knowledge on each problem, describe the conceptual and empirical bases of their respective approaches, and detail the nuts and bolts of evidence-based assessment and intervention, including vivid clinical illustrations. Authoritative, timely, and eminently practical, the fourth edition has been updated throughout with the latest treatment innovations and empirical findings. Four entirely new chapters cover behavioral activation for depression, psychological treatments for positive symptoms of schizophrenia, and unified approaches to emotional disorders and eating disorders.

2008: 254x178: 740pp Hb: 978-1-59385-572-7: £50.00 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

US $100.00

US $39.95

US $90.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

45

46

PSYCHOLOGY

4TH EDITION

2ND EDITION

Clinical Handbook of Couple Therapy

Handbook of Attachment

Edited by Alan S. Gurman, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, USA

Edited by Jude Cassidy, University of Maryland, USA and Phillip R. Shaver, University of California, USA

’Carrying on the great tradition of the earlier editions of this book, Gurman has once again put together the definitive Handbook of couple therapy. Covering all of the major approaches as well as the major client and problem populations, this volume provides in-depth snapshots written by the key leaders in the field. Ideal as a text for graduate courses, it also offers senior clinicians and researchers a guide to what’s new....This is an indispensable book that should be part of the library of every couple therapist and couple therapy researcher’ - William M. Pinsof, President, The Family Institute at Northwestern University; Director, Center for Applied Psychological and Family Studies, Northwestern University, USA Lauded as ’the Definitive Handbook of Couple Therapy,’ this authoritative work provides a definitive overview of the major models of couple therapy and their clinical applications. In the newly revised and expanded fourth edition, leaders in the field describe the history, theoretical and empirical underpinnings, and methods of each approach. The treatment of specific problems and populations is then addressed, complete with detailed illustrations of therapeutic strategies and techniques. Designed for optimal utility as a practical reference and text, the fourth edition is revised throughout with clinical, conceptual, and research advances.

Selected Contents: A Framework for the Comparative Study of Couple Therapy: History, Models, and Applications. Part 1: Models of Couple Therapy.

Behavioral Approaches. Cognitive-Behavioral Couple Therapy. Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy.

Humanistic-Existential Approaches. Emotionally Focused Couple Therapy. Gottman Method Couple Therapy. Psychodynamic and Transgenerational Approaches. Object Relations Couple Therapy.

Transgenerational Couple Therapy. Social Constructionist Approaches. Narrative Couple Therapy.

Solution-focused Couple Therapy. Systemic Approaches. Brief Strategic Couple Therapy. Structural Couple Therapy. Integrative Approaches. AffectiveReconstructive Couple Therapy: A Pluralistic, Developmental Approach. Integrative Couple Therapy: A Depth-behavioral Approach. Part 2: Applications of Couple Therapy: Special Populations, Problems, and Issues. Rupture and Repair of Relational Bonds: Affairs, Divorce, Violence, and Remarriage. Couple Therapy and the Treatment of Affairs. Separation and Divorce Issues in Couple Therapy. Couple Therapy and Physical Aggression. Couple Therapy with Remarried Partners. Couple Therapy and the Treatment of Psychiatric and Medical Disorders. Couple Therapy for Alcoholism and Drug Abuse. Couple Therapy and the Treatment of Depression. Couple Therapy and the Treatment of Borderline Personality and Related Disorders.

Couple Therapy and the Treatment of Sexual Dysfunction.

Couple Therapy and Medical Issues: Working with Couples Facing Illness. Couple Therapy in Broader Context. Gender Issues in the Practice of Couple Therapy. Gay and Lesbian Couples in Therapy: Minority Stress, Relational Ambiguity, and Families of Choice.

African American Couples in Therapy. Legal and Ethical Issues in Couple Therapy.

2008: 254x178: 736pp Hb: 978-1-59385-821-6: £57.50 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

Theory, Research, and Clinical Applications, Second Edition ’Destined to become a classic reference work in the field. All chapters are completely updated, and important new topics have been added that make this an even more compelling volume than its predecessor. This book belongs in the library of professionals and graduate students in developmental and clinical psychology, pediatrics, and psychiatry.’ - Dante Cicchetti, McKnight Presidential Chair and Professor, Institute of Child Development and Department of Psychiatry, University of Minnesota, USA From foremost authorities, this comprehensive work is more than just the standard reference on attachment-it has ’become indispensable’ in the field.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Overview of Attachment Theory. The Nature of the Child’s Ties, Disruptions in Attachment Bonds: Implications for Theory, Research, and Clinical Intervention. Attachment, Loss, and Grief: Bowlby’s Views and Current Controversies. Individual Differences in Infant–caregiver Attachment: Conceptual and Empirical Aspects of Security. Internal Working Models in Attachment Relationships: Elaborating a Central Construct in Attachment Theory. Part 2: Biological Perspectives. Attachment Theory within a Modern Evolutionary Framework.

Psychobiological Origins of Infant Attachment and Its Role in Development. Attachment in Rhesus Monkeys.

Attachment and Temperament: Additive and Interactive Influences on Behavior, Affect, and Cognition During Infancy and Childhood. Studying the Biology of Human Attachment. Toward a Neuroscience of Attachment.

Part 3: Attachment in Infancy and Childhood. Normative Development: The Ontogeny of Attachment. Precursors of Attachment Security. Attachment Relationships in the Context of Multiple Caregivers. The Influence of Early Attachments on Other Relationships. Early Attachment and Later Development: Familiar Questions, New Answers.

Attachment in Middle Childhood. The Measurement of Attachment Security in Infancy and Early Childhood.

Part 4: Attachment in Adolescence and Adulthood. The Attachment System in Adolescence. Pair Bonds as Attachments: Reevaluating the Evidence. Adult Romantic Attachment: Developments in the Study of Couple Relationships. Same-sex Romantic Attachment. Adult Attachment and Affect Regulation Attachment in Middle and Later Life. The Adult Attachment Interview: Protocol, Method of Analysis, and Empirical Studies. Measurement of Individual Differences in Adolescent and Adult Attachment. Part 5: Psychopathology and Clinical Applications of Attachment Theory and Research. Attachment and Psychopathology in Childhood. Attachment Disorganization: Genetic Factors, Parenting Contexts, and Developmental Transformation from Infancy to Adulthood. Challenges to the Development of Attachment Relationships Faced by Young Children in Foster and Adoptive Care. Attachment and Psychopathology in Adulthood. Prevention and Intervention Programs for Supporting Early Attachment Security. The Implications of Attachment Theory and Research for Adult Psychotherapy: Research and Clinical Perspectives.

Psychoanalytic Theory from the Viewpoint of Attachment Theory and Research. Couple and Family Therapy: An Attachment Perspective. Part 6: Systems, Culture, and Context. The Caregiving System: A Behavioral Systems Approach to Parenting. A Wider View of Attachment and Exploration: The Influence of Mothers and Fathers on the Development of Psychological Security from Infancy to Young Adulthood. Cross-Cultural Patterns of Attachment: Universal and Contextual Dimensions. Attachment and Religious Representations and Behavior. An AttachmentTheoretical Perspective on Divorce. Implications of Attachment Theory and Research for Child Care Policy.

2008: 254x178: 1,020pp Hb: 978-1-59385-874-2: £84.50 Pb: 978-1-60623-028-2: £37.50 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

A Compendium of Tests, Scales and Questionnaires Editied by Robyn L. Tate, University of Sydney This Compendium is a comprehensive reference manual containing an extensive selection of instruments developed to measure a range of neurological conditions, both progressive and non-progressive. It includes established instruments as well as newly developed scales and covers all aspects of the functional consequences of acquired brain impairment.

This text provides a unique review of specialist instruments for the assessment of people with neurological conditions, such as dementia, multiple sclerosis, stroke and traumatic brain injury. Part A presents scales examining body functions, including consciousness and orientation, general cognitive functions, specific cognitive functions (e.g. language, memory), regulation of behaviour, drive, and emotion and motor-sensory functions. Part B reviews scales of daily living activities and community participation. Part C focuses on contextual factors, including environmental issues and social supports and the final part contains multidimensional scales.

Each instrument is described as a stand-alone report using a uniform format. A brief history of the instrument's development is provided, along with a description of item content and administration/scoring procedures.

Psychometric properties are reviewed and a critical commentary is provided. Up to a dozen key references are cited and in most cases the actual scale is included, giving the reader easy access to the instrument. The structure of the book directly maps onto the taxonomy of the recently introduced and influential International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (2001), enabling linkage of clinical concepts across health conditions.

This Compendium provides a repository of approximately 150 instruments which are described in detail and critically reviewed. It will be a valuable reference for clinicians, researchers, educators, graduate students and a practical resource for those involved in the assessment of people with brain impairment.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part A: Body Functions 2. Scales of Consciousness and Orientation 3. Scales of General Cognitive Functions 4. Scales of Specific Cognitive Functions 5. Scales Assessing the Regulation of Behaviour, Thought, and Emotion 6. Scales of Sensory, Ingestion and Motor Functions Part B: Activities and Participation 7. Scales of Activities of Daily Living 8. Scales of Participation and Social Role Part C: Contextual Factors 9. Scales of Environmental Factors Part D: Multi-Domain 10. Global and Multidimensional Scales November 2009: 297x219: 720pp Hb: 978-1-84169-561-7 £100.00 before publication £125.00 thereafter

US $200.0

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

PSYCHOLOGY

3RD EDITION

3RD EDITION

2ND EDITION

Handbook of Personality

Handbook of Emotions

Theory and Research, Third Edition

Edited by Michael Lewis, UMDNJ-Robert Wood Johnson Medical School, USA, Jeannette M. Haviland-Jones, Rutgers University, USA, and Lisa Feldman Barrett, Boston College, USA

Foundations of Evolutionary Psychology

Edited by Oliver P. John, Richard W. Robins, both at the Department of Psychology, University of California, USA and Lawrence A. Pervin, Department of Psychology, The State University of New Jersey, USA Long the reference of choice for researchers and students of personality, this authoritative Handbook is now in a substantially revised and expanded third edition.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction. History of Modern Personality Theory and Research.

Part 2: Theoretical Perspectives. Human Nature and Individual Differences: Evolution of Human Personality.

Psychoanalytic Approaches to Personality. Paradigm Shift to the Integrative Big Five Trait Taxonomy: History, Measurement, and Conceptual Issues. The Five-Factor Theory of Personality. When Is Personality Revealed?: A Motivated Cognition Approach. Toward a Unifying Theory of Personality: Integrating Dispositions and Processing Dynamics within the Cognitive-Affective Processing System. Personal Narratives and the Life Story.

Part 3: Biological Bases. Temperament: An Organizing Paradigm for Trait Psychology. Behavioral Genetics and Personality: A New Look at the Integration of Nature and Nurture. Toward a ’Molecular Psychology’ of Personality.

Personality in Animals. Part 4: Developmental Approaches, Parents’ Role in Children’s Personality Development: The Psychological Resource Principle.

The Development of Personality Traits in Adulthood.

Challenges and Opportunities at the Interface of Aging, Personality, and Well-Being. Part 5: Self and Social Processes. Naturalizing the Self. Identity Negotiation: A Theory of Self and Social Interaction. Self-Regulation.

Self-Presentation of Personality: An Agency–Communion Framework. Attachment Theory and Its Place in Contemporary Personality Theory and Research. Culture and Personality. Personality, Situations, and Person–Situation Interactions. Part 6: Cognitive and Motivational Processes. The Psychological Unconscious. Implicit Motives. Personality and the Capacity for Religious and Spiritual Experience. SelfDetermination Theory and the Role of Basic Psychological Needs in Personality and the Organization of Behavior.

Creativity and Genius. Part 7: Emotion, Adjustment, and Health Emotion and Emotion Regulation: Personality Processes and Individual Differences. SelfRegulatory Processes, Stress, and Coping. Personality and Psychopathology. Personality and Health: A Lifespan Perspective. Personality and Subjective Well-Being.

2008: 254x178: 862pp Hb: 978-1-59385-836-0: £64.50 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

’Emotion links all of psychology, making this Handbook essential across the discipline. This ’who’s who’ and ’what’s what’ in emotion provides an indispensable foundation for students and scholars.

Each reader will find much that is new in this rapidly changing and pivotal field. Personality and social psychologists appear at center stage, flanked on one side by biology and development, and on the other by cognition and application. The field of emotion and this Handbook helps define what it means to be fully human.’ - Susan T. Fiske, Eugene Higgins Professor of Psychology, Princeton University, USA Now in a thoroughly revised and expanded third edition, this authoritative Handbook reviews current knowledge about all aspects of emotion and its role in human behavior.

The field’s foremost researchers explore how emotion intersects with biology, developmental processes, social behavior, personality, cognition, and physical and mental health. Also presented are state-of-the-science perspectives on specific emotions, such as fear, anger, shame, disgust, positive emotions, and sadness. Extensively rewritten to reflect major scientific, theoretical, and clinical advances, the third edition features many new chapters and authors. New topics include emotion regulation, neuroimaging approaches, and emotions in psychotherapy, the social functions of emotion, emotional complexity, and emotion across the lifespan, transdiagnostic emotional disturbances in psychopathology, and much more.

2008: 254x178: 848pp Hb: 978-1-59385-650-2: £64.50 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

NEW 2ND EDITION

Handbook of Depression Ian H. Gotlib, Stanford University, USA and Constance L. Hammen, University of California, USA Bringing together the field’s leading authorities, this acclaimed work is widely regarded as the standard reference on depression and mood disorders. The Handbook provides comprehensive coverage of the epidemiology, course, and outcome of depressive disorders; issues in assessment and diagnosis; psychological and biological risk factors; effective approaches to prevention and treatment; and the nature of depression in specific populations. Each chapter offers a definitive statement of current theories, methods, and research findings, while also identifying key questions that remain unanswered. Reflecting significant developments in the field, the second edition is thoroughly updated and includes a number of new chapters and topics.

2008: 246x174 : 708pp Hb: 978-1-59385-450-8: £50.00 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

Edited by Charles Crawford and Dennis Krebs, both at Simon Fraser University, Canada Evolutionary psychology is concerned with the adaptive problems early humans faced in ancestral human environments, the nature of the psychological mechanisms natural selection shaped to deal with those ancient problems, and the ability of the resulting evolved psychological mechanisms to deal with the problems people face in the modern world. Evolutionary psychology is currently advancing our understanding of altruism, moral behavior, family violence, sexual aggression, warfare, aesthetics, the nature of language, and gender differences in mate choice and perception. It is helping us understand the relationships between cognitive science, developmental psychology, behavior genetics, personality, and social psychology.

Foundations of Evolutionary Psychology provides an up-to-date review of the ideas, issues, and applications of contemporary evolutionary psychology. It is suitable for senior undergraduates, first year graduate students, or professionals who wish to become conversant with the major issues currently shaping the emergence of this dynamic new field. It will be interesting to psychologists, anthropologists, sociologists, economists, philosophers, cognitive scientists, and anyone interested in using new developments in the theory of evolution to gain new insights into human behavior.

Selected Contents: Introduction Evolutionary Psychology: The Historical Context. Part 1: Biological Foundations of Evolutionary Psychology. Evolutionary Questions for Evolutionary Psychologists. Life History Theory and Human Development Sex and Sexual Selection. Kinship and Social Behavior. Part 2: Development: The Bridge from Evolutionary Theory to Evolutionary Psychology.

Sociogenomics for the Cognitive Adaptationist. Selfish Genes, Developmental Systems, and the Evolution of Development. Part 3: Evolved Mental Mechanisms: The Essence of Evolutionary Psychology. Biological Adaptations and Human Behavior. Evolved Cognitive Mechanisms and Human Behavior. Adaptations, Environments, and Behavior: Then and Now. Evolutionary Psychology. Research Methods. Part 4: The Evolutionary Psychology of Sex Differences. Physical Attractiveness: Signals of Phenotypic Quality and Beyond. Two Human Natures: How Men and Women Evolved Different Psychologies. Heroes and Hos: Reflections on Male and Female Natures. Part 5: The Evolutionary Psychology of Prosocial Behavior. How Selfish by Nature?

Gene-Culture, Co-Evolution, and the Emergence of Altruistic Behavior in Humans. Renaissance of the Individual: Reciprocity, Positive Assortment, and the Puzzle of Human Cooperation. Cooperation and Conflict Between Kith, Kin, and Strangers: Game Theory by Domains. On the Evolution of Moral Sentiments Part 6: The Evolutionary Psychology of Antisocial Behavior and Psychopathology. Is the ’Cinderella Effect’ Controversial? A Case Study of Evolution-Minded Research and Critiques Thereof Intergroup Prejudices and Intergroup Conflicts. The Evolution of Brain Mechanisms for Social Behavior. An Evolutionary Theory of Mind and Mental Illness: Genetic Conflict and the Mentalistic Continuum.

Psychopathology and Mental Illness. Part 7: Exploring the Explanatory Power of Evolutionary Psychology.

The Evolution of Religion. Adaptataionist 2008: 254x178: 544pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5956-0: £89.95 Pb: 978-0-8058-5957-7: £40.00

US $150.00

US $75.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

47

48

PSYCHOLOGY

International Handbook of Survey Methodology

Handbook of Metamemory and Memory

Handbook of Depression in Children and Adolescents

Edited by Edith D. de Leeuw, Joop Hox, both at Utrecht University, the Netherlands and Don Dillman, Washington State University, USA

Edited by John Dunlosky and Robert A. Bjork

Edited by John R. Z. Abela, McGill University, Canada, and Benjamin L. Hankin, University of South Carolina, USA

Series: European Association for Methodology Series This Handbook reviews the methodological and statistical issues in designing and analyzing surveys with contributions from leading methodologists.

Featuring examples from a variety of countries, the book examines: the foundations of survey design, including sources of error and ethical issues; designing surveys with tips on writing questions for multiple methods; and challenges involved in mixing these modes within one survey.

Intended for advanced students and researchers in the behavioural, social, and health sciences, the book also serves as a text for graduate level courses on survey methodology.

Selected Contents: Foundations. The Cornerstones of Survey Research. The Psychology of Asking Questions.

The Problem of Nonresponse. Comparative Survey Research: Goal and Challenges. Ethical Issues in Surveys.

Design. Coverage and Sampling. Choosing the Method of Data Collection. Writing Effective Questions. The Logic and Psychology of Constructing Questionnaires.

Testing Survey Questions. Implementation. Face-to-Face interviews. Telephone Surveys. Self-Administered Questionnaires: Mail Surveys and Other Applications.

Internet Surveys. IVR: Interactive Voice Response. Mixed Mode Surveys: When and Why. Data Analysis.

Weighting Survey Data. Analysis of Data from Complex Surveys. Incomplete Data: Diagnosis, Imputation, and Estimation. Accommodating Measurement Errors.

Special Issues. Survey Documentation: Towards Professional Knowledge Management in Sample Surveys.

Quality Assurance and Quality Control in Surveys.

Interviewer Training. Surveying Sensitive Topics. Panel Surveys. Surveys. Without Questions.

2008: 229x152: 560pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5752-8: £69.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5753-5: £22.50

This Handbook examines the interplay between metamemory and memory. Each contributor discusses cutting-edge theory and research that, in some way, showcases the symbiotic relationship between metamemory and memory. Together, these chapters support a central thesis, which is that a complete understanding of either metamemory or memory is not possible without investigating their mutual influence.

The inspiration for this volume was the life and research of Thomas O. Nelson, whose pioneering research in both the fields of metamemory and memory consistently highlighted their integrated nature.

Selected Contents: Introduction: The Integrated Nature of Metamemory and Memory. Evolution of Metacognition. Metacognition: Knowing About Knowing. , Measurement of Relative Metamnemonic Accuracy. Measuring Memory and Metamemory: Theoretical and Statistical Problems with Assessing Learning (In General) and Using Gamma (In Particular) To Do So. Memory Monitoring. Information-Based and Experience-Based Metacognitive Judgments. Memory Monitoring and the Delayed-JOL Effect. The Delayed JOL Effect with Very Long Delays: Evidence from Flashbulb Memories. Privileged Access for General Knowledge and Newly Learned Text Material. Feeling-of-Knowing Accuracy and Recollective Experience. Control of Memory. Metacognitive Guessing Strategies in Source Monitoring. Implicit Memory Tests: Techniques for Reducing Conscious Intrusion. Investigating Metacognitive Control in a Global Memory Framework.

Tales from the Crypt Omnesia. Metacognitive Processes in Creating False Beliefs and False Memories: The Role of Event Plausibility. Research on the Allocation of Study Time: Key Studies from 1890 to the Present (and Beyond).

Metacognitive Neuroscience. A Neurocognitive Approach to Metacognitive Monitoring and Control. Procedural Metacognition in Children: Evidence for Developmental Trends. Metacognition in the Classroom. Metacognition in Education: A Focus on Calibration.

2008: 254x178: 492pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6214-0: £50.00 eBook: 978-1-4106-1599-2

’This outstanding volume offers complete, thorough coverage of theoretical and empirical work on youth depression. It will be an invaluable resource for practitioners seeking a review of contemporary issues in the field, as well as students beginning their studies of unipolar depression in children and adolescents. The chapters offer an excellent integration of developmental psychopathology theory, prevention science, and clinical interventions. The volume presents concise, yet exhaustive reviews from an outstanding set of contributors.’ -Mitchell J. Prinstein, PhD, Department of Psychology, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, USA This timely, authoritative volume provides an integrative review of current knowledge on child and adolescent depression, covering everything from epidemiology and neurobiology to evidence-based treatment and prevention. From foremost scientist-practitioners, the book is organized within a developmental psychopathology framework that elucidates the factors that put certain children at risk and what can be done to help. Proven intervention models are discussed in step-by-step detail, with coverage of cognitive-behavioral, interpersonal, and pharmacological approaches, among others. Special topics include sex differences in depression, understanding and managing suicidality, and the intergenerational transmission of depression.

2008: 254x178: 496pp Hb: 978-1-59385-582-6: £43.50 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

US $80.00

US $110.00

US $34.95

For Handbooks in Education, see Page 7

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

PSYCHOLOGY

Handbook of Constructionist Research Edited by James A. Holstein Marquette University, USA and Jaber F. Gubrium, University of Missouri, USA ’Remarkably, the editors have resisted the temptation to sacrifice depth for scope; instead, they cover immense empirical and theoretical territory in a sophisticated yet accessible way. This is a ’must have’ resource for students and scholars committed to understanding what social realities are constructed, how they come into being, and the consequences for understanding and ameliorating social problems.’ - Valerie Jenness, Department of Criminology, Law and Society, and Department of Sociology, University of California, USA Constructionism has become one of the most popular research approaches in the social sciences. But until now, little attention has been given to the conceptual and methodological underpinnings of the constructionist stance, and the remarkable diversity within the field. This cutting-edge Handbook brings together a dazzling array of scholars to review the foundations of constructionist research, how it is put into practice in multiple disciplines, and where it may be headed in the future. The volume critically examines the analytic frameworks, strategies of inquiry, and methodological choices that together form the mosaic of contemporary constructionism, making it an authoritative reference for anyone interested in conducting research in a constructionist vein.

2008: 254x178: 832pp Hb: 978-1-59385-305-1: £84.50 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

Handbook of Relationship Initiation

Attitudes and Attitude Change

Edited by Susan Sprecher, Amy Wenzel and John Harvey

Edited by William D. Crano, Claremont Graduate University, USA and Radmila Prislin, San Diego State University, USA

The Handbook of Relationship Initiation is the first volume to focus specifically on the very beginning stage of relationships – their origin. In this Handbook, leading scholars on relationships review the literature on various processes related to the initiation of relationships: how people meet, communicate for the first time, and begin to define themselves as being in a relationship. Topics include attraction, mate selection, influence of social networks on relationship initiation, initiation over the internet, hook-ups among young adults, and flirting and opening gambits. In addition, the dark side of relationship initiation is considered, including unwanted relationship pursuit and barriers to relationship initiation including social anxiety.

This volume provides an overdue synthesis of the literature on this topic. It is especially timely in view of the growing prevalence on relationship initiation online, through matchmaking and other social networking sites, which has increased awareness that science can be used to understand, create, and facilitate compatible matching.

This Handbook provides an essential resource for an interdisciplinary range of researchers and students who study relationships, including social psychologists, communication scientists and scholars of marriage and the family.

2008: 254x178: 600pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6159-4: £49.95 Pb: 978-0-8058-6160-0: £27.50 eBook: 978-1-84169-772-7

US $85.00

US $44.95

Series edited by Arie W. Kruglanski, University of Maryland at College Park, USA and Joseph P. Forgas, University of New South Wales, Sydney Series: Frontiers of Social Psychology This volume assembles a distinguished group of international scholars whose chapters on classic and emerging issues in research on attitudes provide an excellent introduction for advanced undergraduates and graduate students. The book’s chapters cover all of the most critical features of attitude measurement, attitude development, and attitude change. Implicit and explicit approaches to measurement and conceptualization are featured throughout, making this one of the most upto-date treatments of attitude theory and research currently available.

The comprehensive coverage of the central topics in this important field provides a useful text in advanced courses on persuasion or attitude change.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Introduction.

Attitudes and Attitude Change: The Fourth Peak.

Section 2: Attitudes, Nature, and Measurement.

Structure of Attitudes: Judgments, Memory, and Implications for Change. Attitude Measurement.

Implicit Attitudes 101: Theoretical and Empirical Insights.

Section 3: Attitudes: Origins and Formation. Attitude Formation and Change Through Association: An Evaluative Conditioning Account. Origins of Attitudes.

The Role of Affect in Attitudes and Attitude Change.

Section 4: Attitudes: Change and Resistance.

Information Processing Approaches to Persuasion: Integrating Assumptions from the Dual and SingleProcessing Perspectives. Attitude Functions in Persuasion: Matching, Involvement, Self-Affirmation, and Hierarchy.

Section 5: Attitudes: Beyond Evaluation. A New Framework for Resistance to Persuasion: The Resistance Appraisals Hypothesis. Attitude Strength. Attitudinal Ambivalence. Section 6: Attitudes: Mutual Impacts of Beliefs and Behaviors. Attitudes and the Prediction of Behavior. How Behavior Shapes Attitudes: Cognitive Dissonance Processes. Section 7: Attitudes: The Social Context. Social Identity and Attitudes. Persuasion from Minority and Majority Groups. Normative Beliefs as Agents of Influence: Basic Processes and Real-World Applications.

2008: 229x152: 456pp Hb: 978-1-84169-481-8: £39.95

US $65.00

World Who’s Who Europa Biographical Reference Online www.worldwhoswho.com At the forefront of biographical reference, the World Who’s Who provides easy to locate details for over 56,000 of the world’s most eminent personalities.

• Now including over 56,000 entries • New design for easier access than ever before • Click through web links and email addresses.

Email reference@routledge.com to order your free trial today!

www.online.taylorandfrancis.com

online

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

49

50

PSYCHOLOGY

Textbook of Clinical Neuropsychology Edited by Joel E. Morgan, New Jersey Medical School, Department of Neurology, and Independent Practice, USA and Joseph H. Ricker, Associate Professor and Director of Neuropsychology and Rehabilitation Psychology, Department of Physical Medicine & Rehabilitation, University of Pittsburgh, USA Series: Studies on Neuropsychology, Neurology and Cognition ’In sum: This ‘‘must have’’ text for neuropsychologists and their students is such a basic and comprehensive resource that it will not go out of date soon, even in this rapidly expanding field.

Moreover, it includes so much information relevant for neurologists, pediatricians, speech pathologists, health psychologists, and neurorehabilitation specialists that they and their students will welcome it too. As an added bonus, it is truly good value for the publisher’s price.’Muriel D. Lezak, The Clinical Neuropsychologist With close to fifty chapters by some of the most prominent clinical neuropsychologists, the Textbook of Clinical Neuropsychology sets a new standard in the field in its scope, breadth, and scholarship. Unlike most other books in neuropsychology, the Textbook is organized primarily around syndromes, disorders, and related clinical phenomena. Written for the clinician at all levels of training, from the beginner to the journeyman, the Textbook presents contemporary clinical neuropsychology in a comprehensive volume.

Chapters are rich with reviews of the literature and clinical case material spanning a range from pediatric to adult and geriatric disorders. Chapter authors are among the most respected in their field, leaders of American Neuropsychology, known for their scholarship and professional leadership. Rarely have so many distinguished members of one discipline been in one volume.

This is essential reading for students of neuropsychology, and all others preparing for careers in the field.

2008: 279x216: 1,048pp Hb: 978-1-84169-477-1: £60.00

US $99.00

Handbook of Emergent Methods Edited by Sharlene Nagy Hesse-Biber, Boston College, USA and Patricia Leavy, Stonehill College, USA ’This comprehensive Handbook details creative new approaches to asking and exploring questions within the social sciences. These approaches offer liberation from the narrowing straits of logical positivistic measurement and quantification, and chart the paths to addressing more socially meaningful questions.

They provide means for examining social reality with fresh tools.’ - Ruthellen Josselson, School of Psychology, Fielding Graduate University, USA Social researchers increasingly find themselves looking beyond conventional methods to address complex research questions. The Handbook of Emergent Methods is the first book to comprehensively examine emergent qualitative and quantitative theories and methods across the social and behavioral sciences. Providing scholars and students with a way to retool their research choices, the volume presents cutting-edge approaches to data collection, analysis, and representation. Leading researchers describe alternative uses of traditional quantitative and qualitative tools; innovative hybrid or mixed methods; and new techniques facilitated by technological advances.

Consistently formatted chapters explore the strengths and limitations of each method for studying different types of research questions and offer practical, in-depth examples.

2008: 254x178: 740pp Hb: 978-1-59385-147-7: £73.00 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

Clinical Handbook of Schizophrenia Edited by Kim T. Mueser, Dartmouth Medical School, USA and Dilip V. Jeste, University of California, USA ’The last twenty years have seen extraordinary breakthroughs in our understanding and treatment of schizophrenia. This Handbook manages to capture both the breadth and depth of these advances with impressive scholarship and élan. Written by international leaders in the field, this volume is an essential addition to the libraries of scientists and clinicians.’ - Max Birchwood, DSc, Professor of Mental Health, University of Birmingham, UK Reviewing the breadth of current knowledge on schizophrenia, this Handbook provides clear, practical guidelines for effective assessment and treatment in diverse contexts. Leading authorities have contributed sixty one concise chapters on all aspects of the disorder and its clinical management. In lieu of exhaustive literature reviews, each chapter summarizes the current state of the science; highlights key points the busy practitioner needs to know; and lists recommended resources, including seminal research studies, invaluable clinical tools, and more.

Comprehensive, authoritative, and timely, the volume will enable professionals in any setting to better understand and help their patients or clients with severe mental illness.

2008: 254x178: 650pp Hb: 978-1-59385-652-6: £50.00 ** NOT AVAILABLE IN THE US **

Handbook of Child Language Disorders Edited by Richard G. Schwartz, City University of New York, USA ’This creatively conceived volume not only provides a cutting-edge exploration of our current understanding of language disorders in children, it also points to likely future developments through its description of emerging methods and theories.

The impressive group of contributors cogently represent the wide range of disciplines with interests in this population. Their writing is provocative, yet accessible to readers at many levels of expertise and from many disciplines. In short, this is a book that I will buy for my own library, and then thrust upon colleagues, students, and anyone else who studies or treats children with language disorders. It seems destined to become a classic’ - Rebecca McCauley, The University of Vermont, USA The Handbook of Child Language Disorders provides an in-depth, comprehensive, and state-of-the-art review of current research concerning the nature, assessment, and remediation of language disorders in children.

To examine the nature of deficits, their assessment and remediation across populations, chapters address the main components of language (morphology, syntax, semantics, and pragmatics) and related areas (processing, memory, attention, executive function such as reading and writing). Finally, even though there is extensive information regarding research and clinical methods in each chapter, there are individual chapters that focus directly on research methods.

This Handbook is a comprehensive reference source for clinicians and researchers and can be used as a textbook for undergraduate, masters, and doctoral students in speech-language pathology, developmental psychology, special education, disabilities studies, neuropsychology and in other fields interested in children’s language disorders.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Typology of Child Language Disorders. Specific Language Impairment.

Language Disorders in Children with Mental Retardation of Genetic Origin: Down Syndrome, Fragile X Syndrome, and Williams Syndrome. Language Disorders in Children with Autism. Language Disorders in Children with Hearing Impairment. Dyslexia. Part 2: Bases of Child Language Disorders. Linguistic Bases of Child Language Disorders. Neurobiology of Child Language Disorders.

Attention and Memory in Child Language Disorders.

Speech Perception and Production in Child Language Disorders. Genetics of Child Language Disorders. ModelBased Approaches to Child Language Disorders.

Part 3: Language Contexts of Child Language Disorders. Bilingualism in Child Language Disorders.

Cross-Linguistic Studies of Child Language Disorders.

Language Variation in Child Language Disorders.

Part 4: Deficits, Assessment, and Intervention in Child Language Disorders. Morphosyntax in Child Language Disorders. Semantics in Child Language Disorders. Syntax in Child Language Disorders.

Pragmatics and Social Communication in Child Language Disorders. Reading and Writing in Child Language Disorders. Processing Speed, Attention, and Perception in Child Language Disorders. Part 5: Research Methods in Child Language Disorders. Language Production Approaches to Child Language Disorders. Language Comprehension Approaches to Child Language Disorders.

Research and Development in Child Language Intervention: A Five-Phase Model. Neuroscience Approaches to Child Language Disorders.

2008: 254x178: 608pp Hb: 978-1-84169-433-7: £55.00

US $95.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

RELIGION

51

SOCIOLOGY

NEW

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Companion to Religion and Film

Routledge Handbook of Criminology

International Handbook of Sexuality, Health and Rights

Edited by John Lyden, Dana College, Nebraska, USA

An International Perspective

Edited by Peter Aggleton, Institute of Education, University of London, UK and Richard Parker, Columbia University, USA

The Routledge Companion to Religion and Film brings together a lively and experienced team of contributors to introduce students to the key topics in religion and film and to investigate the ways in which the exciting subject of religion and film is developing for more experienced scholars. Divided into four parts, the Companion: • analyzes the history of the interaction of religion and film, through periods of censorship as well as appreciation of the medium • studies religion-in-film, examining how the world’s major religions, as well as Postcolonial, Japanese and New Religions, are depicted by and within films • uses diverse methodologies to explore religion and film, such as psychoanalytical, theological and feminist approaches, and audience reception

Edited by Cindy J. Smith, Sheldon X. Zhang and Rosemary Barberet

The last two decades have witnessed a veritable explosion of research on sexuality as the social sciences have worked to find new ways of understanding a rapidly changing world.

Growing concern for issues such as population, women’s and men’s reproductive health, and the HIV and AIDS pandemic, has since provided new legitimacy for work on sexuality, health and rights.

This Handbook represents the latest thinking and findings from a group of senior and promising young scholars around the world who came together in an effort to broaden our perspectives in understanding crime and social control across borders and nationalities.

This collaborative project articulates a new way of thinking about criminology and to strive for an over arching framework that is truly international. To reduce the complexity of this effort into manageable portions, we present three distinct, albeit often overlapping, types of crime; international crime (e.g., crimes against humanity), transnational crime (e.g., human trafficking), and national crime (e.g., description of one nations system and its related crimes).

Each of these perspectives is articulated through chapters on the traditional components (e.g., theory and methods), the international components (e.g., comparative methods, transferability), and a series of case studies of nations.

A detailed and up-to-date reference work, The Handbook of Sexuality, Health and Rights provides an authoritative overview of the main issues in the field today. Leading academics and practitioners have been brought together to reflect on past, present and future approaches to understanding and promoting sexual health and rights. Divided into nine parts, it covers:

• analyzes religious themes in film, including Redemption, the Demonic, Jesus or Christ Figures, Heroes and Superheroes

At the end of each chapter is a list of prompting questions suitable for students to pursue as their senior and masters theses. Many of these questions are also intended for young scholars to move the field forward.

• pioneering beginnings

• considers films as diverse as The Passion of the Christ, The Matrix, Star Wars and Groundhog Day

October 2010: 246x174: 600pp Hb: 978-0-415-77909-8: £130.00

• the reproductive imperative

This definitive Handbook provides an accessible resource to this emerging field and is an indispensable guide to religion and film for students of Religion, Film Studies, and beyond.

FORTHCOMING

Selected Contents: Part 1: History of the Interaction between Religion and Film: Focus on Western Christianity 1. Silent Cinema and Religion: An Overview (1895-1930) (Terry Lindvall) 2. The Era of Censorship (1930-1967) (Andrew Quicke) 3. The Roman Catholic Church and Cinema (1967 to the present) (Peter Malone) 4. Modern Protestant Approaches to Film (1960 to the Present) (Bryan Stone) Part 2: Depictions of and by Religious Practitioners in Films 5. Judaism (Melanie Wright) 6. Christianity (Craig Detweiler) 7. Islam (Amir Hussain) 8. Hinduism (Rachel Dwyer) 9. Buddhism (Francisca Cho) 10. Postcolonial Religious Syncretism: Focus on the Philippines, Peru, and Mexico (Antonio Sison) 11. Religion in Japanese Film: Focus on Anime (Jolyon Baraka Thomas) 12. New Religious Movements (Paul Thomas) Part 3: Academic Approaches to the Study of Religion and Film 13. Feminism (Gaye Williams Ortiz) 14. Audience Reception (Clive Marsh) 15. Cultural Theory and Cultural Studies (Gordon Lynch) 16. Psychoanalysis (Kent Brintnall) 17. Theological Approaches (Robert K. Johnston) Part 4: Categories Applicable to Religion and Film Studies 18. Narrative (Roy Anker) 19. Redemption (Chris Deacy) 20. Apocalyptic (Conrad Ostwalt) 21. Heroes and Superheroes (Robert Jewett and John Lawrence) 22. Horror and the Demonic (Douglas Cowan) 23. Jesus or Christ Figures (Adele Reinhartz) 24. Iconography (Diane Apostolos-Cappadona) 25. Sacrifice (Jon Pahl) 26. Ethics (Jolyon Mitchell) April 2009: 246x174: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-44853-6: £120.00

US $215.00

US $210.00

• from sexuality to health • how to have sex in an epidemic • the choreography of sex • the darker side of sex

Routledge Handbook of Contemporary Social and Political Theory Edited by Gerard Delanty and Stephen P. Turner The triangular relation between the social, the political and the cultural has opened up social and political theory to new challenges. The social can no longer be reduced to the category of society and the political extends beyond the traditional concerns of the nature of the state and political authority. Due in part to the impact of the cultural turn in the social and human science, these areas are now less easily separated.

The Handbook will address a range of issues that have emerged out of recent social and political theory. It will focus on key themes as opposed to schools of thought or major theorists. Each chapter is an emerging, cutting edge topic that is of interest both to social theory and to political theory. Most topics will have a clear and substantive focus on social or political problems.

The Handbook is storganised into five themes with each six contributions. Chapters will be written in a concise and accessible style aimed at the advanced student and the established academic.

March 2011: 246x174 Hb: 978-0-415-54825-0: £95.00

• language, discourse and sexual categories

US $155.00

• from sexual health to sexual rights • struggles for erotic justice This Handbook surveys the state of the discipline and offers an examination and discussion of emerging, controversial and cutting edge areas. It is an essential reference for all academics and researchers in the fields of sexuality studies, sexual health and human rights, as well as key reading for more advanced students.

November 2009: 246x174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-46864-0: £95.00

US $190.00

eBooks in Allied Health To find out more about our eBooks in Allied Health please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

The Routledge Religion Resource Routledge Reference Resources Online www.reference.routledge.com The Routledge Religion Resource is a cross-searchable online subject library that includes thirty reference essentials that have won critical accolades and places on the best reference lists, with new works and updates added every year Email reference@routledge.com to order your free trial today!

www.online.taylorandfrancis.com

online

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

52

SOCIOLOGY

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING

NEW

Handbook of Sexuality-Related Measures, Third Edition

The Handbook of Deviant Behavior

Handbook of Globalization Studies

Edited by Clifton D, Bryant, Department of Sociology, Virginia Tech University, USA

Edited by Bryan Turner, Wellesley College, USA

Edited by Terri D. Fisher, Ohio State University Mansfield, USA, Sandra L Davis, Clive M. Davis, both at Syracuse University, USA and William L. Yarber, Kinsey Institute, Indiana University, USA Fundamental to understanding human sexual expression is reliable and valid measurement and assessment. The instruments that have been developed are not easily accessible and the information is limited concerning appropriate use and psychometric properties. In this volume more than 200 instruments are reproduced, accompanied by the necessary information for their use in research.

January 2010: 279x216: 624pp Hb: 978-0-415-80174-4: £80.00 before publication; £95.00 thereafter Pb: 978-0-415-80175-1: £50.00 US $145.00

US $89.95

FORTHCOMING

Routledge International Handbook in Global Public Health Edited by Richard Parker, Columbia University, USA and Marni Sommer December 2010: 246x174: 464pp Hb: 978-0-415-77848-0: £95.00

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Cultural Sociology Edited by John R. Hall, Laura Grindstaff, and Ming-cheng Lo, both at University of California, Davis, USA US $155.00

January 2010: 246x174 Hb: 978-0-415-48274-5: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48813-6: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-88054-8

US $190.00

US $47.95

NEW

US $155.00

July 2010: 234x156: 574pp Hb: 978-0-415-47445-0: £95.00

This Handbook presents a comprehensive, integrative, and accessible overview of the contemporary body of knowledge in the field of social deviance in the 21st century. It addresses the range of scholarly concerns including theoretical, methodological, and substantive issues in this academic specialty. An international mix of recognized scholars have authored sixty seven definitive original entries on different topics in the field that focus on the historical and sociological evolution of the topics including notable scholars, research findings and published works that propelled this evolution. Beyond this, the entries will speak to and evaluate the contemporary state of knowledge in this area, and consider future directions and concerns that will engage scholars in the decades to come. Each part in the volume is introduced, examined, and connected by appropriate editorial commentary. Some of the entries will include comparative and cross-cultural examples and discussions. Other entries constitute case studies, and yet others focus on substantive and pedagogical concerns.

Handbook of Emotions and the Mass Media Edited by Katrin Doveling, Free University Berlin, Germany, Christian von Scheve and Elly A Konijn The impact of the mass media on individuals and society is to a great extent based on human emotions.

Emotions, in turn, are essential in understanding social behavior and public social life. This Handbook brings together the most current perspectives on these tightly intertwined and highly up-to-date issues. Leading international authorities in the fields of media and communication studies, psychology, sociology, and cultural studies provide a comprehensive overview of the various interrelations of the mass media and emotions. The Handbook systematically analyzes the role of emotions in mass media communications in a step-by-step fashion and on different levels of analyzis: psychological, functional, socio-cultural, and technical.

In six sections, the contributions address basic conceptual issues, emotions in reception processes, emotional goals and purposes of media communications, emotions as parts of media content, how medially communicated emotions structure and are structured by the socio-cultural environment, and how emotions are affected by innovative media technologies.

December 2009: 234x156: 324pp Hb: 978-0-415-48160-1: £95.00

US $180.00

eBooks in Sociology To find out more about our eBooks in Sociology please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

The Handbook offers students clear and informed chapters on the history of globalization and key theories that have considered the causes and consequences of the globalization process. There are substantive sections looking at military, economic, technological, social and cultural changes in globalization. The Handbook examines many negative aspects new wars, slavery, illegal migration, pollution and inequality - but concludes with an examination of responses to these problems through human rights organizations, international labour law and the growth of cosmopolitanism. There is a strong emphasis on interdisciplinarity with essays covering sociology, economics, politics, anthropology and history.

The Handbook written in a clear and direct style will appeal to a wide audience. The extensive references and sources will direct students to areas of further study.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Theories and Definitions 1. Theories of Globalization: Issues and Origins Bryan Turner 2. Cultural Theories of Globalization Smitha Radhakrishnan 3. Economic Theories of Globalisation Patrik Asper 4. Antiglobalisation Thomas Mertes 5. From Globalism to Empire Jan Nederveen Peterse 6. Vulnerability and Globalisation: The Social Impact Peadar Kirby Section 2: Substantive Issues 7. Transformations of the World’s Population: The Demographic Revolution John McInnes and Julio Perez Dias 8. Globalisation and the History of Great Migrations Adam McKeown 9. Globalisation Patriarchy and Labour Migration: Feminist Perspectives Sigal Gooldin and Adriana Kemp 10. The Environmental Crisis and Global Warming Ronnie D. Lipschutz 11. Globalization of Infectious Disease: New Plagues Susan Kippax and Niamh Stephenson 12. Global Inequality, Poverty and Famine Habib Khonderker 13. Globalization of Crime Robert Winslow 14. Globalization of Religious Fundamentalism Peter Beyer 15. Globalization and the Destruction of Aboriginal Societies Colin Samson and Carlos Gigou 16. Genocide, Atrocity and Ethnic Cleansing Martin Shaw 17. Global Elites Jan Pakulski 18. Ethnic Conflict and Globalization Daniele Conversi 19. Ageing and the Pensions Crisis Robin Blackburn Section 3: New Institutions and Cultures 20. Fandom and Popular Media Consumption Cornel Sandvoss 21. Hollywood, Bollywood and Beyond Chua Beng Huat and Stephen Teo 22. Global Cities Chris Hudson 23. Global Consumption Frank Trentman 24. Global Sexual Styles and Identities in Asia Michael Peletz 25. Global Food David Inglis 26. Globalization, Borders and Passports Mark Salter 27. Globalization of Space Peter Dickens and James Ormond 28. Globalization and Civilizational Processes Stephen Mennell Section 4: Critical Solutions 29. ILO and Labour Law Tony Woodiwiss 30. Globalisation of Human Rights Tom Cushman 31. Global Civil Society and the World Social Forum Kay Anantram, Christopher Chase Dunn and Ellen Reese 32. Muslim Cosmopolitanism: Contemporary Practice and Social Theory Humeira Iqtar 33. Perpetual Peace and Global Governance: Cosmopolitanism and International Society Ulrich Beck and Nathan Sznaider 34. The Future of Globalization Bryan S. Turner September 2009: 234x156: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-45808-5: £105.00 before publication; £95.00 thereafter Pb: 978-0-415-45809-2: £24.99 US $190.00

US $49.95

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

SOCIOLOGY

NEW

NEW

Handbook of Youth and Young Adulthood

The Handbook of Genetics & Society

New perspectives and agendas, UK

Mapping the New Genomic Era

Edited by Andy Furlong, Glasgow University

Edited by Paul Atkinson, Peter Glasner, both at Cardiff Univeristy, UK and Margaret Lock, McGill University, Canada

The parameters within which young people live their lives have changed radically. Changes in education and the labour market have led to an increased complexity of the youth phase and to an overall protraction in dependency and transitions.

Written by leading academics from several countries, this Handbook introduces up to date perspectives on a wide range of issues that affect and shape youth and young adulthood. It provides a an authoritative and multi-disciplinary overview of a field of study that offers unique insight on social change in a advanced societies and is aimed at academics, students and researchers and policy-makers.

The Handbook introduces some of the key theoretical perspectives used within youth studies and sets out future research agendas. Each of the ten sections covers an important area of research- from education and the labour market to youth cultures, health and crime whilst discussing change and continuity in the lives of young people. This work introduces readers to some of the most important work in the field while highlighting the underlying perspectives that have been used to understand the complexity of modern youth and young adulthood.

February 2009: 246x174: 496pp Hb: 978-0-415-44540-5: £95.00

US $190.00

Series: Genetics and Society An authoritative Handbook which offers a discussion of the social, political, ethical and economic consequences and implications of the new bio-sciences. The Handbook takes an interdisciplinary approach providing a synoptic overview of contemporary international social science research on genetics, genomics and the new life sciences. It brings together leading scholars with expertise across a wide-ranging spectrum of research fields related to the production, use, commercialisation and regulation of genetics knowledge. The Handbook is structured into seven themes cross-cutting themes in contemporary social science research on genetics with introductions written by internationally renowned section editors who take an interdisciplinary approach to offer fresh insights on recent developments and issues in often controversial fields of study. The Handbook explores local and global issues and critically approaches a wide range of public and policy questions, providing an invaluable reference source to a wide variety of researchers, academics and policy makers.

Selected Contents: Genetics and Society: Perspectives from the Twenty-first Century Part 1: Biomedical Applications of New Genetic Technologies 1. Introduction 2. Biomedicalising Genetic Health, Diseases and Identities 3. Stem Cells, Translational Research and the Sociology of Science 4. Reproductive Genetics: From Choice to Ambivalence and Back Again 5. Localizing Genetic Testing and Screening in Cyprus and Germany: Contingencies, Continuities, Ordering Effects and Bio-cultural Intimacy 6. Nutrigenomics Part 2: Commercialisation Genomes and Markets 7. Introduction 8. Making Europe Unsafe for Agbiotech 9. Genetic Information and Insurance Underwriting: Contemporary Issues and Approaches in the Global Economy 10. On a Critical Path: Genomics, the Crisis of Pharmaceutical Productivity and the Search for Sustainability 11. States, Markets and Networks in Bioeconomy Knowledge Value Chains Part 3: Representations of Genomics 12. Introduction 13. Stakeholder Representations in Genomics 14. Human Genetics and Cloning in the Media: Mapping the Research Field 15. Cultural Imaginaries and Laboratories of the Real: Representing the Genetic Sciences 16. Genes In Our knot Part 4: Regulation Expressing the Gene: the Discursive and Institutional Regulation of Genetics 17. Introduction 18. Law and Regulation 19. Forensic DNA Databases and Biolegality: The CoProduction of Law, Surveillance Technology and Suspect Bodies 20. Bio-Banks and the Challenges of Governance, Legitimacy and Benefit Part 5: Bioethics and Genetics 21. Introduction 22. Rethinking Privacy in the Genetics Age 23. Bioethics and Human Genetic Engineering 24. Towards a Bioethics of Disability and Impairment 25. Ethical Perspectives on Animal Biotechnology Part 6: Diversity and Justice 26. Introduction 27. Religion and Nationhood: Collective Identities and the New Genetics 28. Extravagance or the Good and the Bad of Genetic Diversity 29. Eugenics 30. Human Dignity and Biotechnology Policy Part 7: New Forms of Knowledge Production 31. Introduction 32. Centralising Labels to Distribute Data: The Regulatory Role of Genomic Consortia 33. Innovative Genetic Technologies, Governance and Social Accountability 34. Genomic Platforms and Hybrid Formations May 2009: 246x174: 550pp Hb: 978-0-415-41080-9: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-92738-0

Handbook of Public Communication of Science and Technology Edited by Massimiano Bucchi, University of Trento, Italy and Brian Trench, Dublin City University, Ireland ’This work provides a useful introduction to the study of research trends in the public communication of science and technology. It is particularly strong in showing the changes in this field, ranging from the ideas of popularization and a general understanding of science to an active, engaging dialogue between scientists and the broader society. With editors and contributors from various parts of the world, the book is particularly sensitive to international issues...Highly recommended.’ — Choice Comprehensive yet accessible, this key Handbook provides an up-to-date overview of the fast growing and increasingly important area of ‘public communication of science and technology’, from both research and practical perspectives. As well as introducing the main issues, arenas and professional perspectives involved, it presents the findings of earlier research and the conclusions previously drawn. Unlike most existing books on this topic, this unique volume couples an overview of the practical problems faced by practitioners with a thorough review of relevant literature and research.

The practical Handbook format ensures it is a studentfriendly resource, but its breadth of scope and impressive contributors means that it is also ideal for practitioners and professionals working in the field.

Combining the contributions of different disciplines (media and journalism studies, sociology and history of science), the perspectives of different geographical and cultural contexts, and by selecting key contributions from appropriate and well-respected authors, this original text provides an interdisciplinary as well as a global approach to public communication of science and technology.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Popular Science Books 2. Science Journalism 3. Science Museums and Science Centers 4. Cinematic Science 5. Of Deficits, Deviations and Dialogues: Theories of Public Communication of Science 6. Health Campaign Research 7. Genetics and Genomics: The Ethics and Politics of Metaphorical Framing 8. Survey Research and the Public Understanding of Science 9. Scientists as Public Experts 10. Public Relations in Science: Managing the Trust Portfolio 11. Environmental Groups and other NGOs as Science Communicators 12. Public Participation and Dialogue 13. Internet: Turning Science Communication Inside-Out 14. Risk, Science and Public Communication: Third-Order Thinking about Scientific Culture 15. Public Communication of Science and Technology in Developing Countries 16. Communicating the Social Sciences 17. Evaluating Public Communication of Science and Technology 2008: 246x174: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-38617-3: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-92824-0

US $190.00

To recommend any of these titles to your library please see centre of catalogue for the Library Recommendation form

US $155.00

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

53

54

SPORT

FORTHCOMING

NEW

Handbook of Applied Sport Psychology

Routledge Companion to Sports History

Edited by Stephanie Hanrahan, The University of Queensland, Australia and Mark Andersen, Victoria University, Australia

Edited by Steven W. Pope, West Virginia University, USA and John Nauright, Georgia Southern University, USA

The Handbook of Applied Sport Psychology is a definitive guide to the theory and practice of sport psychology. It goes further than any other book in surveying the full variety of issues that practising sport psychologists will confront in their working lives. It introduces the most important tools and skills that psychologists must employ to get the best out of their clients and, crucially, it adopts a holistic definition of the role of the sport psychologist, explaining how effective counselling, measured assessment and therapeutic models can add an important extra dimension to professional practice.

The field of sports history is no longer a fledgling area of study. There is a great vitality in the field and it has matured dramatically over the past decade. Reflecting changes to traditional approaches, sport historians need now to engage with contemporary debates about history, to be encouraged to position themselves and their methodologies in relation to current epistemological issues, and to promote the importance of reflecting on the literary or poetic dimensions of producing history. These contemporary developments, along with a wealth of international research from a range of theoretical perspectives, provide the backdrop to the new Routledge Companion to Sports History.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Counselling Part 2: Assessment Part 3: Theoretical/Therapeutic Models Part 4: Specific Issues Part 5: Team-related Issues Part 6: Population Considerations Part 7: Traditional Mental Skills Conclusion June 2010: 246x174: 600pp Hb: 978-0-415-48463-3: £100.00

US $165.00

FORTHCOMING

Routledge Handbook of Sports Development Edited by Barrie Houlihan and Mick Green, both at Loughborough University, UK October 2010: 246x174: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-47996-7: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88558-1

US $155.00

This book provides a comprehensive guide to the international field of sports history as it has developed as an academic area of study. Readers are guided through the development of the field across a range of thematic and geographical contexts and are introduced to the latest cutting edge approaches within the field.

Including contributions from many of the world’s leading sports historians, the Routledge Companion to Sports History is the most important single volume for researchers and students in, and entering, the sports history field. It is an essential guide to contemporary research themes, to new ways of doing sports history, and to the theoretical and methodological foundations of this most fascinating of subjects.

Selected Contents: 1. Theory in Sports History 2. Practicing Sorcery: Revisiting the Sports Historians Craft 3. Sport Historians, the City and the New Social History 4. ’Borderlands, Frontiers, and the Writing of Sport History: Confronting the ‘Metropolitan Fallacy’’ 5. Marxist Approaches 6. Sports History and Sociology of Sport 7. Origins: Sport in the Ancient Western World 8. Gender 9. Race 10. Body Cultures 11. Science and Technology 12. Entrepreneurship and Sport History 13. Religion 14. Politics 15. International Relations 16. Imperialism 17. Nationalism 18. Postcolonialism 19. Globalization 20. Action Sports 21. Africa (SubSaharan) 22. Australia 23. Canada 24. The Caribbean 25. China 26. Central and Eastern Europe 27. England and Wales 28. France 29. Germany 30. The Indian Subcontinent 31. Ireland 32. Japan 33. The Low Countries (Belgium, Netherlands, Luxembourg) 34. The Middle East 35. Mexico and Central America 36. New Zealand (Aotearoa) 37. Nordic Countries 38. Russia/Soviet Union 39. South America 40. South East Asia 41. The United States of America

Routledge Handbook of Biomechanics and Human Movement Science Edited by Youlian Hong, Chinese University of Hong Kong and Roger Bartlett, University of Otago, New Zealand The Routledge Handbook of Biomechanics and Human Movement Science is a landmark work of reference.

It offers a comprehensive and in-depth survey of current theory, research and practice in sports, exercise and clinical biomechanics, in both established and emerging contexts.

Including contributions from many of the world’s leading biomechanists, the book is arranged into eight thematic sections: • modelling and computational simulation • neuromuscular system and motor control • methodology and systems of measurement • engineering, technology and equipment design • biomechanics in sports • injury, orthopaedics and rehabilitation • health and motor performance • training, learning and coaching.

Drawing explicit connections between the theoretical, investigative and applied components of sports science research, this book is both a definitive subject guide and an important contribution to the contemporary research agenda in biomechanics and human movement science.

It is essential reading for all students, scholars and researchers working in sports biomechanics, kinesiology, ergonomics, sports engineering, orthopaedics and physical therapy.

2008: 246x174: 624pp Hb: 978-0-415-40881-3: £125.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88968-8

US $250.00

September 2009: 246x174: 750pp Hb: 978-0-415-77339-3: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88541-3 US $170.00

eBooks in Sport To find out more about our eBooks in Sport please see www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

INDEX

A AACTE Committee on Innovation and Technology .17 Abbott, Geoffrey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Abela, John R. Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Accounting History, The Routledge Companion to . .5 Actors' Shakespeare, The Routledge Companion to 30 Adolescent Literacy Research, Handbook of . . . . . .44 AECT Series 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Aesthetics, Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Afflerbach, Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Aggleton, Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Akbarzadeh, Shahram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Albarran, Alan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Allan, Stuart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Allington, Richard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Althof, Stanley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 American Foreign Policy, Routledge Handbook of . .34 American Women During World War II: An Encyclopedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Andersen, Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Andrade, Heidi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Apple, Michael W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Applied Communication, Routledge Handbook of . .28 Applied Linguistics, The Routledge Handbook of . . .23 Applied Sport Psychology, Handbook of . . . . . . . . .54 Approach and Avoidance Motivation, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Archer, Ian W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Arkin, Robert M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Armed Conflict Database, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Armstrong, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Asian Education, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Asian Philosophy, Encyclopedia of . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Asian Security Studies, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Atkinson, Paul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Atlantic World, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Attachment, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Attitudes and Attitude Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Auditing Organizational Communication: A Handbook of Research, Theory and Practice . . . . .42 Ayers, William . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

B Babylonian World, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Back, Sudie E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Baek, John Y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Bailey, David J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Bakker, Arnold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Balchin, Tom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Ball, Martin J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Ball, Stephen J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Ballou, Dale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Barberet, Rosemary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Barlow, David H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Bartlett, Roger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Bates, Crispin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Beck, Christina S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 30 Bennett, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Berends, Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Bertram, Tony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Bestor, Theodore C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Bestor, Victoria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Biomechanics and Human Movement Science, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Bjork, Robert A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Blackledge, Adrian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Blyth, Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Bo Mou . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Boehmer, Elleke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Bomer, Randy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Bornstein, Marc H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Bould, Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Brady, Kathleen T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 43 Brass, Paul R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Breslin, Shaun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Brink, Stefan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Brown, John Russell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Bryant, Clifton D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Bryce, Trevor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Bucchi, Massimiano . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Bucknor, Michael Andrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Bucy, Erik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Bukowski, William M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Bullying, International Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Burdick , Steven 'Jake' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Burgess, J. Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Burnard, Trevor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Butler, Andrew M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Byrne, Sean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

C Cairns, Edward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Calvo, Paco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Card, Geoffrey B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Caribbean Literatures in English, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Carroll, Patrick J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Casiday, Augustine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Cassidy, Jude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Cavelty, Myriam Dunn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Caverly, David C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Central Asian Politics, Routledge Handbook of . . . .34 Chadwick, Andrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Chatterji, Joya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Chaudhuri, Rosinka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Cheney, George . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Child and Adolescent Behavior Disorders, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy, The Handbook of: Psychoanalytic Approaches . . . . . .41 Child Language Disorders, Handbook of . . . . . . . . .50 Chinese International Relations, A Handbook of . . .33 Chinese Philosophy, History of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Christenbury, Leila . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Christenson, Sandra L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Christians, Clifford G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Cibulka, James . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Cissna, Kenneth N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Cizek, Gregory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Clarke, Bruce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Classical Research, Handbook for . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Climate Change and Society, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Clinical Handbook of Couple Therapy . . . . . . . . . . .46 Clinical Handbook of Psychological Disorders: A Step-by-Step Treatment Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Clinical Handbook of Schizophrenia . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Clinical Neuropsychology, Textbook of . . . . . . . . . . .50 Clinical Sexuality for Mental Health Professionals, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Coats, Karen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Cochran-Smith, Marilyn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Cognitive Linguistics and Second Language Acquisition, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Coiro, Julie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Coleman, Hardin L.K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 College Reading and Study Strategy Research, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Compenduim of Test, Scales and Questionnaires, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Communication Ethics, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . .26 Communication Yearbook 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Communication Yearbook 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Companion to History of Modern Science . . . . . . . .32 Comparative Communication Research, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Compendium of Test, Scales and Questionnaires, A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Comrie, Bernard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Concise New Makers of Modern Culture, The . . . . .29 Conflict Analysis and Resolution, Handbook of . . . .38 Constructionist Research, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . .49 Contemporary Social and Political Theory, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Cook, Chris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Cooper, Bruce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Cordell, Karl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Corpus Linguistics, The Routledge Handbook of . . .24 Coulthard, Malcolm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Counseling and Counseling Education Series . . . . .17 Couple Therapy, Clinical Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . .46 Coward, Barry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Crano, William D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Crawford, Charles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Creativity, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . .6 Creese, Angela . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Criminology, Routledge Handbook of: An International Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Crow, Gary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 16 Cultural Developmental Science, Handbook of . . . .40 Cultural Sociology, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Curd, Martin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Curriculum Studies Handbook -The Next Moment: Exploring Post-Reconceptualization . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Cushman, Thomas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

D Das, Veena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Data-Based Decision Making in Education, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Davis, Clive M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Davis, Sandra L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 de Haan, Michelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 de Leeuw, Edith D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Defence Politics, Handbook of: International and Comparative Perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 DeFrates-Densch, Nancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Delanty, Gerard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Dementia Carers' Handbook, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Demers, Kelly E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

55

56

INDEX

Depression, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Depression in Children and Adolescents, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Design Research Methods in Education, Handbook of: Innovations in Science, Technology, Engineering, and Mathematics Learning and Teaching . . . . . . .16 Developmental Social Neuroscience, Handbook of .43 Deviant Behavior, The Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Dillman, Don . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Directors' Shakespeare, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Doll, Beth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Donnell, Alison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Doran, Susan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Douglas, Ian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Doveling, Katrin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Driscoll, Marcy P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Duffy, Gerald G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Dunlosky, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 48 Dyslexia, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . .13

Feldman Barrett, Lisa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Fernando, Suman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Fisher, Terri D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Fitzgerald, Jill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Flippo, Rona F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Flood, James . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Forensic Linguistics, The Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Forgas, Joseph P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Formative Assessment, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Forrest, James J. F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Foundations of Evolutionary Psychology . . . . . . . . .47 Frantic Assembly Book of Devising Theatre, The . . .30 Frey, Lawrence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Frontiers of Social Psychology Series . . . . . . . . .44, 49 Furlong, Andy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Furlong, Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Fusarelli, Lance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

G E Early Childhood Education, International Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Eccles, Jacquelynne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Education Policy Research, Handbook of . . . . . . . . .13 Education Politics and Policy, Handbook of . . . . . . .16 Educational Psychology Handbook Series . . . . . .16–17 Edwards, John Richard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Egyptian World, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Elbeheri, Gad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Election News Coverage Around the World, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Elizabethan World, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Elliot, Andrew J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Ellis, Nick C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Emergent Methods, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Emotions, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47, 52 Emotions and the Mass Media, Handbook of . . . . .52 Employee Selection, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Encisco, Patricia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Encyclopedia of Asian Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 English, Language and Literacy Teaching, The International Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 English, Lyn D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 English Historical Documents, 1558-1603 . . . . . . . .23 English Historical Documents, 1603-1660 . . . . . . . .22 English Historical Documents, 1914-1957 . . . . . . . .22 Espelage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Esser, Frank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Ethics, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Ethnic Politics, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . . . .35 European Association for Methodology Series . . . . .48 European Political Archives, The Routledge Guide to: Sources since 1945 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 European Union and Global Governance, The: A Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Everatt, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

F Fair Value and Financial Reporting, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Farr, James L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Feiman-Nemser, Sharon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Gad Heuman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Gallegos, Bernardo P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Gammage, Philip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Gandin, Luis Armand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Ganguly, Sumit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Gaunder, Alisa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Gaunt, Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Genetics & Society, The Handbook of: Mapping the New Genomic Era . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Genetics and Society Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Gifted Education, The Routledge International Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Gilman, Richard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Glasner, Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Global Public Health, Routledge International Handbook in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Global Public Relations Handbook, The: Theory, Research, and Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Globalization Studies, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Goode, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Gotlib, Ian H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Gracyk, Theodore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Graesser, Arthur C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Graham, Scott . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Graham, Steve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Greek Mythology, The Routledge Handbook of: Based on H. J. Rose's Handbook of Greek Mythology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Green, Mick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Greenfield, Shelly F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 43 Grindstaff, Laura . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Gubrium, Jaber F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Gunnar, Megan R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Gurman, Alan S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

H Hacker, Douglas J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Hall, John R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Hammen, Constance L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Handbook of/for/on .... see under individual topics (e.g. Cultural Development Science, Handbook of) Hanitzsch, Thomas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 29 Hankin, Benjamin L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Hanks, Reuel R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Hanrahan, Stephanie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Hard, Robin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Hargie, Owen D. W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Harvey, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Haviland-Jones, Jeannette M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Haynes, Jeff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Heath, Robert L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7, 29 Heath, Shirley Brice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Henry, Annette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Hesse-Biber, Sharlene Nagy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Hewitt, Martin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 History of Chinese Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 History of Modern Science, Companion to . . . . . . .32 Hoffman, James . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Hoggett, Steven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Holbert, R. Lance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Holstein, James A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Hong, Youlian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Hook, Steven W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Horne, Ann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Houck, Mike . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Houlihan, Barrie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Housing Design Handbook: A Guide to Good Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Howard, Philip N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Hox, Joop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Huebner, Scott . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Hymer, Barry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

I ICA Communication Series . . . . . . . . . .25–26, 29–30 Imagination and Mental Simulation, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Indian and South Asian History, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Indian Politics, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . .3 Indian Postcolonial, The: A Critical Reader . . . . . . . .24 International Business Coaching, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 International Handbook of Bullying . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 International Handbook of Early Childhood Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 International Handbook of English, Language and Literacy Teaching The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 International Handbook of Research on Conceptual Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 International Handbook of Sexuality, Health and Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 International Handbook of Survey Methodology . . .48 International Handbook on the Preparation and Development of School Leaders . . . . . . . . . .16 International Law, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . .38 International Perspectives on Forensic Mental Health Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 International Political Economy (IPE), Routledge Handbook of: IPE as a global conversation . . . . . .36 International Research in Mathematics Education, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Internet Politics, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . .37 Islamic World, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Israel, Susan E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Israeli-Palestinian Conflict, Routledge Handbook of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

INDEX

J Japanese Culture and Society, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Japanese Politics, The Routledge Handbook of . . . . .3 Jarvis, Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Jenkins, Christine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Jeste, Dilip V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Jewitt, Carey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Jimerson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 John, Oliver P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Johnson, Alison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Johnson, Dennis W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Jonassen, David H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Jones, Christopher M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Jones, Norman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Jongman, Albert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Journalism Studies, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

K Kaid, Lynda Lee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Kamil, Michael L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Kania, Andrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Kantor, Tadeusz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Keating, Frank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Kelly, Anthony E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Kirkpatrick, Andy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Klein, William M. P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Knight, Deborah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Knobel, Michele . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Kohli, Atul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Konijn, Elly A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Kowalski, Theodore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Kratochwill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Kratochwill, Thomas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Krebs, Dennis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Kruglanski, Arie W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

L Landfill Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Lankshear, Colin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Lanyado, Monica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Lapp, Diane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7, 43 Lasley, Thomas J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Latinos and Education, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Laursen, Brett . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Lay, M. G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 LEA's Communication Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27–28 Leavy, Patricia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Leiter, Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Lemmer, Bill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Lesh, Richard A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Leu, Donald J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Lever-Tracey, Constance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Levine, Stephen B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Levitt, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Levstik, Linda S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Lewin, Ross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Lewis, Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Lifelong Learning, The Routledge International Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Linguistics Encyclopedia, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Liow, Joseph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Literature and Science, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Living Hindu World, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Livingston, Paisley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Lo, Ming-cheng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Local and Regional Development, Handbook of . . .19 Lock, Margaret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Looney, Robert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Lumby, Jacky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Lyden, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

M MacArthur, Charles A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Malewski, Erik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Malmkjaer, Kirsten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Markman, Keith D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Martin-Jones, Marilyn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Mass Media Ethics, The Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . .29 Matthews, Dona J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Mauer, Victor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 May, Steve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 McCarthy, Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 McGill-Franzen, Anne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 McIntyre, D. John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 McMahon, Linnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Meece, Judith . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Mental Health in a Multi-Ethnic Society: A Multidisciplinary Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Metacognition in Education, Handbook of . . . . . . .11 Metamemory and Memory, Handbook of . . . . . . . .48 Metaphysics, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . .31 Ming-cheng Lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Mittal, Sushil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Moger, Susan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Moje, Elizabeth Birr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Moral, Michel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Moral and Character Education, Handbook of . . . . .17 Moran, Dermot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Morgan, Joel E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Morris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Morris, Richard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Morrow, Lesley Mandel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Mosenthal, Peter B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Motivation at School, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Mou, Bo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Moyar, Dean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Mueser, Kim T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Multilingualism, The Routledge Handbook of . . . . .23 Multimodal Analysis, The Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Munshi, Debashish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Murillo, Enrique G., Jr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Murphy, Joseph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

N Narvaez, Darcia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Nauright, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Nelson, Todd D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 New Security Studies, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Newman, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 News and Journalism Studies, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Nineteenth Century Philosophy, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Nonprofit Marketing, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Nucci, Larry P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

O Ogawa, Rodney . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 O'Hair, Dan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7, 29 O'Keeffe, Anne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Oleson, Kathryn C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Operations Research and Management Science Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 O'Reilly, William . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Orthodox Christian World, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Ottoman World, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

P Parker, Richard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51–52 Pascal, Christine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Pashiardis, Petros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Peace Education, Handbook on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Pearson, P. David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Peer Interactions, Relationships, and Groups, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Peoples and Places of Ancient Western Asia, The Routledge Handbook of the: The Near East from the Early Bronze Age to the fall of the Persian Empire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Personality, Handbook of: Theory and Research . . .47 Pervin, Lawrence A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Peters, Joel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Philosophy and Film, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Philosophy and Music, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Philosophy of Psychology, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Philosophy of Science, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Philosophy Online, Routledge Encyclopedia of . . . . .32 Pike, Andy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Plank, David N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Plantinga, Carl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Play Therapy and Therapeutic Play, The Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Political Communication Research, Sourcebook for: Methods, Measures, and Analytical Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Political Islam, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . . . .35 Political Management, Routledge Handbook of . . . .37 Politics and International Relations Resource, Routledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Pope, Steven W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Positive Psychology in Schools, Handbook of . . . . . .13 Practice and Research in Study Abroad, The Handbook of: Higher Education and the Quest for Global Citizenship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Prejudice, Stereotyping, and Discrimination, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Preparation and Development of School Leaders, International Handbook on the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Prevention Science, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Price, Eric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Price, F. Douglas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

57

58

INDEX

Quinn, Therese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Routledge Companion to/Handbook of ..., etc.. see under individual topics (e.g. Sports History, Routledge Companion to) Routledge Companions Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Routledge History of World Philosophies Series . . . .33 Routledge Literature Companions Series . . . . . . . . .27 Routledge Philosophy Companions Series . . . . .31–32 Routledge Politics and International Relations Resource, The - Routledge Reference Resources Online . . . . . .35 Routledge Religion Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 51 Routledge Worlds Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19–21 Rubin, Kenneth H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Rueda, Robert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Runco, Mark A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Rusong Wang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

R

S

Reading Research, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Reid, Gavin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Relationship Initiation, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Religion and Film, The Routledge Companion to . . .51 Religion and Politics, Routledge Handbook of . . . . .36 Religion Resource, Routledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 51 Renaissance World, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Reschly, Amy L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Research for Educational Communications and Technology, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Research in Social Studies Education, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Research on Adult Learning and Development, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Research on Children's and Young Adult Literature, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Research on Conceptual Change, International Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Research on Literacy and Diversity, Handbook of . . .43 Research on New Literacies, Handbook of . . . . . . . .17 Research on Reading Comprehension, Handbook of 14 Research on Reading Disabilities, Handbook of . . . .13 Research on School Choice, Handbook of . . . . . . . .12 Research on Schools, Schooling and Human Development Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Research on Teacher Education, Handbook of: Enduring Questions in Changing Contexts . . . . . .18 Research on Teaching Literacy Through the Communicative and Visual Arts, Handbook of, Volume II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Research on the Education of School Leaders, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Research on the Sociocultural Foundations of Education, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Rickards, Tudor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Ricker, Joseph H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Rippin, Andrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Risen, Candace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Risk and Crisis Communication, Handbook of . . .7, 29 Road Technology, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Roberts, Adam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Robins, Richard W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Robinson, Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Robison, Richard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Rossini, Manuela . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Salomon, Gavriel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Sandlin, Jennifer A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Sandole, Dennis J.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Sandole-Staroste, Ingrid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Sargeant, Adrian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Schaps, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Schizophrenia, Clinical Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Schmid, Alex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Schneider, Barbara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 School Counseling, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 School-Family Partnerships, Handbook of . . . . . . . .10 Schultz, Brian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Schwartz, Richard G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Science Fiction, The Routledge Companion to . . . . .27 Scobell, Andrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Security Studies, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Senehi, Jessica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Sexuality, Health and Rights, International Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Sexuality-Related Measures, Handbook of . . . . . . . .52 Shaver, Phillip R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Simpson, James . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Singh, Prerna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Skorupski, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Slavery, The Routledge History of . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Smagorinsky, Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Smith, Cindy J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Smith, M. Cecil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Snow, Nancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Social Justice in Education, Handbook of . . . . . . . . .13 Social Psychology of Consumer Behavior . . . . . . . . .44 Sociolinguistics Around the World: A Handbook . . .25 Sociology of Education, The Routledge International Handbook of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Sommer, Marni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Sourcebook for Political Communication Research: Methods, Measures, and Analytical Techniques . . . .27 South Asian Culture and Society, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 South Asian Diaspora, Routledge Handbook of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 South Asian Politics, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . .2 Southeast Asian Politics, Routledge Handbook of . .34 Spanish Language Media, Handbook of . . . . . . . . .27 Sports Development, Routledge Handbook of . . . . .54 Sports History, Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . .54 Sprecher, Susan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Price, Neil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Prislin, Radmila . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Psillos, Stathis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Psychological Disorders, Clinical Handbook of: A Step-by-Step Treatment Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Psychotherapy with Children and Adolescents, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Public Communication of Science and Technology, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Public Diplomacy, Routledge Handbook of . . . . . . .37 Public Pedagogy, Handbook of: Education and Learning Beyond Schooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Q

Springer, Mathew G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Sriramesh, Krishnamurthy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Stevenson, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Storey, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Stovall, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Strategic Human Resource Management, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Strömbäck, Jesper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Studies in Curriculum Theory Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Studies on Neuropsychology, Neurology and Cognition Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Suhr, Julie A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Survey Methodology, International Handbook of . . .48 Swearer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Sykes, Gary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Symons, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

T Tadeusz Kantor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Taylor, Philip M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Technological Pedagogical Content Knowledge (TPCK) for Educators, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . .17 Terrorism Research, Handbook of: Research, Theories and Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Textbook of Clinical Neuropsychology . . . . . . . . . . .50 Thursby, Gene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Tippins, Nancy T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Tomaney, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Tourish, Dennis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Tozer, Steve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Trench, Brian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Turner, Bryan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Turner, Stephen P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Twentieth Century Philosophy, The Routledge Companion to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Tyson, Cynthia A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

U Ulrich, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Uncertain Self, Handbook of the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Urban Ecology, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 US-Middle East Relations, Handbook of . . . . . . . . .33

V Vercic, Dejan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Victorian World, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Viking World, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Vint, Sherryl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Violence Risk Assessment, Handbook of . . . . . . . . .41 von Scheve, Christian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Vosniadou, Stella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

W Wahl-Jorgensen, Karin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Walberg, Herbert J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Walker, Stephen P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Walton, Peter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Wang, Rusong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Wanke, Michaela . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Washbrook, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Wearmouth, Janice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Weatherford, Doris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

INDEX

Wentzel, Kathryn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Wenzel, Amy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Wigfield, Allan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Wilkins, Lee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Wilson, Isaiah 'Ike' III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Wintle, Justin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Witts, Noel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Wolf, Shelby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Wolff, Stefan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Women and Addiction: A Comprehensive Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Woodhead, Christine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Work Engagement: A Handbook of Essential Theory and Research . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 World Englishes Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 World of Pompeii, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 World Who's Who . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 World's Major Languages, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Wright, Patrick M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Writing Research, Handbook of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Wunderlich, Jens-Uwe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Wymer, Walter Jr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Wyse, Dominic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Y Yarber, William L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Yeh, Christine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Yong Zhao . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Youlian Hong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Young, Michelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Youth and Young Adulthood, Handbook of . . . . . .53

Z Zhang, Sheldon X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Zhao, Yong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Click here for more information, or to request an inspection copy.

59

ORDER BOOKS HERE

HOW TO ORDER BOOKS

QTY

TITLE

ISBN

QTY

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

ISBN

QTY

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

CALL (credit cards) +44 (0) 1235 400524 ISBN

FAX +44 (0) 20 7017 6699

QTY

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

ISBN

INTERNET www.routledge.com QTY

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

EMAIL reference@routledge.com (sales enquiries only, please do not include card details in your email.

To order online please visit www.routledge.com)

eBooks are only available to order online at: www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

ISBN

QTY

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

ISBN

POST

- Return this form to: QTY

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

Taylor & Francis Group Bookpoint (T&F) Freepost RRXG-BBUL-LAER Abingdon, Oxon, OX14 4SB

ISBN

QTY

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

(only affix stamp if posting from outside UK) ISBN

QTY

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

ISBN

QTY

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

ISBN

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

If posting please fill in your details below and complete the form

PERSONAL DETAILS

POSTAGE (see below)

£

GRAND TOTAL

£

(PLEASE USE CAPS)

POSTAGE AND PACKING

SURNAME

FIRST NAME

UK

EUROPE

REST OF WORLD

5% of total order

10% of total order

15% of total order

Min Charge of £1, Max Charge £10 NEXT DAY +£6.50*

Min Charge of £2.95, Max Charge £20 NEXT DAY +£6.50

Min Charge of £6.50 Max Charge £30

DEPARTMENT *We only guarantee next day delivery for orders received before noon.

Prices and publication dates are subject to change

INSTITUTION

SELECT PAYMENT METHOD

VAT NUMBER (EU member States)

(please tick or fill appropriate boxes & select card type) ADDRESS

PLEASE SEND ME A PRE-PAYMENT INVOICE TOWN

COUNTY

POSTCODE

COUNTRY

(my ref number)

CHEQUE payable to Taylor & Francis £

TELEPHONE

CREDIT CARD (NB Select card type) EMAIL

MASTERCARD SIGNATURE

DATE

Please tick this box if you would like to receive more information on our standing order system

VISA

AMEX

SWITCH

ISSUE NUMBER (Only applies if paying by Switch)

EXPIRY DATE

SECURITY NUMBER Last 3 digits of security number on back of card

Please tick this box if you would like to receive mailings from Taylor & Francis Group companies EURO0912 A B C D E F

ISBN: 978-0-418-23441-9

Highlights

Page 2

Page 6

Page 11

Page 30

Page 31

Page 33

Page 51

Page 52

www.routledge.com/reference Routledge, 2 Park Square, Milton Park, Abingdon, Oxon OX14 4RN Tel: 020 7017 6000 Fax: 020 7017 6699 Email: reference@routledge.com Paper used in this catalogue is chlorine free and environmentally friendly. It is manufactured with pulp supplied from sustainable managed forests.